WO2020175955A1 - Method for transmitting or receiving signal in wireless communication system, and device for performing same - Google Patents

Method for transmitting or receiving signal in wireless communication system, and device for performing same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020175955A1
WO2020175955A1 PCT/KR2020/002889 KR2020002889W WO2020175955A1 WO 2020175955 A1 WO2020175955 A1 WO 2020175955A1 KR 2020002889 W KR2020002889 W KR 2020002889W WO 2020175955 A1 WO2020175955 A1 WO 2020175955A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
information
rlc
channel
transmission
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/KR2020/002889
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
박기원
서한별
이종율
Original Assignee
엘지전자 주식회사
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 엘지전자 주식회사 filed Critical 엘지전자 주식회사
Publication of WO2020175955A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020175955A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B17/00Monitoring; Testing
    • H04B17/30Monitoring; Testing of propagation channels
    • H04B17/309Measuring or estimating channel quality parameters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/12Wireless traffic scheduling

Definitions

  • the following description is for a wireless communication system, and more specifically, a method and apparatus for triggering an RLC ARQ operation based on a channel state.
  • Wireless communication systems are widely deployed to provide various types of communication services such as voice and data.
  • wireless communication systems share available system resources (bandwidth, transmission power, etc.) It is a multiple access system capable of supporting communication.
  • multiple access systems include a code division multiple access (CDMA) system, a frequency division multiple access (FDMA) system, a time division multiple access (TDMA) system, and
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • FDMA frequency division multiple access
  • TDMA time division multiple access
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • MC-FDMA multi carrier frequency division multiple access
  • eMBB Enhanced Mobile Broadband
  • mMTC Massive Machine Type Communication
  • Ultra-reliability and low cost It includes the field of Ultra-reliable and Low Latency Communications (URLLC); some use cases may require multiple domains for optimization, while others use only one key performance indicator (Key Performance). Indicator, KPI) can only be focused.
  • 5G is to support these different use cases in a flexible and reliable way.
  • eMBB far surpasses basic mobile Internet access, covers rich bi-directional operations, media and entertainment applications in the cloud or augmented reality.
  • Data is one of the core drivers of 5G, and is the first dedicated voice service in the 5G era. May not be able to see In 5G, it is expected that voice will be treated as an application simply using the data connection provided by the communication system.
  • the main reasons for increased traffic volume are the increase in content size and the increase in the number of applications that require high data transfer rates.
  • Streaming services (audio and video), interactive video and mobile Internet connections allow more devices to connect to the Internet. As they become more widely used, many of these applications require always-on connectivity to push real-time information and notifications to users. Cloud storage and applications are on mobile communication platforms.
  • 2020/175955 1 (:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 It is increasing rapidly, it can be applied to both work and entertainment.
  • cloud storage is a special use case that drives the growth of the uplink data rate.
  • 5G is also used for remote work in the cloud, and requires much lower end-to-end latency to maintain a good user experience when tactile interfaces are used; entertainment e.g. cloud gaming and Video streaming is another key factor in increasing the demand for mobile broadband capabilities.
  • Entertainment is essential for smartphones and tablets anywhere, including high mobility environments such as trains, cars, and airplanes. Another use case is entertainment. For augmented reality and information retrieval, where augmented reality requires very low latency and an instantaneous amount of data.
  • Industrial IoT is one of the areas where 5G plays a major role in enabling smart cities, asset tracking, smart utilities, agriculture and security infrastructure. Is one.
  • URLLC includes new services that will change the industry with ultra-reliable/low-latency links such as remote control of key infrastructure and self-driving vehicles.
  • the level of reliability and delay is Essential for smart grid control, industrial automation, robotics, and drone control and adjustment.
  • [8] 5G can complement FTTH (fiber-to-the-home) and cable-based broadband (or DOCSIS) as a means of providing streams rated from hundreds of megabits per second to gigabits per second. These fast speeds are virtual reality. In addition to over-augmented reality, TVs are delivered with a resolution of 4K or higher (6K, 8K and higher).
  • Virtual Reality (VR) and Augmented Reality (AR) applications include almost immersive sports events. Certain applications may require special network settings, e.g. for VR games, game companies In order to minimize these delays, the core server may need to be integrated with the network operator's edge network server.
  • Automotive is expected to be an important new engine for 5G, with many use cases for mobile communications to vehicles. For example, entertainment for passengers is simultaneously high capacity and high mobility mobile. They demand broadband because future users will continue to expect high-quality connections regardless of their location and speed. Another example of use in the automotive sector is augmented reality.
  • the wireless module will enable communication between vehicles, Exchange of information between the vehicle and the supporting infrastructure and
  • the safety system allows the driver to lower the risk of accidents by guiding alternative courses of action so that the driver can drive more safely.
  • the next step is It will be either remotely controlled or a self-driven vehicle, which requires very reliable and very fast communication between different self-driving vehicles and between the vehicle and the infrastructure. In the future, the self-driving vehicle will all drive itself. The activities will be carried out, and the driver will focus only on traffic abnormalities that the vehicle itself cannot identify.
  • the technical requirements of self-driving vehicles require ultra-low latency and ultra-fast reliability to increase traffic safety to levels unattainable to humans. do.
  • Smart cities and smart homes will be embedded with high-density wireless sensor networks.
  • Distributed networks of intelligent sensors will identify the cost of the city or home and the conditions for energy-efficient maintenance. Similar Settings can be done for each home.
  • Temperature sensors, window and heating controllers, burglar alarms and appliances are all wirelessly connected. Many of these sensors typically have low data rates, low power and low cost. However, for example, real-time HD video may be required on certain types of devices for surveillance.
  • Smart grids use digital information and communication technologies to collect information and act accordingly. Interconnecting sensors This information can include the behavior of suppliers and consumers, allowing smart grids to improve the distribution of fuels such as electricity in an efficient, reliable, economical, sustainable and automated way.
  • the smart grid can also be viewed as another sensor network with low latency.
  • the health sector has a number of applications that can benefit from mobile communications.
  • Communication systems can support remote care providing clinical care from remote locations. This helps to reduce barriers to distance. It can improve access to medical services that are not continuously available in remote rural areas, which are also used to save lives in critical care and emergency situations.
  • Mobile communication-based wireless sensor networks can provide sensors and remote monitoring of parameters such as heart rate and blood pressure.
  • Wireless and mobile communications are becoming increasingly important in industrial applications. Wiring is expensive to install and maintain. Therefore, the possibility of replacing cables with wireless links that can be reconfigured is an attractive opportunity for many industries. However, to achieve this. What is required is that the wireless connection operates with a delay, reliability and capacity similar to that of the cable, and its management will be simplified. Low latency and very low error rate are new requirements that need to be connected to 5G.
  • a wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (eg, bandwidth, transmission power, etc.).
  • An example of a multiple access system is a CDMA (code code). division multiple access) system, frequency division multiple access (FDMA) system, time division multiple access (TDMA) system, orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system, single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) system, MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.
  • CDMA code code
  • division multiple access frequency division multiple access
  • TDMA time division multiple access
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • MC-FDMA multi carrier frequency division multiple access
  • SL Sidelink
  • BS base station
  • UE User Equipment
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects on which infrastructure is built through wired/wireless communication.
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2I vehicle-to-infrastructure
  • V2N vehicle-to-network
  • V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian
  • V2X communication can be provided through PC5 interface and/or Uu interface.
  • Figure 1 shows V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.
  • [2 is related to V2X communication, in RAT before NR, BSM (Basic Safety Message),
  • V2X messages such as CAM (Cooperative Awareness Message) and DENM (Decentralized Environmental Notification Message), a method of providing safety service was mainly discussed.
  • V2X messages can include location information, dynamic information, property information, etc.
  • CAM of the message (periodic message) type and/or DENM of the event triggered message type can be transmitted to other terminals.
  • the CAM provides information on the dynamic status of the vehicle such as direction and speed, and 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 It can include basic vehicle information such as vehicle static data, exterior lighting condition, route history, etc.
  • the terminal can broadcast CAM, and the CAM latency ) May be less than 100 ms.
  • the terminal in the event of a vehicle breakdown or accident, the terminal can generate a DENM and transmit it to another terminal, for example, within the transmission range of the terminal. All vehicles can receive CAM and/or DENM, in which case DENM may have a higher priority than CAM.
  • V2X scenarios could include vehicle platooning, advanced driving, extended sensors, remote driving, and more.
  • vehicles can dynamically form groups and move together.
  • the above Vehicles in a group can receive periodic data from leading vehicles, for example, vehicles in the group can use periodic data to reduce or widen the gap between vehicles.
  • vehicles can be semi-automated or fully automated.
  • each vehicle may be located on a local sensor of a nearby vehicle and/or a nearby logical entity. Based on the acquired data, trajectories or maneuvers can be adjusted.
  • each vehicle can mutually share a driving intention with nearby vehicles.
  • raw data or processed data acquired through local sensors, or live video data is a vehicle, a logical entity, a pedestrian They can be interchanged between their terminals and/or the V2X application server, so, for example, a vehicle can perceive an improved environment than it can detect using its own sensors.
  • the remote driver or V2X application can operate or control the remote vehicle.
  • the remote vehicle For example, public transport department If the route can be predicted together, cloud computing-based driving can be used for the operation or control of the remote vehicle. In addition, for example, access to a cloud-based back-end service platform. Can be considered for remote driving.
  • the technical task of the embodiment(s) is that the RLC ARQ operation is performed only when necessary depending on whether a specific condition is satisfied.
  • a physical sidelink control channel PSCCH
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • RLC ARQ Automatic Repeat reQuest
  • a wireless communication system at least one processor; and the at least one processor, which can be operably connected to the at least one processor, and stores instructions for performing the operations by the at least one processor when executed.
  • the operations include: receiving a PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel) including SCI (Sidelink Control Information) from a second terminal; a reference signal from the second terminal based on the SCI Receiving a PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) comprising; performing channel state measurement based on the reference signal; and transmitting information of a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer to the second terminal; Including, but based on the result of the channel state measurement is less than the threshold value, the information of the RLC layer is RLC
  • ARQ automatic repeat request
  • One embodiment when executed by at least one processor, at least one
  • a computer-readable storage medium storing at least one computer program containing instructions for causing a processor to perform operations for the UE, the operations include Sidelink Control Information (SCI) from the second terminal.
  • SCI Sidelink Control Information
  • the RLC inheritance information is a storage medium containing information for triggering an RLC Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) operation.
  • NACK Negative-ACK
  • the information of the RLC layer may be an RLC Protocol Data Unit (PDU).
  • PDU RLC Protocol Data Unit
  • the RLC PDU may include an RLC header, and the RLC header may include information for triggering the RLC ARQ operation.
  • the RLC header may include a polling bit of 1 bit, and based on that the result of the channel state measurement is less than or equal to the threshold value, the polling bit is set to 1, and the result of the channel state measurement exceeds the threshold value. Based on being, the polling bit may be set to 0.
  • the information of the RLC layer may include information for stopping the RLC ARQ operation.
  • the step of performing a HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ) operation on the PSSCH may be further included.
  • the step of determining whether the result of the channel state measurement is less than or equal to the threshold value may be further included.
  • This first terminal may be another terminal, a terminal related to an autonomous vehicle, or a terminal that communicates with at least one of a base station or a network.
  • the RLC ARQ operation is performed only when necessary.
  • the signaling overhead of the sidelink terminal can be reduced and wireless resources can be efficiently used.
  • V2X communication based on RAT prior to NR shows V2X communication based on NR.
  • FIG 2 shows the structure of an LTE system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4 shows a structure of an NR system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates functional division between NG-RAN and 5GC according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 shows a structure of an NR radio frame to which the embodiment(s) can be applied.
  • FIG. 7 shows a slot structure of an NR frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 shows a structure of an S-SSB when the CP type is NCP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 shows a structure of an S-SSB when the CP type is ECP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 shows a resource unit for V2X or SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 shows a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a transmission mode according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 16 shows a terminal including an LTE module and an NR module according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 17 shows a transmission procedure of an RRC message according to an implementation of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 18 shows a one-way UE capability delivery according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 19 shows a bidirectional UE capability delivery according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 20 shows a bidirectional AS layer setting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 21 shows the physical layer processing of the transmission side according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 22 shows the physical layer processing of the receiving side according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 23 is, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, 5G capable of positioning for a UE connected to a Next Generation-Radio Access Network (NG-RAN) or E-UTRAN
  • NG-RAN Next Generation-Radio Access Network
  • E-UTRAN E-UTRAN
  • FIG. 24 shows an implementation example of a network for measuring the location of a UE according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • LPP LTE Positioning
  • Protocol shows an example of a protocol layer used to support message transmission.
  • 26 is a diagram of a protocol layer used to support NRPPa (NR Positioning Protocol A) PDU transmission between LMF and NG-RAN nodes according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 27 is an OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of) according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 28 is a synchronization source of V2X according to an embodiment of the present disclosure (synchronization
  • Fig. 29 shows a plurality of BWPs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 30 shows a BWP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 31 shows a resource unit for CBR measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 5] This is an example of a case where the PSCCH and PSSCH of FIG. 32 are multiplexed.
  • Figure 33 shows a physical layer processing for SL according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figures 38 to 47 illustrate various devices to which the embodiment(s) can be applied.
  • A/B can mean “A and/or B”.
  • A, B can mean “A and/or B”.
  • A” /B/C can mean "at least one of A, B and/or C”.
  • A, B can mean "at least one of A, B and/or C”.
  • a or may include “only A”, “only B”, and/or “both A and B.”
  • “or” is “additionally or alternatively” It should be interpreted as representing “to”.
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • FDMA frequency division multiple access
  • TDMA time division multiple access
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • CDMA can be implemented with a radio technology such as universal terrestrial radio access (UTRA) or CDMA2000.
  • TDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as global system for mobile communications (GSM)/general packet radio service (GPRS)/enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE).
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • EDGE enhanced data rates for GSM evolution
  • OFDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as IEEE (institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, and E-UTRA (evolved UTRA).
  • IEEE 802.16m is an evolution of IEEE 802.16e, and backward compatibility with IEEE 802.16e-based systems (backward compatibility)
  • UTRA is part of a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS).
  • 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) long term (LTE) 2020/175955 1» (:1 ⁇ 1(2020/002889 evolution) is the E-UTRA (evolved-UMT S terrestrial radio access)
  • E-UMTS evolved UMTS
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA subcarrier frequency division multiple access
  • LTE-A evolution of 3GPP LTE.
  • 5G NR is the successor technology of LTE-A, and has features such as high performance, low latency, and high availability.
  • Eggplant is a new clean-slate type mobile communication system.
  • 5G NR ranges from low frequency bands of less than lGHz to mid-frequency bands of miiz-LOGPiz and over 24GHz.
  • LTE-A or 5G NR is mainly described.
  • FIG 2 shows the structure of an LTE system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • E-UTRAN Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the E-UTRAN includes a base station 20 that provides a control plane and a user plane to the terminal 10.
  • the terminal 10 is fixed or mobile. , And can be called in other terms such as MS (Mobile Station), UT (User Terminal), SS (Subscriber Station), MT (Mobile Terminal), wireless device, etc.
  • Base station 20 is the terminal 10 ) Refers to a fixed station that communicates with, and can be called in other terms, such as eNB (evolved-NodeB), BTS (Base Transceiver System), and Access Point.
  • eNB evolved-NodeB
  • BTS Base Transceiver System
  • Access Point Access Point
  • the base stations 20 can be connected to each other through the X2 interface.
  • the base station 20 is an EPC (Evolved Packet Core, 30) through the S1 interface, and more specifically, the Mobility Management Entity (MME) through the S 1-MME. ) And S1-U through S-GW (Serving Gateway).
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core, 30
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S1-U Serving Gateway
  • the EPC 30 is composed of MME, S-GW and P-GW (Packet Data Network-Gateway).
  • the MME has information about the terminal's access information or the terminal's capabilities, and this information is mainly used to manage the mobility of the terminal.
  • S-GW is a gateway with E-UTRAN as an endpoint
  • P-GW is a gateway with PDN (Packet Date Network) as an endpoint.
  • the layers of the radio interface protocol between the terminal and the network are L1 (No. 1 Inheritance), L2 (layer 2), and L3 (layer 3), among which, the physical inheritance belonging to the first layer provides an information transfer service using a physical channel
  • the RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer located in the third line plays the role of controlling radio resources between the terminal and the network. For this purpose, the RRC layer exchanges RRC messages between the terminal and the base station.
  • Fig. 3(a) is a wireless device for a user plane according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 3(b) shows a wireless protocol structure for a control plane according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the user plane is a protocol stack for transmitting user data
  • the control plane is It is a protocol stack for transmission of control signals.
  • the physical layer provides an information transmission service to an upper layer using a physical channel.
  • the physical layer is a higher layer, which is a higher layer.
  • the transport channel transmits data through a wireless interface, with how and with what characteristics. It is classified according to whether or not.
  • Data is transferred through a physical channel between different physical layers, i.e. between the physical layers of the transmitter and the receiver.
  • the physical channel can be modulated by the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) method, and time and frequency are radio resources. Use it as.
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • the MAC layer provides a service to the upper layer, the radio link control (RLC) layer, through a logical channel.
  • the MAC layer provides a mapping function from a plurality of logical channels to a plurality of transport channels, and the MAC layer provides a logical channel multiplexing function by mapping from a plurality of logical channels to a single transmission channel.
  • the MAC layer provides a data transmission service on a logical channel.
  • RLC inheritance is the concatenation of RLC Serving Data Unit (SDU),
  • Segmentation and reassembly are performed To ensure various QoS (Quality of Service) required by Radio Bearer (RB), RLC layer is in Transparent Mode (TM), Non-Confirmed Mode It provides three operating modes: (Unacknowledged Mode, UM) and Acknowledged Mode (AM).
  • AM RLC provides error correction through automatic repeat request (ARQ).
  • the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer is defined only in the control plane.
  • the RRC layer is in charge of controlling the logical channels, transport channels and physical channels in relation to the configuration, re-configuration, and release of radio bearers.
  • RB refers to the logical path provided by the first layer (physical layer or PHY layer) and the second layer (MAC verification, RLC verification, PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) verification) for data transfer between the terminal and the network.
  • the function of the PDCP layer in the user plane is the transmission of user data and the header
  • the functions of the PDCP layer in the control plane include the transfer of control plane data and encryption/integrity protection.
  • Setting the RB means the process of defining the characteristics of the wireless protocol layer and channel to provide a specific service, and setting specific parameters and operation methods for each.
  • RB can be further divided into two types, SRB (Signaling Radio Bearer) and DRB (Data Radio Bearer).
  • SRB sends RRC messages in the control plane.
  • the terminal is in RRC_CONNECTED state, otherwise it is in RRCJDLE state.
  • the RRCJNACTIVE state is additionally defined, and the terminal in the RRCJNACTIVE state can release the connection with the base station while maintaining the connection with the core network.
  • the downlink SCH Shared Channel
  • the uplink transmission channel that transmits data from the terminal to the network is the RACH (Random Access Channel) that transmits the initial control message and other user traffic.
  • RACH Random Access Channel
  • SCH uplink shared channel
  • BCCH Broadcast Control Channel
  • PCCH Paging Control Channel
  • CCCH Common Control Channel
  • MCCH Multicast Control Channel
  • MTCH Multicast Traffic Channel
  • a physical channel consists of several OFDM symbols in the time domain and several sub-carriers in the frequency domain.
  • a sub-frame is composed of a plurality of OFDM symbols in a time domain.
  • a resource block is a resource allocation unit, and is composed of a plurality of OFDM symbols and a plurality of sub-carriers.
  • each subframe can use specific government carriers of specific OFDM symbols (eg, the first OFDM symbol) of the corresponding subframe for the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel), that is, the L1/L2 control channel.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • FIG. 4 shows a structure of an NR system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a Next Generation Radio Access Network may include a next generation-Node B (gNB) and/or an eNB that provides a terminal with a user plane and a control plane protocol termination.
  • gNB next generation-Node B
  • eNB that provides a terminal with a user plane and a control plane protocol termination.
  • FIG. 4 a case where only gNB is included is illustrated.
  • the gNB and the eNB are connected to each other through an Xn interface.
  • the gNB and the eNB are connected to the 5th generation core network (5G Core Network: 5GC) through the NG interface.
  • 5G Core Network 5GC
  • the access and mobility management function AMF
  • the UPF user plane function
  • the gNB is a wireless resource management (Inter Cell RRM), a wireless
  • Bearer management (RB control), connection mobility control (Connection Mobility Control), radio admission control (Radio Admission Control), immediate setting and provision (Measurement configuration & Provision), dynamic resource allocation (dynamic resource allocation), etc.
  • Function can be provided.
  • AMF can provide functions such as NAS (Non Access Stratum) security and idle state mobility processing.
  • UPF can provide functions such as mobility anchoring and PDU (Protocol Data Unit) processing.
  • Function can provide functions such as terminal IP (Internet Protocol) address allocation and PDU session control.
  • FIG. 6 shows the structure of an NR wireless frame to which the present invention can be applied.
  • radio frames are transmitted in uplink and downlink transmission in NR.
  • the wireless frame has a length of Wms, and two 5ms
  • Half-frame can contain 5 1ms subframes (Subframe, SF)
  • Subframe can be divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in the subframe Is subcarrier
  • Each slot can contain 12 or 14 OFDM(A) symbols according to CP (cyclic prefix).
  • each slot can contain 14 symbols.
  • each slot may include 12 symbols, where the symbol may include an OFDM symbol (or CP-OFDM symbol), an SC-FDMA symbol (or DFT-s-OFDM symbol). have.
  • Table 2 shows the number of symbols per slot and per frame according to 808 when extension 0 5 is used. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 Shows the number of slots and the number of slots per subframe.
  • Numerology e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.
  • a time resource consisting of the same number of symbols (e.g., subframe, slot or
  • TTI for convenience, the (absolute time) section of (collectively referred to as TU (Time Unit)) may be set differently between the merged cells.
  • a number of numerology or SCS can be supported to support various 5G services. For example, if the SCS is 15 kHz, a wide area in traditional cellular bands is supported. If the SCS is 30kHz/60mz, dense-urban, lower latency and wider carrier bandwidth can be supported. If the SCS is 60kHz or higher, a bandwidth greater than 24.25GPiz can be supported to overcome the phase noise.
  • NR frequency band is two types of frequency range (frequency
  • the frequency range of the above two types can be FR1 and FR2.
  • the numerical value of the frequency range can be changed, for example, the frequency range of the above two types can be as shown in Table 3 below.
  • FR1 can mean “sub 6GHz range”
  • FR2 can mean “above 6GHz range” and can be called millimeter wave (mmW).
  • mmW millimeter wave
  • FR1 may include a band of 410MHz to 25MHz as shown in Table 4 below.
  • FR1 may include a frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher.
  • a frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher included in FR1 is an unlicensed band ( Unlicensed bands can be used for a variety of purposes, e.g. for communication for vehicles (e.g. autonomous driving).
  • FIG. 7 shows a slot structure of an NR frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a slot includes a plurality of symbols in the time domain. For example, in the case of a normal simulation, one slot includes 14 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot includes 12 symbols. Or, for normal CP, one slot is
  • a carrier includes a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • BWP Bandwidth Part
  • P Physical Resource Blocks
  • a carrier can contain up to N (e.g. 5) BWPs. Data communication can be carried out through an active BWP.
  • Each element is a resource element in the resource grid. It can be referred to as (Resource Element, RE), and one complex symbol can be mapped.
  • the interface may be composed of the L1 layer, the L2 layer, and the L3 layer.
  • the L1 layer may refer to the physical layer.
  • the L2 layer is the MAC layer, the RLC layer.
  • PDCP layer, and SDAP layer can mean at least one layer.
  • L3 layer can mean RRC layer.
  • V2X or SL (sidelink) communication will be described.
  • FIG. 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Specifically, FIG. 8A shows a user plane protocol stack of LTE, and FIG. 8 (B) of shows the LTE control plane protocol stack.
  • FIG. 9 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Specifically, FIG. 9A shows a user plane protocol stack of NR, and FIG. 9 (B) of the NR shows the control plane protocol stack.
  • SLSS Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • SLSS is an SL-specific sequence, and may include PSSS (Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal) and SSSS (Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal).
  • PSSS Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • SSSS Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • S-PSS Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal
  • S-SSS Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • length-127 M-sequences (leng- 127 M-sequences) may be used for S-PSS
  • length -127 gold-sequences length-127 Gold sequences
  • S-SSS e.g.
  • the terminal can use S-PSS to detect the initial signal and acquire synchronization
  • the terminal uses S-PSS and S-SSS.
  • 2020/175955 1»(:1/10 ⁇ 020/002889 you can acquire detailed synchronization, and synchronously detect D.
  • the PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • the PSBCH may be a (broadcast) channel through which basic (system) information that the terminal needs to know first before transmitting and receiving SL signals is transmitted.
  • the basic information is in SLSS.
  • Related information Duplex Mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, SLSS related application type, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc.
  • DM Duplex Mode
  • TDD UL/DL Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink
  • resource pool related information For example, for the evaluation of PSBCH performance, in NR V2X, the payload size of the PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC.
  • S-PSS, S-SSS, and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (eg, SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)).
  • the S-SSB may have the same neurology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in the carrier, and the transmission bandwidth is (pre-)set SL BWP.
  • Sidelink BWP for example, the bandwidth of S-SSB could be 11 RB (Resource Block), for example, PSBCH could span 11 RBs.
  • the frequency position of the S-SSB can be set (in advance). Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection at the frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.
  • the transmitting terminal can be used for one or more S-SSBs within one S-SSB transmission period according to the SCS.
  • SSBs can be transmitted to the receiving terminal; for example, the number of S-SSBs that the transmitting terminal transmits to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period is pre-configured (pre-configured) or configured in the transmitting terminal.
  • the S-SSB transmission period may be 160 ms.
  • an S-SSB transmission period of 160 ms may be supported.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the SCS is FR1.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one 1 to the receiving terminal within the S-SSB transmission period,
  • the transmitting terminal is 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal transmits one S-SSB. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 It is possible to transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 or 64 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within a period of 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889.
  • the structure of the S-SSB transmitted from the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal may be different depending on the CP type.
  • the CP type may be Normal CP (NCP) or Extended CP (ECP).
  • NCP Normal CP
  • ECP Extended CP
  • the number of symbols for mapping PSBCH in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal is 9 Or it can be 8.
  • the CP type is ECP, in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal
  • the number of symbols for mapping the PSBCH may be 7 or 6.
  • the PSBCH may be mapped.
  • the receiving signal receiving the S-SSB may be mapped.
  • the terminal is in the first symbol section of the S-SSB.
  • AGC Automatic Gain Control
  • FIG. 10 shows a structure of an S-SSB when the CP type is NCP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the structure of the S-SSB that is, the order of the symbols in which the S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH are mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal is shown in FIG. Can refer to
  • FIG 11 shows the structure of an S-SSB when the CP type is ECP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the CP type is ECP, unlike FIG. 10, the number of symbols for which the transmitting terminal maps the PSBCH after the S-SSS in the S-SSB may be 6. Therefore, the CP type is Depending on whether it is NCP or ECP, the coverage of S-SSB may vary.
  • each SLSS may have a Sidelink Synchronization Identifier (SLSS ID).
  • SLSS ID Sidelink Synchronization Identifier
  • the value of SLSS ID may be defined based on a combination of two different S-PSS sequences and 168 different S-SSS sequences.
  • the number of SLSS IDs can be 336, for example, the value of SLSS ID can be any one of 0 to 335.
  • the value of the SLSS ID can be defined.
  • the number of SLSS IDs can be 672.
  • the value of SLSS ID can be any one of 0 to 671.
  • one S-PSS can be associated with in-coverage, and the other S-PSS can be associated with out-of-coverage.
  • SLSS IDs of 0 to 335 can be used in in-coverage
  • SLSS IDs of 336 to 6 can be used in out-coverage.
  • the transmitting terminal needs to optimize the transmission power according to the characteristics of each signal constituting the S-SSB in order to improve the S-SSB reception performance of the receiving terminal.
  • the PAPR value is different between the S-PSS and S-SSS constituting the S-SSB
  • the transmitting terminal is S- For the transmission of PSS and S-SSS, the optimum MPR value can be applied respectively.
  • a transition period can be applied for the transmitting terminal to perform an amplification operation for each signal.
  • the transition period can protect the time required for the transmitting terminal amplifier of the transmitting terminal to perform the normal operation at the boundary where the transmission power of the transmitting terminal is different.
  • the transition period may be lOus.
  • the transition section may be 5us.
  • the search window for the receiving terminal to detect the S-PSS may be 80 ms and/or 160 ms.
  • FIG. 12 shows a terminal that performs V2X or SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • terminal in V2X or SL communication, the term terminal can mainly mean a user's terminal.
  • a network device such as a base station transmits and receives signals according to the communication method between the terminals
  • the base station also It may be considered a kind of terminal, for example, terminal 1 may be the first device 100, and terminal 2 may be the second device 200.
  • terminal 1 can select a resource unit corresponding to a particular resource within a resource pool, which means a set of resources.
  • Terminal 1 can transmit an SL signal using the resource unit.
  • Terminal 2 which is a receiving terminal, can receive a resource pool in which terminal 1 can transmit signals, and detect the signal of terminal 1 in the resource pool. can do.
  • terminal 1 can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool.
  • terminal 1 can use the resource set in advance.
  • a resource pool can be composed of a plurality of resource units, and each terminal can select one or more resource units and use it for its own SL signal transmission.
  • FIG. 13 shows a resource unit for V2X or SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the total frequency resources of the resource pool can be divided into NF, and the total time resources of the resource pool can be divided into NT. Accordingly, a total of NF * NT resource units can be defined in the resource pool. 13 shows an example in which the corresponding resource pool is repeated with a period of NT subframes.
  • one resource unit (for example, Unit #0) may be repeatedly displayed periodically. Or, in the time or frequency dimension. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 In order to obtain a diversity effect, the index of the physical resource unit to which one logical resource unit is mapped may change in a predetermined pattern over time.
  • a resource pool can mean a set of resource units that a terminal that wishes to transmit an SL signal can use for transmission.
  • the resource pool can be subdivided into several types. For example, depending on the content of the SL signal transmitted from each resource pool, the resource pool can be classified as follows.
  • SA Scheduling Assignment
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • MIMO Multiple Input
  • the SA can be multiplexed and transmitted with SL data on the same resource unit.
  • the SA resource pool may mean a resource pool in which SA is multiplexed with SL data and transmitted.
  • SA may also be referred to as an SL control channel.
  • the SL data channel (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH) can be a resource pool used by the transmitting terminal to transmit user data. If SA is multiplexed and transmitted together with SL data on the same resource unit, Only SL data channels of the type excluding SA information can be transmitted from the resource pool for the SL data channel. In other words, REs (Resource Elements) used to transmit SA information on individual resource units in the SA resource pool are SL data. It can still be used to transmit SL data in the resource pool of the channel; for example, the transmitting terminal can transmit by mapping the PSSCH to successive PRBs.
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • the discovery channel can be a resource pool for transmitting information such as the transmitting terminal's own ID. Through this, the transmitting terminal can discover itself.
  • the transmission timing determination method of the SL signal e.g., whether it is transmitted at the time of reception of the synchronization reference signal or at the time of the reception) Whether it is transmitted by applying a certain timing advance
  • resource allocation method e.g., whether the base station assigns the transmission resource of an individual signal to an individual transmission terminal, or whether the individual transmission terminal selects the individual signal transmission resource itself within the resource pool
  • Signal format e.g., the number of symbols each SL signal occupies in one subframe, or the number of subframes used for transmission of one SL signal
  • the signal strength from the base station the transmission power strength of the SL terminal, etc. Therefore, it can be divided into different resource pools again.
  • the transmission mode 14 is a V2X or SL according to the transmission mode according to an embodiment of the present disclosure 2020/175955 1» (: 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 Indicates a procedure for performing communication.
  • the transmission mode may be referred to as a mode or resource allocation mode.
  • the transmission mode can be called LTE transmission mode
  • NR resource allocation mode In NR, the transmission mode can be called NR resource allocation mode.
  • (a) of FIG. 14 shows a terminal operation related to LTE transmission mode 1 or LTE transmission mode 3.
  • (a) of FIG. 14 is related to NR resource allocation mode 1 It shows the terminal operation.
  • LTE transmission mode 1 can be applied to general SL communication
  • LTE transmission mode 3 can be applied to V2X communication.
  • ratio of FIG. 14 represents a terminal operation related to LTE transmission mode 2 or LTE transmission mode 4.
  • ratio of FIG. 14 is a terminal operation related to NR resource allocation mode 2
  • the base station can schedule SL resources to be used by the terminal for SL transmission. For example, the base station can perform resource scheduling to terminal 1 through PDCCH (more specifically, DCI (Downlink Control Information)), and terminal 1 can perform V2X or SL communication with terminal 2 according to the above resource scheduling.
  • Terminal 1 transmits SCI (Sidelink Control Information) through PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel) to terminal 2, and then transmits the data based on the SCI.
  • SCI Segmentlink Control Information
  • PSCCH Physical Sidelink Control Channel
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • the terminal uses a dynamic grant.
  • resources for one or more SL transmissions of one TB can be provided or allocated from the base station.
  • the base station provides resources for PSCCH and/or PSSCH transmission to the terminal using a dynamic grant.
  • the transmitting terminal is the SL received from the receiving terminal.
  • HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request
  • the base station allocates resources for SL transmission within the PDCCH.
  • PUCCH resources and timing for reporting SL HARQ feedback to the base station can be determined.
  • DCI may represent the slot offset between DCI reception and the first SL transmission scheduled by the DCI.
  • the minimum between DCI scheduling SL transmission resources and the first SL transmission resource scheduled by the DCI. Gap is handled by the terminal
  • the terminal can provide or receive a resource set from the base station for multiple SL transmissions through a configured grant.
  • a grant may include a configured grant type 1 or a configured grant type 2.
  • a terminal may determine the TB to be transmitted in (occasions) in each case indicated by a given configured grant. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • a base station can allocate resources to terminals on the same carrier.
  • an NR base station can control 1 ⁇ 4 based communication.
  • an NR base station may transmit an NR DCI to the terminal to schedule 1 ⁇ 4 resource.
  • a new RNTI may be defined for scrambling the NR DCI.
  • the terminal may include an NR ⁇ module and a 1 3 ⁇ 4 module.
  • a terminal containing a yaw module and an L ⁇ E module is NR from gNB
  • NR ⁇ module After receiving 0(:1, NR ⁇ module can convert it to NR ⁇ 0(L ⁇ E 00 type 5 show, NR module L ⁇ E 00 type 5 shows can be delivered to the module.
  • a 1 3 ⁇ 4 module receives 1 3 ⁇ 4 0 (:1 format 5 shows from an NR SL module).
  • the activation and/or deactivation can be applied to the first L ⁇ E subframe afterwards.
  • the above can be displayed dynamically using a field of .(:1.
  • the minimum value of the above can be applied to It can be different.
  • the terminal can report one value (1 ⁇ 4 no value) according to the terminal's capabilities.
  • the above can be positive.
  • the terminal is set by the base station/network.
  • the transmission resource can be determined within a resource or a preset resource.
  • the set resource or a preset resource can be a resource pool.
  • the terminal can autonomously select or schedule a resource for transmission.
  • the terminal selects the resource itself from the set resource pool, Communication can be performed.
  • the terminal can perform sensing (8 ⁇ 13 ⁇ 4) and resource (re) selection procedures to select resources by itself in the selection window.
  • the sensing above is a subchannel unit.
  • terminal 1 which has selected a resource by itself, transmits 3 (:1 to terminal 2 through parent 3 (: ⁇ 1), and then transmits the data based on 3 (:1) above.
  • the terminal can help ⁇ resource selection for other terminals.
  • the terminal in NR resource allocation mode 2, the terminal can receive the ⁇ set grant for transmission ( ⁇ 11 ⁇ 11 1 bright).
  • the terminal in the required resource allocation mode 2, the terminal can schedule the transmission of another terminal.
  • the terminal in the NR resource allocation mode 2, the terminal can reserve resources for blind retransmission.
  • the first terminal can instruct the second terminal 3 (using it ⁇ transmission priority.
  • the second terminal can decode the 8011- above, and ,The second terminal can perform sensing and/or resource (re)selection based on the priority.
  • the resource (re) selection procedure the second terminal identifies candidate resources in the resource selection window. And selecting a resource for (re)transmission from among the candidate resources for which the second terminal has been identified.
  • the resource selection window may be a time interval at which the terminal selects a resource for SL transmission.
  • the second terminal selects a resource (re).
  • the resource selection window can start at T1> 0, and the resource selection window can be limited by the remaining packet delay budget of terminal 2.
  • terminal 2 is a resource resource.
  • the SL RSRP threshold is the priority of the SL transmission as indicated by the SCI received from the first terminal and the second terminal selected. It can be determined based on the priority of SL transmission on the resource.
  • the LI SL RSRP can be measured based on the SL Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS).
  • DMRS SL Demodulation Reference Signal
  • one or more PSSCH DMRS patterns can be set or preset in the time domain for each resource pool.
  • the PDSCH DMRS configuration type 1 and/or type 2 may be the same or similar to the frequency domain pattern of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the correct DMRS pattern may be indicated by the SCI.
  • the transmitting terminal can select a specific DMRS pattern from among the DMRS patterns set for the resource pool or preset.
  • the transmitting terminal can perform the initial transmission of TB (Transport Block) without reservation. For example, sensing and resource (re) selection procedure. Based on the resource (re) selection procedure, the transmitting terminal can reserve the SL resources for the initial transmission of the second TB using the SCI associated with the first TB.
  • TB Transmission Block
  • the transmitting terminal can reserve the SL resources for the initial transmission of the second TB using the SCI associated with the first TB.
  • the terminal can reserve resources for feedback-based PSSCH retransmission through signaling related to the previous transmission of the same TB (Transport Block).
  • the maximum number of SL resources reserved by one transmission including, for example, may be 2, 3 or 4.
  • the maximum number of SL resources may be the same regardless of whether HARQ feedback is enabled or not.
  • the maximum number of HARQ (re) transmissions for one TB can be limited by settings or presets.
  • the maximum number of HARQ (re) transmissions can be up to 32.
  • the above setting or preset may be for the transmitting terminal.
  • HARQ feedback to release resources not used by the terminal may be supported.
  • a terminal can use SCI to instruct another terminal of one or more sub-channels and/or slots used by the terminal.
  • a terminal can use SCI to instruct another terminal of one or more sub-channels and/or slots reserved by the terminal for PSSCH (re) transmission.
  • the smallest allocation unit of an SL resource can be a slot.
  • a subchannel 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 The size can be set for the terminal or can be preset.
  • DCI Downlink control information transmitted by the base station to the terminal through the PDCCH
  • Control Information while control information transmitted by a terminal to another terminal through the PSCCH can be referred to as SCI.
  • SCI control information transmitted by a terminal to another terminal through the PSCCH
  • the SCI may contain SL scheduling information.
  • a terminal may transmit at least one SCI to another terminal to schedule a PSSCH.
  • SCI formats. (format) can be defined.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit SCI to the receiving terminal on the PSCCH.
  • the receiving terminal can decode one SCI to receive the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal.
  • the transmitting terminal has two consecutive devices on the PSCCH and/or PSSCH.
  • SCI e.g., 2-stage SCI
  • the receiving terminal can decode two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCI) to receive the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal. For example, (relatively) high SCI
  • the SCI including the first SCI configuration field group can be referred to as the first SCI or the 1st SCI
  • the second SCI configuration field group is The included SCI may be referred to as a 2nd SCI or 2nd SCI.
  • the transmitting terminal may transmit the first SCI to the receiving terminal through the PSCCH.
  • the transmitting terminal may transmit the second SCI on the PSCCH and/or PSSCH.
  • SCI can be transmitted to the receiving terminal, e.g. the second SCI is (independent)
  • PSCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • PSSCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • the transmitting terminal may transmit some or all of the following information to the receiving terminal through SCI.
  • the transmitting terminal may transmit some or all of the following information to the first SCI and/or It can be transmitted to the receiving terminal through the second SCI.
  • [178]-PSSCH and/or PSCCH-related resource allocation information for example, time/frequency resource location/number, resource reservation information (eg, period), and/or
  • SL CSI transmission indicator (or SL (LI) RSRP (and/or SL (LI) RSRQ and/or SL (LI) RSSI) information transmission indicator), and/or
  • [19-Reference signal (eg, DMRS, etc.) information related to decoding and/or channel estimation of data transmitted through the PSSCH, information related to the pattern of (time-frequency) mapping resources of the DMRS, Rank information, antenna port index information;
  • the first SCI may include information related to channel sensing.
  • the receiving terminal may decode the second SCI using the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the polar code used for the PDCCH can be applied to the second SCI.
  • the payload size of the first SCI is unicast, groupcast and
  • the receiving terminal After decoding the first SCI, the receiving terminal does not need to perform blind decoding of the second SCI.
  • the first SCI may contain the scheduling information of the second SCI. have.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit at least one of SCI, the first SCI and/or the second SCI to the receiving terminal through the PSCCH
  • the PSCCH is SCI
  • the first SCI and /Or may be substituted/substituted with at least one of the second SCI; and/or, for example, SCI may be substituted/substituted with at least one of PSCCH, the first SCI and/or the second SCI, and/or,
  • the PSSCH can be replaced/replaced with the second SCI.
  • FIG. 15 shows three cast types according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 15(a) shows a broadcast type SL communication
  • Fig. 15(b) shows a unicast type SL communication
  • Fig. 15(a) shows a groupcast type SL communication.
  • unicast type SL communication a terminal can perform one-to-one communication with other terminals.
  • groupcast type SL communication a terminal can perform SL communication with one or more terminals in the group to which it belongs.
  • SL groupcast communication may be replaced with SL multicast communication, SL one-to-many communication, or the like.
  • FIG. 16 shows a terminal including an LTE module and an NR module according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the terminal is a module related to LTE SL transmission and a module related to NR SL transmission.
  • 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 May contain modules. Created in higher layers Packets related to transmission are
  • Packets related to the NR SL transmission generated in the upper layer can be delivered to the NR module, where, for example, the 1 ⁇ 4 module and the NR module can be delivered to a common upper layer (e.g. Or, for example, a 1 ⁇ 4 module and an NR module may be associated with different upper layers (e.g., a higher layer associated with a 1 ⁇ 4 module and a higher layer associated with an NR module).
  • Each packet can be associated with a specific priority.
  • the 1 ⁇ 4 module is NR Without knowing the priority of packets related to transmission, the NR module You may not know the priority of the packet related to the transmission.
  • the priority of a packet related to transmission and the priority of a packet related to NR transmission can be exchanged between the 1 ⁇ 4 module and the NR module. Therefore, the 1 ⁇ 4 module and the NR module 1 ⁇ 4 module. You can know the priority of the packet related to transmission and the priority of the packet related to transmission.
  • the terminal When transmission and NR transmission are superimposed, the terminal can only perform transmission related to the high priority by comparing the priority of the packet related to the transmission and the priority of the packet related to the NR 81 ⁇ transmission. , NR V2X priority field and momo! 5 can be directly compared to each other.
  • the terminal decides to transmit the LTE SL service A and the NR SL service E, and the transmission for the LTE SL service A and the transmission for the NR SL service E are superimposed.
  • transmissions for LTE SL service A and transmissions for NR SL service E may be partially or completely superimposed in the time domain.
  • the terminal performs only the SL transmissions associated with high priority, and low priority.
  • the SL transmission related to the ranking may be omitted.
  • the terminal may transmit only LTE SL service A on the first carrier and/or the first channel.
  • the terminal may transmit the NR SL service E to the second carrier and/or It may not transmit on the second channel.
  • the CAM can contain basic vehicle information such as vehicle dynamic status information such as direction and speed, vehicle static data such as dimensions, exterior lighting conditions, and route history.
  • vehicle dynamic status information such as direction and speed
  • vehicle static data such as dimensions, exterior lighting conditions, and route history.
  • the size of the CAM can be 50-300 bytes.
  • CAM is broadcast, latency should be less than 100ms.
  • DENM may be a message generated in the event of an unexpected situation such as a vehicle breakdown or accident.
  • the size of DENM can be less than 3000 bytes, and any vehicle within the transmission range can receive the message, at which point DENM can have a higher priority than CAM.
  • the terminal can perform carrier reselection based on the Channel Busy Ratio (CBR) of the set carriers and/or the PPPP (Prose Per-Packet Priority) of the V2X message to be transmitted.
  • CBR Channel Busy Ratio
  • PPPP Prose Per-Packet Priority
  • Carrier reselection may be performed by the MAC layer of the terminal.
  • PPPP ProSe Per Packet Priority
  • PPPR ProSe Per Packet Reliability
  • PPPR may be replaced by PPPP.
  • a smaller PPPP value can mean a higher priority
  • a larger PPPP value can mean a lower priority.
  • a smaller PPPR value can mean higher reliability, and a larger PPPR value can mean higher priority. It can mean low reliability.
  • the PPPP value associated with a service, packet or message associated with a high priority may be less than the PPPP value associated with a service, packet or message associated with a low priority, for example, a service, packet or message associated with a high priority.
  • the PPPR value associated with a message may be less than the PPPR value associated with a service, packet, or message associated with low reliability.
  • CBR is the S-RSSI (Sidelink-Received Signal Strength) measured by the terminal.
  • Indicator can mean the portion of sub-channels in the resource pool that is detected as exceeding a preset threshold value associated with each logical channel.
  • the PPPP may exist, and the setting of the PPPP value should reflect the latency required for both the terminal and the base station When reselecting a carrier, the terminal can select one or more of the candidate carriers in increasing order from the lowest CBR .
  • the transmitting terminal may need to establish a (PC5) RRC connection with the receiving terminal.
  • the terminal can acquire a V2X-specific SIB (V2X-specific SIB).
  • V2X-specific SIB V2X-specific SIB
  • the terminal can establish an RRC connection with another terminal. For example, when an RRC connection is established between a transmitting terminal and a receiving terminal, the transmitting terminal can perform unicast communication with the receiving terminal through the established RRC connection.
  • the transmitting terminal receives the RRC message 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 Can be sent to the terminal.
  • FIG. 17 shows a transmission procedure of an RRC message according to one implementation of the present disclosure.
  • an RRC message generated by a transmitting terminal may be transmitted to a PHY layer through a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer.
  • RRC message is
  • SRB Synignalling Radio Bearer
  • PHY layer of the transmitting terminal can perform coding, modulation, and antenna/resource mapping for the transmitted information, and the transmitting terminal can transmit the information to the receiving terminal.
  • the receiving terminal performs antenna/resource demapping, demodulation, and decoding for the received information.
  • the information can be transmitted to the RRC layer through the MAC layer, RLC layer, and PDCP layer. Therefore, the receiving terminal can receive the RRC message generated by the transmitting terminal.
  • V2X or SL communication can be supported for a terminal in RRC_CONNECTED mode, a terminal in RRCJDLE mode, and a terminal in (NR) RRCJNACTIVE mode. That is,
  • a terminal in RRCJNACTIVE mode can perform V2X or SL communication.
  • a terminal in RRCJNACTIVE mode or a terminal in RRCJDLE mode can perform V2X or SL communication by using the cell-specific configuration included in the SIB specific to V2X.
  • RRC can be used at least to exchange UE capability and AS layer configuration.
  • the first terminal can transmit the UE capability and AS layer configuration of the first terminal to the second terminal, and Terminal 1 can receive the UE capability and AS layer settings of terminal 2 from terminal 2.
  • the information flow can be triggered during or after PC5-S signaling for direct link setup.
  • FIG. 18 shows a one-way UE capability delivery according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 19 shows a bidirectional UE capability transfer according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the information flow can be triggered during or after PC5-S signaling for direct link configuration.
  • RLM Radio Link Monitoring
  • RLF Radio Link Failure
  • RLM and/or RLF declarations may not be required.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit the reference signal to the receiving terminal,
  • the terminal can perform SL RLM using the reference signal.
  • the receiving terminal can declare the SL RLF by using the reference signal.
  • the reference signal may be referred to as an SL reference signal. .
  • SL instantiation between terminals and Reporting e.g., RSRP, RSRQ
  • RSRP RSRP
  • RSRQ Reporting
  • the reference signal can be received from the terminal, the receiving terminal can measure the channel state of the transmitting terminal based on the reference signal, and the receiving terminal can report channel state information (CSI) to the transmitting terminal.
  • CSI channel state information
  • SL related measurement and reporting can include measurement and reporting of CBR, and reporting of location information.
  • CSI Channel Status Information
  • CQI Channel Quality
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Index
  • RI Rank Indicator
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality
  • SRI SRS, Sounding Reference Symbols, Resource Indicator
  • CRI CSI-RS Resource Indicator
  • interference condition vehicle motion, etc.
  • CQI CQI, RI, and PMI, or some of them, assume four or fewer antenna ports.
  • the CSI procedure may not depend on the standalone RS.
  • CSI reporting can be enabled and disabled depending on the settings.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit the CSI-RS to the receiving terminal, and the receiving terminal can measure CQI or RI using the CSI-RS.
  • CSI-RS may be referred to as SL CSI-RS.
  • the CSI-RS may be confined within PSSCH transmission.
  • the transmitting terminal is on the PSSCH resource.
  • the data unit is
  • the transmission Prior to transmission, the transmission, i.e., may be subject to physical verification processing at the transmitting side.
  • a radio signal carrying a data unit may be subject to physical verification processing at the receiving side. have.
  • 21 shows the physical layer processing of the transmission side, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Table 6 can show the mapping relationship between the uplink transmission channel and the physical channel
  • Table 7 can show the mapping relationship between the uplink control channel information and the physical channel.
  • Table 8 can show the mapping relationship between the downlink transmission channel and the physical channel
  • Table 9 can show the mapping relationship between the downlink control channel information and the physical channel.
  • mapping relationship between the song channel and the physical channel can be shown, and Table 11 can show the mapping relationship between the control channel information and the physical channel.
  • the transmission side may perform encoding on a transport block (TB).
  • Data and control streams from the MAC layer can be encoded to provide transport and control services over a radio transmission link in the PHY implementation, e.g. TB from the MAC inheritance That is, it can be encoded as a codeword on the (transmitting side) channel coding scheme is error detection, error correcting, rate matching, interleaving, and separation from physical channels. It may be a combination of controlled information or transmission channels. Or, channel coding
  • Bang! (scheme) is an error 3 ⁇ 4 line (error detection), error correcting, error 1 °
  • the following channel coding scheme can be used for different types of transport channels and different types of control information.
  • the channel coding scheme for each transport channel type can be as shown in Table 12.
  • the channel coding method for each control information type can be as shown in Table 13.
  • a polar code can be applied to the PSCCH.
  • the LDPC code can be applied to a TB transmitted over the PSSCH.
  • the redundancy check) sequence can be attached, thus providing error detection on the transmission or reception.
  • the transmitting side may be a transmitting terminal
  • the receiving side may be a receiving terminal.
  • the communication device can use the LDPC code to encode/decode UL-SCH and DL-SCH.
  • the NR system can support two LDPC base graphs (i.e. two LDPC base metrics), two LDPC base graphs can be optimized LDPC base graph 1 for small TB and LDPC base graph for large TB.
  • the LDPC base graph 1 or 2 can be selected based on the TB size and the coding rate (R).
  • the coding rate can be indicated by the modulation coding scheme (MCS) index (I_MCS).
  • the MCS index may be dynamically provided to the terminal by the PDCCH scheduling the PUSCH or the PDSCH. Alternatively, the MCS index may be dynamically provided to the terminal by the PDCCH that (re)initializes or activates the UL configured grant 2 or DL SPS. .
  • the MCS index may be provided to the terminal by RRC signaling related to UL configured grant type 1. If the CRC attached TB is larger than the maximum code block size for the selected LDPC base graph, the transmitting side can divide the CRC-attached TB into multiple code blocks, and the transmitting side can attach an additional CRC sequence to each code block. have.
  • the maximum code block size for LDPC Basegraph 1 and LDPC Basegraph 2 is 8448 bits and 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • the transmitting side can encode the CRC-attached TB into the selected LDPC base graph.
  • the transmitting side encodes each code block of the TB into the selected LDPC basic graph.
  • LDPC-coded blocks can be individually rate matched.
  • Code block concatenation can be performed to generate codewords for transmission on the PDSCH or PUSCH.
  • up to two codewords ie, up to two TBs
  • PUSCH may be used for transmission of UL-SCH data and layer 1 and/or 2 control information.
  • layer 1 and/or 2 control information may be multiplexed with codewords for UL-SCH data. have.
  • the transmitting side can perform scrambling and modulation on the codeword.
  • the bits of the codeword can be scrambled and modulated to generate a block of a complex-valued modulation symbol. .
  • step S103 the transmitting side may perform layer mapping.
  • Complex modulated symbols can be mapped to one or more multiple input multiple output (MIMO) layers; codewords can be mapped to up to four layers.
  • the PDSCH can carry two codewords, and thus the PDSCH can support up to 8-layer transmission.
  • PUSCH can support a single codeword, and therefore, PUSCH can support up to 4-layer transmission.
  • step S104 the transmission side can perform precoding conversion.
  • Downlink transmission
  • the waveform may be a general OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) using a cyclic prefix (CP).
  • CP cyclic prefix
  • transform precoding i.e., Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
  • the uplink transmission waveform may be a conventional OFDM using a CP having a transform precoding function that performs DFT spreading that can be disabled or enabled.
  • conversion precoding can be selectively applied.
  • Conversion precoding is a special way to reduce the uplink data to reduce the peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) of the waveform.
  • Transformation precoding can be a form of DFT, i.e. the NR system can support two options for the uplink waveform, one can be CP-OFDM (same as the DL waveform), the other May be DFT-s-OFDM. Whether the terminal should use CP-OFDM or DFT-s-OFDM can be determined by the base station via the RRC parameter.
  • the transmitting side can perform subcarrier mapping.
  • the layer can be mapped to an antenna port.
  • the downlink for layer-to-antenna port mapping, in a transparent manner (non-codebook based). Mapping can be supported, and how beamforming or MIMO precoding is performed can be transparent to the terminal. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 There is.
  • the uplink for layer-to-antenna port mapping, both non-codebook-based mapping and codebook-based mapping can be supported.
  • the transmitting side transfers complex-value modulated symbols to the subcarriers in the resource block allocated to the physical channel. Can be mapped.
  • step S106 the transmitting side can perform OFDM modulation.
  • the device By adding CP and performing IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform), the device sets the time-continuous OFDM baseband signal on the antenna port (p) and subcarrier spacing for the OFDM symbol (1) in the TTI for the physical channel. (U) can be created.
  • the communication device on the transmitting side can perform Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) on the complex-valued modulation symbol mapped to the resource block of the corresponding OFDM symbol.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • a communication device that is transmitted can add a CP to the IFFT signal to generate an OFDM baseband signal.
  • the transmission side can perform up-conversion.
  • the communication device of the side is the antenna port (OFDM baseband signal to the target, subcarrier spacing setting (u) and OFDM symbol (1)) to the carrier of the cell to which the physical channel is assigned.
  • OFDM baseband signal to the target subcarrier spacing setting (u) and OFDM symbol (1)
  • the processors 102 and 202 of FIG. 38 are encoding, scrambling, modulation, layer mapping,
  • Precoding transformation for uplink
  • subcarrier mapping for OFDM modulation
  • 22 shows the physical layer processing of the receiving side according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the physical layer processing of the receiving side may basically be the reverse processing of the physical layer processing of the transmitting side.
  • step SH0 upon reception, a frequency down-conversion can be performed.
  • the communication device of the receiving side can receive the RF signal of the carrier frequency through the antenna.
  • the transceivers 106 and 206 that receive the RF signal at the carrier frequency are the carrier frequency of the RF signal to obtain the OFDM baseband signal. Can be downconverted to the baseband.
  • the receiving side can perform OFDM demodulation.
  • the receiving or communication device uses a complex-valued modulation symbol through CP separation and Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). For example, for each OFDM symbol, the communication device on the receiving side can remove the CP from the OFDM baseband signal, and the communication device on the receiving side can obtain the antenna port (p) and subcarrier. FFT can be performed on the CP-removed OFDM baseband signal to obtain the complex-value modulated symbol for spacing (u) and OFDM symbol (1).
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • step S112 subcarrier demapping is to be performed immediately upon reception. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 can be done. Subcarrier demapping can be performed on the complex value modulation symbol to obtain the complex value modulation symbol of the corresponding physical channel.
  • the terminal The processor of can acquire a complex value modulation symbol mapped to a subcarrier belonging to the PDSCH from among the complex value modulation symbols received from the BWP (Bandwidth Part).
  • transform de-precoding may be performed immediately upon reception.
  • Transform de-precoding is enabled for the unidirectional link physical channel, and transform de-precoding (for example, IDFT (In verse Discrete Fourier Transform) can be performed on the complex-value modulated symbol of the uplink physical channel.
  • transform de-precoding for example, IDFT (In verse Discrete Fourier Transform)
  • IDFT In verse Discrete Fourier Transform
  • De-precoding may not be performed.
  • step S114 layer demapping can be performed upon reception.
  • the complex value modulation symbol can be demapped into one or two codewords.
  • steps S115 and S116 the receiving side can perform demodulation and descrambling.
  • the complex value modulation symbol of a codeword can be demodulated and
  • the receiving side can perform decoding.
  • the codeword is TB.
  • LDPC base graph 1 or 2 may be selected based on the size of TB and the coding rate (. Codewords may include one or more coded blocks. Each coded block The selected LDPC base graph can be decoded into a CRC-attached code block or a CRC-attached TB. If code block segmentation is performed on the TB-attached TB at the transmission side, the CRC-attached code block The CRC sequence can be removed from each of them, and code blocks can be obtained. The code blocks can be connected to the TB to which the CRC is attached. The TB CRC sequence is the CRC attached.
  • TB can be removed from TB, whereby TB can be obtained.
  • TB can be delivered to the MAC layer.
  • the processors 102 and 202 of FIG. 38 may be configured to perform OFDM demodulation, subcarrier demapping, layer demapping, demodulation, descrambling, and decoding.
  • time and frequency domain resources related to subcarrier mapping for example, OFDM symbol, subcarrier, carrier frequency
  • OFDM modulation and frequency up/down conversion are resources. It can be determined based on the allocation (eg, uplink grant, downlink allocation).
  • the error compensation method for securing the reliability of communication is FEC (Forward Error
  • the HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) method is a combination of FEC and ARQ. It checks whether the data received by the physical layer contains an undecryptable error, and if an error occurs, performance can be improved by requesting retransmission. .
  • the receiving terminal when the receiving terminal operates in resource allocation mode 1 or 2, the receiving terminal can receive the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel). )Through the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel). )Through the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel). )Through the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel). )Through the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel). )Through the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel). )Through the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel). )Through the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSF
  • the HARQ feedback for the PSSCH can be transmitted to the transmitting terminal using the SFCI (Sidelink Feedback Conformation Information) format.
  • SFCI Segmentlink Feedback Conformation Information
  • SL HARQ feedback can be enabled for unicast.
  • the receiving terminal decodes the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal, And if the receiving terminal successfully decodes the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal can generate HARQ-ACK. And, the receiving terminal can transmit HARQ-ACK to the transmitting terminal.
  • the receiving terminal can transmit the receiving terminal.
  • the receiving terminal After decoding the target PSCCH, if the receiving terminal cannot successfully decode the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal can generate HARQ-NACK. And, the receiving terminal can transmit HARQ-NACK to the transmitting terminal. have.
  • SL HARQ feedback can be enabled for groupcast.
  • two HARQ feedback options can be supported for groupcast.
  • Groupcast option 1 After the receiving terminal decodes the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal, if the receiving terminal fails to decode the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal sends HARQ-NACK to the PSFCH. On the other hand, when the receiving terminal decodes the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal, and the receiving terminal successfully decodes the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal transmits HARQ-ACK to the transmitting terminal. You can't.
  • Groupcast option 2 After the receiving terminal decodes the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal, if the receiving terminal fails to decode the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal uses HARQ-NACK to perform the PSFCH. It can be transmitted to the transmitting terminal through the transmission terminal. And, the receiving terminal uses the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal.
  • the receiving terminal After decoding and the receiving terminal successfully decodes the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal can transmit HARQ-ACK to the transmitting terminal through the PSFCH. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • each terminal performing groupcast communication can use a different PSFCH resource for HARQ feedback transmission. For example, in the same group.
  • the belonging terminal may transmit HARQ feedback using different PSFCH resources.
  • the terminal may determine whether to transmit HARQ feedback to the transmitting terminal based on the TX-RX (Transmission-Reception) distance and/or RSRP.
  • TX-RX Transmission-Reception
  • the receiving terminal can transmit HARQ feedback for the PSSCH to the transmitting terminal.
  • the receiving terminal may not transmit HARQ feedback for the PSSCH to the transmitting terminal.
  • the transmitting terminal may not transmit the HARQ feedback on the PSSCH to the transmitting terminal through the SCI related to the PSSCH.
  • the SCI associated with the PSSCH may be a second SCI.
  • the receiving terminal may determine the TX-RX distance based on the location of the receiving terminal and the location of the transmitting terminal. For example, the receiving terminal decodes the SCI related to the PSSCH to know the communication range requirements used for the PSSCH.
  • the transmitting terminal is not in the form of HARQ ACK/NACK. It is also possible to transmit an indication to the serving base station of the transmitting terminal in the form of SR (Scheduling Request)/BSR (Buffer Status Report). In addition, even if the base station does not receive the above instruction, the base station transmits the SL retransmission resource to the terminal. For example, in the case of resource allocation mode 2, the time between PSFCH and PSSCH may be set or may be preset.
  • the TDM between PSCOi/PSSCH and PSFCH may be allowed for the PSFCH format for SL in the slot.
  • a sequence-based PSFCH with one symbol Format may be supported.
  • the single symbol may not be an AGC section.
  • the sequence-based PSFCH format may be applied to unicast and groupcast.
  • the PSFCH resource may be periodically set to an N slot section, or may be set in advance.
  • N may be set to one or more values of 1 or more.
  • N can be 1, 2 or 4.
  • 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 HARQ feedback on transmission in a specific resource pool is
  • slot # (N + A) may contain a PSFCH resource, where, for example, A may be the smallest integer greater than or equal to K.
  • A may be the smallest integer greater than or equal to K.
  • K can be the number of logical slots. In this case, can be the number of slots in the resource pool.
  • K can be the number of physical slots. In this case, K can be the number of slots inside and outside the resource pool.
  • the receiving terminal in response to one PSSCH transmitted by the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal, when the receiving terminal transmits HARQ feedback on the PSFCH resource, the receiving terminal is based on the implicit mechanism within the set resource pool.
  • the frequency domain and/or the code domain of the resource can be determined.
  • the receiving terminal has a slot index related to PSCCH/PSSCH/PSFCH,
  • the frequency domain and/or code domain of the PSFCH resource based on at least one of the identifiers for discriminating each receiving terminal in the group for HARQ feedback based on PSCCH/PSSCH-related subchannels and/or groupcast option 2 And/or, for example, the receiving terminal determines the frequency domain and/or code domain of the PSFCH resource based on at least one of SL RSRP, SINR, L1 source ID, and/or location information. can do.
  • the terminal is transmitting HARQ feedback through PSFCH or receiving HARQ feedback through PSFCH based on the priority rule. Either can be selected.
  • the priority rule can be based on the priority indication of the associated PSCCH/PSSCH.
  • the terminal can select specific HARQ feedback transmission based on a priority rule.
  • a priority rule May be based on the minimum priority indication (priority indication) of the associated PSCCH/PSSCH.
  • Figure 23 is, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, 5G capable of positioning for a UE connected to a Next Generation-Radio Access Network (NG-RAN) or E-UTRAN
  • NG-RAN Next Generation-Radio Access Network
  • E-UTRAN E-UTRAN
  • AMF receives a request for a location service related to a specific target group from another entity, such as a Gateway Mobile Location Center (GMLC), or a location service on behalf of a specific target UE in the AMF itself.
  • GMLC Gateway Mobile Location Center
  • the received LMF can process the above location service request and return the processing result including the estimated location of love to AMF. Meanwhile, the location service request is AMF. In addition to this, when received from another entity such as GMLC, the AMF can forward the processing result received from the LMF to the other entity.
  • ng-eNB new generation evolved-NB
  • gNB are network elements of NG-RAN that can provide instantaneous results for location administration, measure radio signals to target UEs, and deliver the results to LMF.
  • the ng-eNB can control several TP (Transmission Points) such as remote radio heads or PRS-only modules that support a PRS (Positioning Reference Signal)-based beacon system for E-UTRA.
  • TP Transmission Points
  • PRS-only modules that support a PRS (Positioning Reference Signal)-based beacon system for E-UTRA.
  • LMF is connected to E-SMLC (Enhanced Serving Mobile Location Center),
  • the E-SMLC allows the LMF to access the E-UTRAN.
  • the E-SMLC is the downlink acquired by the target UE through the signal transmitted by the LMF from the eNB and/or PRS-only TPs in the E-UTRAN. Measurement can be used to support OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival), one of the E-UTRAN positioning methods.
  • OTDOA Observed Time Difference Of Arrival
  • the LMF can be connected to the SLP (SUPL Location Platform). LMF can support and manage different location services for target UEs.
  • SLP SUPL Location Platform
  • the LMF can interact with the serving ng-eNB or the serving gNB for the target UE to obtain the location measurement of the UE.
  • the LMF is
  • the positioning method is determined based on the LCS (Location Service) client type, required QoS (Quality of Service), UE positioning capabilities, gNB and ng-eNB instantaneous capabilities, and serves these positioning methods. gNB And/or serving ng-eNB. And, the LMF may determine the location estimate for the target UE and additional information such as the location estimate and the accuracy of the speed.
  • SLP is a Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) entity that is responsible for enthronment through a user plane.
  • SUPL Secure User Plane Location
  • UE is a source such as NG-RAN and E-UTRAN, different GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System), TBS (Terrestrial Beacon System), WLAN (Wireless Local Access Network) access point, Bluetooth beacon and UE pressure sensor.
  • the downlink signal can be measured through.
  • the UE may include an LCS application, and may connect to the LCS application through communication with the network to which the UE is connected or other applications included in the UE.
  • the LCS application may include the measurement and calculation functions necessary to determine the location of the UE, for example, it may include independent positioning functions such as the Global Positioning System (GPS), independent of NG-RAN transmission.
  • GPS Global Positioning System
  • the location of the UE can be reported.
  • Such independently obtained positioning information can also be used as auxiliary information of the positioning information obtained from the network.
  • Figure 24 is a network for measuring the location of the UE according to an embodiment of the present disclosure 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 shows an implementation example.
  • CM-IDLE Connection Management-IDLE
  • the AMF receives the location service request
  • the AMF establishes a signaling connection with the UE, and a network trigger to allocate a specific serving gNB or ng-eNB You can request service.
  • This operation process is omitted in Fig. 24. That is, in Fig. 24, it can be assumed that it is in the connected mode. However, for reasons such as signaling and data inactivity, the NG-RAN is used to determine the signalling connection. It may be dismissed during the process.
  • a 5GC entity such as GMLC can request a location service to measure the location of the target UE with a serving AMF.
  • the serving AMF may decide to perform location services directly.
  • the AMF transmits a location service request to the LMF according to step 2, and according to step 3a, the LMF serves location procedures for acquiring location measurement data or location information assistant data. Can start with eNB, serving gNB.
  • the LMF may initiate location procedures for downlink positioning along with the failure.
  • the LMF transmits location assistance data defined in 3GPP TS 36.355 to the UE, or Position estimates or position measurements can be obtained.
  • step 3b may be performed additionally after step 3a is performed, but may be performed in place of step 3a.
  • the LMF may provide a location service response to the AMF.
  • the location service response may include information on whether or not the location estimation of the UE is successful and an estimate of the location of the UE. Then, to step la If chart 24 procedure is initiated, AMF can deliver location service response to 5GC entities such as GMLC, and if 24 procedure is initiated by step lb, AMF uses location service response to provide location services related to emergency calls, etc. can do.
  • FIG. 25 shows an example of a protocol layer used to support LPP (LTE Positioning Protocol) message transmission between an LMF and a UE according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • LPP Long Positioning Protocol
  • the LPP PDU may be transmitted through the NAS PDU between the AMF and the UE.
  • the LPP is used between a target device (e.g., a UE in the control plane or a SET (SUPL Enabled Terminal) in the user plane) and a location server (e.g., LMF in the control plane or SLP in the user plane). Can be terminated.
  • the LPP messages are NGAP (NG Application Protocol) through NG-C (NG-Control Plane) interface, LTE-Uu and NAS/RRC through NR-Uu interface. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 Through the middle network interface using the appropriate protocol
  • the LPP protocol enables positioning for NR and LTE using a variety of positioning methods.
  • 26 shows an example of a protocol layer used to support NRPPa (NR Positioning Protocol A) PDU transmission between LMF and NG-RAN nodes according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • NRPPa NR Positioning Protocol A
  • NRPPa can be used for information exchange between NG-RAN node and LMF.
  • NRPPa supports E-CID (Enhanced-Cell ID) and OTDOA positioning method for measurement transmitted from ng-eNB to LMF. It is possible to exchange data for, Cell-ID and Cell location ID for NR Cell ID positioning method.
  • AMF is the associated NRPPa
  • NRPPa PDUs can be routed based on the LMF's routing ID associated with the NG-C interface.
  • the procedure of the NRPPa protocol for location and data collection can be divided into two types.
  • the first type is a UE-related procedure for delivering information about a specific UE (for example, location measurement information, etc.).
  • UE associated procedure UE associated procedure
  • the second type is a non-UE associated procedure for delivering the NG-RAN node and related TP#i applicable information (eg, gNB/ng-eNB/TP timing information, etc.).
  • positioning methods supported by NG-RAN include GNSS, OTDOA, E-CID (enhanced cell ID), barometric pressure sensor positioning, WLAN positioning, Bluetooth positioning and terrestrial beacon system (TBS), and UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference). of Arrival).
  • GNSS Global System for Mobile Communications
  • OTDOA enhanced cell ID
  • E-CID enhanced cell ID
  • barometric pressure sensor positioning
  • WLAN positioning
  • BTS Bluetooth positioning and terrestrial beacon system
  • UTDOA Uplink Time Difference
  • one of the positioning methods may be used to measure the location of the UE, but more than one positioning method may be used to measure the location of the UE.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining an OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival) positioning method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • the UE uses the timing of measurement of downlink signals received from a plurality of TPs including eNB, ng-eNB and PRS-only modules.
  • the UE measures the timing of the received downlink signals using the location assistance data received from the location server, and can determine the location of the UE based on these measurement results and the geographic coordinates of neighbors.
  • the UE connected to the gNB can request a measurement gap for OTDOA measurement from the parent. If the OTDOA auxiliary data is at least one SFN (Single 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • an autonomous 3 ⁇ 4 (autonomous gap) can be used.
  • the RSTD can be defined based on the smallest relative time difference between the boundaries of the two subframes each received from the reference cell and the measurement cell. That is, the RSTD is the lowest at the start time of the subframe received from the measurement cell. It can be calculated based on the relative time difference between the start time of the subframe of the nearest reference cell and the start time of the subframe of the closest reference cell to the start time of the subframe received from the measurement cell. Meanwhile, the reference cell is to the UE. Can be selected by
  • TOA time of arrival
  • the point at which the hyperbola intersect can be estimated as the position of the child, where accuracy and/or uncertainty may arise for each TOA measurement, and the estimated UE position may be known in a specific range depending on the measurement uncertainty.
  • the RSTD for two TPs can be calculated based on Equation 1.
  • c is the speed of light
  • ⁇ xt, yt ⁇ is the (unknown) coordinate of the target UE
  • ⁇ xi, yi ⁇ is the coordinate of the (known) TP
  • ⁇ xl, yl ⁇ is the reference TP ( Or it may be the coordinates of another TP)
  • (Ti-Tl) is the transmission time offset between the two TPs
  • RTDs Time Differences
  • the location of the UE can be measured through the serving ng-eNB of the UE, the serving gNB, and/or the geographic information of the serving cell.
  • serving ng-eNB, serving gNB And/or geographic information of the serving cell may be obtained through paging, registration, and the like.
  • the E-CID positioning method improves the UE location estimate in addition to the CID positioning method.
  • Additional UE measurements and/or NG-RAN radio resources can be used.
  • E-CID positioning method some of the same measurement methods as the measurement control system of the RRC protocol can be used, but in general, additional measurements are not made only for the location measurement of the UE. In other words, a separate measurement is made to measure the location of the UE. Measurement setup 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • measurement configuration or immediate control message (measurement control message) may not be provided, and the UE also does not expect to request additional measurement operations for location measurement only, and the measurement values obtained through measurement methods that the UE can measure generally Can report
  • the serving gNB can implement the E-CID positioning method using E-UTRA measurements provided from the UE.
  • Examples of measurement elements that can be used for E-CID positioning may be:
  • E-UTRA RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • E-UTRA RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality
  • UE E-UTRA Rx-Tx Time difference GERAN (GSM EDGE Random) Access Network)/WLAN RSSI (Reference Signal Strength Indication), UTRAN CPICH (Common Pilot Channel) RSCP
  • TADV can be divided into Type 1 and Type 2 as follows.
  • TADV Type 1 (ng-eNB reception-transmission time difference) +(UE E-UTRA reception-transmission time difference)
  • TADV Type 2 ng-eNB receive-transmit time difference
  • AoA can be used to measure the direction of the UE.
  • the base station/TP is SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) and/or DMRS (Demodulation) for AoA measurement.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • DMRS Demodulation
  • UTDOA is a method of determining the location of the UE by estimating the arrival time of the SRS.
  • the serving cell is used as a reference cell, and the location of the UE can be estimated through the arrival time difference with another cell (or base station/).
  • the E-SMLC is a target UE. In order to instruct SRS transmission to the user, the serving cell of the target UE can be indicated.
  • E-SMLC can provide configurations such as periodic/aperiodic SRS, bandwidth and frequency/group/sequence hopping. .
  • Time division multiple access TDMA
  • frequency division multiples FDMA
  • V2X for time/frequency synchronization, a sidelink synchronization signal (SLSS) can be used in the physical system, and MIB-SL-V2X (master information block-sidelink-V2X) can be used in the RLC (radio link control) system. Can be used.
  • SLSS sidelink synchronization signal
  • MIB-SL-V2X master information block-sidelink-V2X
  • V2X synchronization source (synchronization) according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • the terminal is directly synchronized with GNSS (global navigation satellite systems) or directly synchronized with GNSS (in network coverage or out of network coverage) through a terminal non-indirectly.
  • GNSS global navigation satellite systems
  • GNSS in network coverage or out of network coverage
  • the terminal can be synchronized to GNSS.
  • GNSS is set as the synchronization source, the terminal
  • DFN and subframe numbers can be calculated using Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) and (pre-)set Direct Frame Number (DFN) offsets.
  • UTC Coordinated Universal Time
  • DFN Direct Frame Number
  • the terminal may be directly synchronized with the base station, or may be synchronized with another terminal that is time/frequency synchronized with the base station.
  • the base station may be an eNB or gNB.
  • the terminal may be within network coverage.
  • the terminal may receive synchronization information provided by the base station, and may be directly synchronized with the base station. Thereafter, the terminal may provide the synchronization information to another adjacent terminal.
  • the base station timing is set as a synchronization criterion
  • the terminal is a cell associated with the frequency (if it is within cell coverage at the frequency), a primary cell or a serving cell (if it is outside the cell coverage at the frequency) for synchronization and downlink measurement. ) Can be followed.
  • the base station e.g., serving cell
  • the base station can provide synchronization settings for carriers used for V2X or SL communication.
  • the terminal can follow the synchronization settings received from the base station. If no cell is detected in the carrier wave used for V2X or SL communication, and the synchronization setting is not received from the serving cell, the terminal may follow the preset synchronization setting.
  • the terminal may be synchronized to another terminal that does not directly or indirectly obtain synchronization information from the base station or GNSS.
  • the synchronization source and preference may be preset to the terminal.
  • the synchronization source and preference may be determined by the base station. It can be set via the control message provided.
  • This SL synchronization source can be associated with synchronization priority. For example, synchronization
  • the relationship between source and synchronization priority can be defined as shown in Table 14 or Table 15.
  • Table 14 or Table 15 is just an example, and the relationship between synchronization source and synchronization priority can be defined in various forms.
  • P0 may mean the highest priority
  • P6 may mean the lowest priority
  • the base station includes at least one of the gNB or the eNB. can do.
  • Whether to use GNSS-based synchronization or base station-based synchronization can be set (in advance).
  • the terminal derives the transmission timing of the terminal from the available synchronization criteria with the highest priority. can do.
  • the reception bandwidth and transmission bandwidth of a terminal need not be as large as that of the cell, and the reception bandwidth and transmission bandwidth of the terminal can be adjusted.
  • the network/base station has bandwidth.
  • the terminal can be informed of adjustments, e.g. the terminal has information/settings for bandwidth adjustment.
  • the terminal can perform bandwidth adjustment based on the received information/settings.
  • the bandwidth adjustment can reduce/enlarge the bandwidth, change the position of the bandwidth, or the subcarrier of the bandwidth.
  • 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 May include changes in spacing.
  • the bandwidth can be reduced for a period of less activity to save power.
  • the location of the bandwidth can be moved in the frequency domain.
  • the location of the bandwidth can be adjusted for scheduling flexibility (scheduling). flexibility) can be moved in the frequency domain, e.g. subcarrier of bandwidth
  • Subcarrier spacing can be changed; for example, subcarrier spacing of bandwidth can be changed to allow different services.
  • a subset of the total cell bandwidth of a cell can be referred to as a BWP (Bandwidth Part).
  • BA is
  • 29 shows a plurality of BWPs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • BWP1 with a bandwidth of 40 MPiz and subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz BWP2 with a bandwidth of WNfflz and subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz, and BWP3 with a bandwidth of 20 Nfflz and subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz are set. Can be.
  • Fig. 30 shows a BWP, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 30 shows a BWP, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • CRB common resource block
  • It can be a numbered carrier resource block from end to end, and a PRB can be a numbered resource block within each BWP, point A is the common reference point for the resource block grid. Can be indicated.
  • BWP is point A, offset from point A (NstartBWP) and
  • the subcarrier 0 of the numanology can be the external reference point of the carrier's PRB to be aligned; for example, the offset is the lowest subcarrier for a given numanology. It can be the PRB interval between point A and point A. For example, the bandwidth is a given
  • BWP can be defined for SL.
  • the same SL BWP can be used for transmission and reception.
  • a transmitting terminal can transmit an SL channel or SL signal on a specific BWP, and a receiving terminal can transmit the specific BWP above.
  • the SL BWP can be defined separately from the Uu BWP, and the SL BWP can have separate configuration signaling from the Uu BWP.
  • the terminal can receive the settings for SL BWP from the base station/network.
  • SL BWP can be set (in advance) for out-of-coverage NR V2X terminal and RRC_IDLE terminal in the carrier.
  • at least one SL BWP is 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 Can be activated within the carrier.
  • the resource pool may be a set of time-frequency resources that can be used for SL transmission and/or SL reception. From the terminal's point of view, the time domain resources in the resource pool may not be contiguous. It can be set (in advance) to a terminal within one carrier. From a physical layer point of view, the terminal can perform unicast, groupcast and broadcast communication using a set or preset resource pool.
  • the method of controlling the uplink transmission power of the terminal itself is open loop power.
  • the terminal has downlink path loss from the base station of the cell to which the terminal belongs. ) Can be estimated, and the terminal can perform power control in the form of compensating for the above path loss.
  • the terminal can control the uplink power by increasing the transmission power of the uplink.
  • the terminal can receive the information necessary to control the uplink transmission power (for example, a control signal) from the base station, and the terminal can control the uplink power based on the information received from the base station.
  • the terminal can control the uplink power according to the direct power control command received from the base station.
  • Open-loop power control can be supported in SL. Specifically, when the transmitting terminal is within the coverage of the base station, the base station is unicast, groupcast, or unicast based on the path loss between the transmitting terminal and the serving base station of the transmitting terminal. Open-loop power control can be enabled for broadcast transmission When the transmitting terminal receives information/settings from the base station to enable open-loop power control, the transmitting terminal can be used for unicast, groupcast or broadcast transmission. Open loop power control can be enabled, this can be to mitigate interference to the base station's uplink reception.
  • the receiving terminal can report the SL channel measurement result (e.g. SL RSRP) to the transmitting terminal.
  • the transmitting terminal can derive pathloss estimation from the SL channel measurement result reported by the receiving terminal.
  • the transmitting terminal transmits a reference signal to the receiving terminal
  • the receiving terminal The channel between the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal can be measured based on the reference signal transmitted by the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can transmit the SL channel measurement result to the transmitting terminal, and the transmitting terminal can transmit the SL channel measurement result.
  • the SL path loss from the receiving terminal can be estimated based on.
  • SL power control can be performed by compensating for the estimated path loss, and SL transmission can be performed to the receiving terminal.
  • the transmitting terminal controls the SL transmission power by further increasing the transmission power of the SL.
  • the power control may be applied when transmitting an SL physical channel (eg, PSCCH, PSSCH, PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel)) and/or SL signal.
  • long-term measurements ie, L3 filtering
  • L3 filtering can be supported on the SL, at least in the case of unicast.
  • the total SL transmission power can be the same in the symbol used for PSCCH and/or PSSCH transmission in the slot.
  • the maximum SL transmission power can be set for the transmitting terminal or set in advance. .
  • the transmitting terminal can be set to use only the downlink path loss (eg, the path loss between the transmitting terminal and the base station).
  • the transmitting terminal can be set to use only the SL path loss (e.g., the path loss between the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal).
  • the transmitting terminal can be configured to use the downlink path loss and the SL path loss.
  • the transmitting terminal will have the power acquired based on the downlink path loss and the SL path loss.
  • the minimum value can be determined as the transmit power.
  • the values of P0 and alpha can be set separately or pre-set for the downlink path loss and SL path loss.
  • P0 is received on average.
  • the alpha value can be a weighted value for path loss.
  • the terminal determines the size and frequency of the resource used by itself.
  • the resource size or frequency above a certain level is determined by itself. Use may be limited; however, if all the terminals use relatively large resources in a situation where many terminals are concentrated in a specific area at a specific time, the overall performance may be significantly degraded due to mutual interference.
  • the terminal judges whether the energy measured in the unit time/frequency resource is above a certain level, and the energy above a certain level is determined by the ratio of the observed unit time/frequency resource.
  • the amount of transmission resources and 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 The frequency can be adjusted.
  • the ratio of time/frequency resources at which energy above a certain level is observed is defined as the Channel Busy Ratio (CBR).
  • CBR Channel Busy Ratio
  • the terminal can measure the CBR for the channel/frequency.
  • the terminal can transmit the measured CBR to the network/base station.
  • 31 shows a resource unit for CBR measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the CBR indicates that the terminal immediately determines the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) in sub-channel units for a specific period (for example, 100 ms), and the immediate result value of the RSSI has a value equal to or greater than a preset threshold.
  • the number of sub-channels can mean the number of sub-channels.
  • CBR can mean the percentage of sub-channels having a value greater than or equal to a preset threshold among the sub-channels for a specific period. For example, in the embodiment of FIG. Assuming that the channel is a sub-channel with a value above a preset threshold, CBR can mean the percentage of sub-channels that are shaded for a 100 ms interval. Additionally, the terminal can report the CBR to the base station.
  • the UE when PSCCH and PSSCH are multiplexed, the UE can perform one CBR measurement for one resource pool.
  • the PSFCH resource is set or in advance If set, the PSFCH resource may be excluded from the CBR measurement.
  • congestion control may be necessary taking into account the priority of the traffic (eg, packets).
  • the terminal can measure the channel occupancy ratio (CR). Specifically , The terminal measures the CBR, and the terminal can determine the maximum value (CRlimkk) of the channel occupancy Ratio k, CRk that can be occupied by the traffic corresponding to each priority (for example, k) according to the CBR.
  • the terminal can derive the maximum value of the channel share (CRlimitk) for the priority of each traffic, based on a predefined table of CBR measurements. For example, in the case of traffic with a relatively high priority, the terminal can derive the maximum value of the relatively large channel share. After that, the terminal can make the sum of the channel share of the traffic with the priority level of the traffic lower than i a certain value or less.
  • congestion control can be performed. With this method, stronger channel occupancy limits can be placed on traffic with relatively low priority.
  • the terminal can perform SL congestion control using methods such as size control of transmission power, drop of packets, determination of retransmission, and transmission RB size adjustment (MCS adjustment).
  • Figure 33 shows the physical layer processing of the SL according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • the terminal uses a long-length transport block (TB) with a short-length code.
  • TB transport block
  • the terminal can be divided into multiple blocks (Code Block, CB), and the terminal 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • the terminal can combine the aforementioned short length of code blocks into one again. And, the terminal is one by one.
  • the combined code block can be transmitted to another terminal.
  • the terminal may perform a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding process on a long-length transport block.
  • the terminal may attach the CRC to the transport block.
  • the terminal can divide the full length transport block to which the CRC is attached into a plurality of short-length code blocks, and the terminal can perform the CRC encoding process again for each of the plurality of short-length code blocks.
  • a CRC can be attached to a code block. Therefore, each code block can contain a CRC.
  • each code block with a CRC is input to a channel encoder and can undergo a channel coding process.
  • the terminal can perform the rate matching process, bit-wise scrambling, modulation, layer mapping, precoding, and antenna mapping for each code block, and the terminal can transmit it to the receiver.
  • the channel coding method described through FIGS. 21 and 22 can be applied to the SL.
  • the uplink/downlink physical channels and signals described through FIGS. 21 and 22 are SL It can be replaced by physical channels and signals.
  • the channel coding defined for the data channel and the control channel in NR Uu can be defined similarly to the channel coding for the data channel and the control channel on the NR SL, respectively.
  • the conventional LTE-V2X did not support the HARQ feedback operation.
  • the NR-V2X supports the HARQ feedback operation to improve the reliability of the V2X signal.
  • the NR-V2X radio link control (RLC) ) Layer RLC ARQ operation is supported.
  • RLC radio link control
  • a method of disabling is proposed. That is, the terminal can reduce the protocol overhead by performing RLC ARQ operation only when the link or channel environment of the physical layer is not good. In addition, the terminal can reduce the protocol overhead. Alternatively, if the channel environment is not good, the reliability of packet transmission and reception can be improved by performing RLC ARQ operation.
  • the sidelink terminal performs only HARQ operation, and RLC ARQ
  • a terminal may receive a PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel) including Sidelink Control Information (SCI) from another terminal (S3401).
  • PSCCH Physical Sidelink Control Channel
  • SCI Sidelink Control Information
  • the terminal includes a reference signal based on the received SCI.
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • the terminal can perform HARQ feedback operation for the received PSSCH (S3403), and this HARQ feedback operation is performed regardless of the result of the channel state measurement described later.
  • the terminal can measure the channel state of the physical layer using the received reference signal (S3404)
  • the measurement of the channel state of the physical layer
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality
  • RSSI Sidelink-Received Signal Strength Indicator
  • CBR Channel Busy Ratio
  • the terminal can determine whether the result of the channel status measurement is less than the threshold value (S3405). If the result of the channel status measurement exceeds the threshold value, the terminal can determine whether the link with another terminal or the channel environment is Judging that it is good, and the RLC ARQ operation
  • the terminal provides information of the RLC layer, including information for triggering the RLC ARQ operation.
  • the terminal can guarantee the reliability of the sidelink signal by performing the RCL ARQ operation.
  • the terminal can transmit the RLC PDU to the other terminal, and the RLC PDU is
  • the RLC PDU header may contain lbit polling bits.
  • the polling bit may be set to 1.
  • the polling bit can be set to zero.
  • the value of 0 or 1 is an arbitrary setting value, and is not limited thereto.
  • the polling bit may be set to 0 based on the result of the channel state measurement being less than or equal to the threshold value.
  • the polling bit can be set to 1.
  • the terminal can receive ACK/NACK feedback information for the RLC PDU by triggering the RLC ARQ operation.
  • the terminal can determine whether or not the ARQ operation of the RLC layer is performed based on the channel state of the physical layer.
  • the terminal allows the RCL ARQ operation to be performed only when the channel state is poor, thereby signaling over. The reliability of the signal can be maintained while reducing the head.
  • Fig. 35 shows the operation of the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal according to the embodiment(s) of this specification.
  • the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal The operation is performed by default without any conditions.
  • the transmitting terminal measures the channel status of the physical layer and, if the result is less than the threshold value, 111 ⁇ : Show 11 (3 operations can be started.
  • the transmission terminal is 111 ⁇ : All 1) 11
  • the included polling bit is set to 1, 111 modules 1) 11 can be transmitted to the receiving terminal.
  • the receiving terminal can receive 111 modules 1) 11, and 111: Show 11 (3 operations can be started. If the terminal successfully decodes 111 ⁇ : all 1) 11, it can transmit a show (:), and if the decoding fails, it can transmit NACK.
  • the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal can continue to perform operations and 111: show 11 (3 operations.
  • the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal are a relative concept and are not limited to the transmission or reception of signals.
  • the physical layer can be.
  • the physical layer measurement value is a threshold value. Layers can indicate that a physical layer measurement has fallen below a threshold, or that the state of a link or channel has fallen below a threshold.
  • 111 ⁇ to the layer 111 ⁇ : Show 11 (triggers 3).
  • the primitive can be transmitted.
  • Yo1 The layer receives the primitive that activates the Yo1: Shoyo from the MAC layer, and through the following procedure, 111: Show11 (3) can be operated again. That is to say, based on the channel state measurement value of the physical layer, if the measurement value is less than the threshold value, the physical layer reports it to the MAC layer, and the MAC layer can report it to the Yo 1: layer. 111 ⁇ :Show 11(can enable 3 actions.
  • Show 11 (3 action enable method can be as follows.
  • Bit 0 1 3 ⁇ 4 0 is set to 1, and Yo1 ⁇ : can operate the shoyo.
  • the receiving terminal that received the polling bit set to 1, 111 ⁇ : Mo011 is successfully received. If not received, NACK can be transmitted.
  • the receiving terminal receives the packet transmitted by the transmitting terminal and can perform 111 ⁇ :shoyo operation when the polling bit included in the 111 ⁇ :all 011 header is set to 1 And, if the receiving terminal successfully receives 111 modules 1) 11 based on the sequence number, it can transmit a show (: to the transmitting terminal) and transmit NACK when the reception fails.
  • Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the operation of the terminal according to the embodiment(s) of the present specification.
  • the terminal can perform operation and 111 show 11 (two operations).
  • 111 show 11 (3 operation is by the operation described in Fig. 34 and Fig. 35).
  • 2020/175955 1» (:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 may be triggered action.
  • the terminal can measure the channel status of the physical layer based on the reference signal 3602).
  • the terminal has the result of channel status measurement. It can be judged whether it is below the threshold value or whether it is exceeding the threshold value 3603).
  • the terminal can transmit information of the 111 layer, including information to stop the operation of ⁇ 0 show 11 (3604).
  • the information to stop the operation of [Yo] ⁇ :Show1 «3 may be information included in the polling bit included in Yo] ⁇ :All1)11.
  • Fig. 37 shows the operation of the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal according to the embodiment(s) of the present specification.
  • the transmitting terminal measures the channel state of the physical layer, and if the result value exceeds the threshold value, 111 shows 11 (3 operation is stopped.
  • the transmitting terminal has a polling bit set to 0 in the receiving terminal)
  • the operation can only be performed without transmitting the ACK/NACK for.
  • the physical layer may indicate to the MAC layer that the physical layer measurement result is above the threshold value or indicate that the state of the link or channel is above the threshold value.
  • the layer receives an instruction from the physical layer that the link status has improved, the layer 111 goes to the layer 111 and stops the show 11 (3
  • the primitive can be transmitted.
  • Yo1 The layer receives a primitive that causes the MAC layer to stop the operation. Can be stopped.
  • the sidelink transmission terminal You can set the polling bit to be activated 0111!3 ⁇ 4 1 ⁇ 2) to 0 and disable ⁇ 0 show 11 (3 operations). And the receiving terminal has successfully received Yo1 ⁇ :Mo1)11,
  • NACK can be transmitted.
  • the sidelink receiving terminal receives the packet transmitted by the sidelink transmitting terminal, and 111 ⁇ :11 £& (If the polling bit included in 1 is set to 0, then 111 ⁇ :show 11(3 The operation can be stopped. After that, the sidelink transmitting terminal and the sidelink receiving terminal can only be operated.
  • the setting value of 0 or 1 of the polling bit is illustrative and is not limited thereto.
  • sidelink terminals can perform or stop ⁇ 0show1 «3 operation by reflecting the current state of the wireless link or channel. Through this, the protocol overhead or complexity of the NR V2X SL UE can be reduced.
  • the terminal according to the above embodiment(s) is another terminal, a terminal related to an autonomous vehicle, It can mean a terminal that communicates with at least one of a base station or network.
  • the proposed method was described based on the 3GPP NR system for convenience of explanation, but the range of the system to which the proposed method is applied can be extended to other systems other than the 3GPP NR system.
  • the proposed methods of the present invention are D2D communication.
  • D2D communication means that the UE communicates with other UEs using a direct wireless channel, where, as an example, the UE refers to the user's terminal, but network equipment such as a base station In the case of transmitting/receiving signals according to the communication method between the UEs, it can also be regarded as a kind of UE.
  • the proposed methods of the present invention may be statically applied to the mode 3 V2X operation (and/or the mode 4 V2X operation). In addition, as an example, the proposed methods of the present invention are previously set (/signaled).
  • V2X channel (/signal) transmission for example, PSSCH (and/or (associated) PSCCH and/or PSBCH)
  • the proposed methods of the present invention are PSSCH. And (linked) PSCCH (in the frequency domain) adjacent (ADJACENT) (and/or spaced (NON-ADJACENT)) and transmitted (and/or pre-set (/signaled) MCS (and/or coding rate) And/or RB) (if value (/range))-based transmission is performed), it may be applied statically.
  • the proposed methods of the present invention are MODE#3 (and/or MODE#4).
  • V2X CARRIER (and/or (MODE#4 (/3)) SL (/UL) SPS (and/or SL (/UL) DYNAMIC SCHEDULING) CARRIER) can also be applied statically.
  • the proposed methods are synchronous signals (sending (and/or receiving)) resource location and/or number (and/or V2X resource pool related subframe location and/or number (and/or subchannel size and/or number) between CARRIERs) )It may be applied (limitedly) only if (and/or (some) different) the same (and/or (some) different).
  • the proposed methods of the present invention may also be extended and applied to (V2X) communication between a base station and a terminal.
  • the proposed methods of the invention may be applied only to UNICAST (sidelink) communications (and/or MULTICAST (or GROUPCAST) (sidelink) communications and/or BROADCAST (sidelink) communications).
  • Fig. 38 illustrates a communication system 1 applied to the present invention.
  • the communication system (1) applied to the present invention includes a wireless device, a base station, and a network.
  • the wireless device is a wireless access technology (eg, 5G NR (New RAT), LTE ( Long Term Evolution)) refers to a device that performs communication, and can be referred to as a communication/wireless/5G device.
  • wireless devices are robots (1_, vehicles (lOOb-l, 100b-2)).
  • XR eXtended Reality
  • Hand-held device 100d
  • Mechanism and Electricity 100e
  • IoT Internet of Thing
  • a vehicle may include a vehicle equipped with a wireless communication function, a self-driving vehicle, a vehicle capable of communicating between vehicles, etc.
  • the vehicle may include UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) (e.g. drone).
  • XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality)/VR (Virtual Reality)/MR (Mixed Reality) devices, HMD (Head-Mounted Device), HUD (Head-Up Display), TV, smartphone, Computer, wearable device, home appliance, digital
  • Home appliances can include TVs, refrigerators, washing machines, etc.
  • IoT devices may include sensors, smart meters, etc.
  • a base station, network can be implemented as a wireless device, and a specific wireless device 200a can act as a base station/network node to other wireless devices.
  • the wireless device (100a ⁇ 100f) can be connected to the network 300 through the base station 200.
  • AI Artificial Intelligence
  • the network 300 may be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (e.g., LTE) network, or a 5G (e.g., NR) network.
  • Wireless devices (100a ⁇ 100f) are
  • vehicles (100b-1, 100b-2) is a direct communication (eg V2V(Vehicle to
  • IoT devices e.g., sensors
  • IoT devices can communicate directly with other IoT devices (e.g., sensors) or other wireless devices (W0a ⁇ 100f).
  • wireless communication/connection includes uplink/downlink communication 150a and sidelink communication 150b (or, D2D communication), base station communication 150c ( Various wireless connections such as relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul) 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 Can be achieved through technology (eg 5G NR).
  • wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can transmit/receive signals through various physical channels.
  • wireless signals At least some of the process of setting various configuration information for transmission/reception of the device, various signal processing processes (e.g., channel encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, resource mapping/demapping, etc.), resource allocation process, etc. can be performed.
  • Fig. 39 shows a wireless device applicable to the present invention.
  • the first wireless device W0 and the second wireless device 200 can transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (eg, LTE, NR).
  • the first wireless device W0 and the second wireless device 200 can transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • the device 100 and the second wireless device 200 may correspond to the "wireless device (100x), base station (200)" and/or “wireless device (100x), wireless device (100x)" in Fig. 38.
  • the first wireless device 100 includes one or more processors 102 and one or more memories 104, and may additionally include one or more transceivers 106 and/or one or more antennas 108.
  • Processor 102 controls memory 104 and/or transceiver 106, and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flow charts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor 102 may process the information in the memory W4 to generate the first information/signal, and then transmit a wireless signal including the first information/signal through the transceiver 106. Further, the processor 102 may store the information obtained from the signal processing of the second information/signal in the memory W4 after receiving the wireless signal including the second information/signal through the transmitter/receiver 106. 104 can be connected with the processor 102,
  • the memory 104 may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor 102, or the descriptions, functions, and processes disclosed in this document. It is possible to store software code including instructions for performing procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts, where processor 102 and memory 104 are used to implement wireless communication technologies (e.g., LTE, NR). It may be part of a designed communication modem/circuit/chip.
  • the transceiver 106 can be connected to the processor 102, and can transmit and/or receive wireless signals through one or more antennas (W8). It may include a transmitter and/or a receiver. The transmitter/receiver 106 may be used interchangeably with an RF (Radio Frequency) unit.
  • the wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.
  • the second wireless device 200 includes one or more processors 202, one or more memories 204, and may additionally include one or more transceivers 206 and/or one or more antennas 208.
  • Processor The 202 controls the memory 204 and/or the transceiver 206 and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flow diagrams disclosed in this document. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • the processor 202 processes the information in the memory 204 to generate the third information/signal, and then transmits the third information/signal through the transceiver 206. It can transmit wireless signals including. Further, the processor 202 may store the information obtained from the signal processing of the fourth information/signal in the memory 204 after receiving the wireless signal including the fourth information/signal through the transmitter/receiver 206. 204 can be connected with the processor 202,
  • the memory 204 may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor 202, or the descriptions, functions, and processes disclosed in this document. It is possible to store software code including instructions for performing procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts, where processor 202 and memory 204 are used to implement wireless communication technologies (e.g., LTE, NR). It may be part of a designed communication modem/circuit/chip.
  • Transceiver 206 may be connected to processor 202, and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals through one or more antennas 208. Transceiver 206 is capable of transmitting and receiving radio signals. It may include a transmitter and/or receiver. Transmitter/receiver 206 may be used interchangeably with an RF unit.
  • a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.
  • more than one protocol layer may be implemented by more than one processor (W2, 202); for example, more than one layer of protocol.
  • Processors 102, 202 are one or more layers (e.g., PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC,
  • One or more processors (102, 202) may implement one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and one or more protocol data units (PDUs) and/or operational flow charts according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts disclosed in the text. / Or one or more SDUs (Service Data Units) can be created.
  • One or more processors (102, 202) can be used for messages, control information, and data according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts disclosed in this document.
  • one or more processors (102, 202) may have a signal (e.g., base) containing PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information in accordance with the functions, procedures, proposals and/or methods disclosed in this document. Band signal), which can be provided to one or more transceivers (W6, 206), one or more processors (102,
  • 202 can receive signals (e.g., baseband signals) from one or more transmitters and receivers 106, 206, and PDUs, SDUs, and PDUs, according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts disclosed in this document. You can acquire messages, control information, data or information.
  • signals e.g., baseband signals
  • One or more processors can be used as a controller, microcontroller, or microcontroller.
  • processors 102, 202 may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof.
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • DSPD Digital Signal Processing Device
  • PLD Programmable Logic Device
  • FPGA Field 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • Programmable Gate Arrays can be included in one or more processors (102, 202).
  • Descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software, and firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, etc. Disclosed in this document. Descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flow charts are the firmware set to perform or
  • the software may be contained in one or more processors 102, 202, or stored in one or more memories 104, 204 and run by one or more processors 102, 202. Descriptions, functions, procedures, and suggestions disclosed herein.
  • the method and/or operational flow charts may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of a set of codes, instructions and/or instructions.
  • One or more memories may be connected to one or more processors (102, 202) and may store various types of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions and/or instructions.
  • One or more memories 104, 204 may consist of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drive, register, cache memory, computer readable storage medium, and/or combinations thereof.
  • One or more memories 104, 204 It may be located inside and/or outside of one or more processors 102, 202.
  • one or more memories 104, 204 can be connected to one or more processors 102, 202 through various technologies such as wired or wireless connection. Can be
  • One or more transmitters and receivers may be connected to one or more other devices.
  • One or more transmitters and receivers have the descriptions, functions, procedures, and procedures disclosed in this document from one or more other devices. It can receive user data, control information, radio signals/channels, etc. mentioned in the proposal, method and/or operation flow chart, etc.
  • one or more transceivers 106, 206 may have one or more
  • processors 102, 202 can be connected with the processors 102, 202, and can transmit and receive wireless signals, e.g., one or more processors 102, 202 have one or more transceivers 106, 206 to transmit user data, control information to one or more other devices. Or it can be controlled to transmit wireless signals.
  • processors 102, 202
  • Transceivers (W6, 206) can be controlled to receive user data, control information or radio signals from one or more other devices.
  • one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be connected to one or more antennas (108, 208). ,
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) can be controlled to receive user data, control information or radio signals from one or more other devices.
  • one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be connected to one or more antennas (108, 208). .
  • Transceiver (106, 206) through one or more antennas (108, 208), the user data, control information, radio signal / channel, etc. mentioned in the description, function, procedure, proposal, method and/or operation flow chart disclosed in this document.
  • one or more antennas may be multiple physical antennas or multiple logical antennas (e.g., antenna ports).
  • One or more transceivers 106, 206 may be configured to transmit and receive user data, control information,
  • One or more processors (102,
  • transceivers 106, 206 have user data processed using one or more processors (W2, 202), Control information, radio signals/channels, etc. can be converted from baseband signals to RF band signals.
  • processors W2, 202
  • Control information radio signals/channels, etc. can be converted from baseband signals to RF band signals.
  • one or more of the transceivers 106 and 206 may include (analog) oscillators and/or filters.
  • FIG. 40 illustrates a signal processing circuit for a transmission signal.
  • the signal processing circuit 1000 includes a scrambler 1010, a modulator 1020, a layer mapper 1030, a precoder 1040, a resource mapper 1050, and a signal generator 1060.
  • the operations/functions of FIG. 40 may be performed in the processors 102, 202 and/or the transceivers 106, 206 of FIG. 39.
  • the hardware elements of FIG. 40 are the processors of FIG. 39. (102, 202) and/or the transceivers 106, 206.
  • block 1010 1060 may be implemented in the processor 102, 202 of FIG. 39.
  • block 1010 1050 may be implemented in the processor of FIG. 39 ( 102, 202), and block 1060 may be implemented in the transceiver 106, 206 of FIG.
  • the code word may be converted into a wireless signal through the signal processing circuit 1000 of FIG. 40.
  • the codeword is a coded bit sequence of the information block.
  • the information block may include a transport block (e.g., a UL-SCH transport block, a DL-SCH transport block).
  • a radio signal is a variety of physical channels (e.g., PUSCH, etc.) PDSCH) can be transmitted.
  • the codeword can be converted into a scrambled bit sequence by the scrambler 1010.
  • the scramble sequence used for scramble is generated based on the initialization value, and the initialization value includes ID information of the wireless device, etc.
  • the scrambled bit sequence can be modulated into a modulation symbol sequence by the modulator 1020. Modulation methods are pi/2-BPSK (pi/2-Binary Phase Shift Keying), m-PSK (m-Phase Shift Keying). ), m-QAM (m-Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), etc.
  • the complex modulated symbol sequence can be mapped to one or more transmission layers by the layer mapper 1030.
  • the modulation symbols of each transmission layer are precoder 1040.
  • the output z of the precoder 1040 can be obtained by multiplying the output y of the layer mapper 1030 by the precoding matrix W of N*M. ,
  • N is the number of antenna ports
  • M is the number of transmission layers
  • the precoder 1040 may perform precoding after performing transform precoding (e.g., DFT conversion) for complex modulation symbols. In addition, the precoder 1040 may perform transform precoding. Precoding can be performed without performing it.
  • transform precoding e.g., DFT conversion
  • the resource mapper 1050 may map the modulation symbols of each antenna port to a time-frequency resource.
  • the time-frequency resource is a plurality of symbols (eg, CP-OFDMA symbol, DFT-s-OFDMA symbol) in a time domain. ), and may include a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • the signal generator 1060 generates a radio signal from the mapped modulated symbols, and the generated radio signal can be transmitted to another device through each antenna.
  • Signal generator 1060 is an IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) module, CP (Cyclic Prefix) inserter, DAC (Digital-to-Analog Converter), frequency up converter (frequency uplink converter), etc.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • CP Cyclic Prefix
  • DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
  • frequency up converter frequency uplink converter
  • a wireless device e.g., 100, 200 in Fig. 39
  • receive a wireless signal from the outside through an antenna port/transmitter/receiver.
  • the received wireless signal can be converted into a baseband signal through a signal restorer.
  • the signal restorer may include a frequency downlink converter, an analog-to-digital converter (ADC), a CP remover, and a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) module.
  • ADC analog-to-digital converter
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • the baseband signal is a resource de-mapper.
  • Postcoding, demodulation, and de-scramble can be performed to restore a codeword.
  • the codeword can be decoded and restored to an original information block. Therefore, a signal processing circuit for a received signal. (Not shown) may include a signal restorer, a resource demapper, a post coder, a demodulator, a descrambler, and a decoder.
  • Fig. 41 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention.
  • the wireless devices 100 and 200 refer to the wireless devices 100 and 200 of FIG.
  • the wireless devices (100, 200) is a communication unit (110), A control unit 120, a memory unit 130, and an additional element 140 may be included.
  • the communication unit may include a communication circuit 112 and a transceiver(s) 114.
  • the communication circuit 112 May include one or more processors 102, 202 and/or one or more memories 104, 204 of FIG. 39.
  • the transceiver(s) 114 may include one or more of the processors 102, 202 of FIG.
  • Transceivers 106,206 and/or one or more antennas 108,208 may be included.
  • the control unit 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140 and controls all operations of the wireless device.
  • the control unit 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140 and controls all operations of the wireless device.
  • the control unit 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140 and controls all operations of the wireless device.
  • the control unit 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140 and controls all operations of the wireless device.
  • the control unit 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140 and controls all operations of the wireless device.
  • the control unit 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140 and controls all operations of the wireless device.
  • the electrical/mechanical operation of the wireless device can be controlled based on the program/code/command/information stored in the memory unit 130.
  • the control unit 120 transmits information stored in the memory unit 130 to the communication unit (1W).
  • the information received through a wireless/wired interface is transmitted to an external (e.g., other communication device) through a wireless/wired interface or from an external (e.g., other communication device) through the communication unit (110).
  • the additional element 140 can be configured in various ways depending on the type of wireless device.
  • the additional element 140 may include at least one of a power unit/battery, an I/O unit, a driving unit and a computing unit.
  • the wireless device may be a robot (Figs. 38, 100A), Vehicles (Figs. 38, 100b-1, 100b-2), XR devices (Figs. 38, 100c), portable devices (Figs. 38, 100d), home appliances (Figs. 38, 100e), IoT devices (Figs. 38, 100f), digital Broadcasting Terminal, 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 Hologram device, public safety device, MTC device, medical device, fintech device (or financial device), security device, climate/environment device, AI server/device (Fig. 38, 400), base stations (Figs. 38, 200), network nodes, etc.
  • Wireless devices can be movable or used in fixed places depending on use-example/service.
  • various elements, components, units/parts, and/or modules in the wireless devices (100, 200) are all connected to each other through a wired interface, or at least some parts are wirelessly connected through a communication unit (1 W).
  • control unit 120 and the communication unit (no) are connected by wire, and the control unit 120 and the first unit (e.g.,
  • each element, component, unit/part, and/or module in the wireless device 100, 200 may further include one or more elements.
  • the control unit 120 may be composed of a set of one or more processors.
  • the control unit 120 is a communication control processor, an application
  • the memory unit 130 is a RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (Dynamic RAM) , ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, and/or combinations thereof.
  • FIG 42 illustrates a portable device applied to the present invention.
  • the portable device may include a smart phone, a smart pad, a wearable device (eg, a smart watch, a smart glass), a portable computer (eg, a notebook, etc.).
  • Mobile devices may be referred to as MS (Mobile Station), UT (user terminal), MSS (Mobile Subscriber Station), SS (Subscriber Station), AMS (Advanced Mobile Station), or WT (Wireless terminal).
  • MS Mobile Station
  • UT user terminal
  • MSS Mobile Subscriber Station
  • SS Subscriber Station
  • AMS Advanced Mobile Station
  • WT Wireless terminal
  • the portable device 100 includes an antenna unit 108, a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, a power supply unit 140a, an interface unit 140b, and input/output It may include a part 140c.
  • the antenna part 108 may be configured as a part of the communication part H0.
  • Blocks 110 to 130/140a to 140c correspond to blocks 110 and 130/140 of 41, respectively.
  • the communication unit 110 can transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other wireless devices and base stations.
  • the control unit 120 controls components of the mobile device 100 to perform various operations.
  • the control unit 120 may include an application processor (AP).
  • the memory unit 130 is required to drive the mobile device 100.
  • the power supply unit 140a supplies power to the portable device 100. And may include wired/wireless charging circuits, batteries, etc.
  • the interface unit 140b may support connection between the portable device 100 and other external devices.
  • the interface unit 140b provides various ports (e.g., audio) for connection with an external device. 2020/175955 1» (:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889 input/output port, video input/output port) can be included.
  • Input/output unit 140c includes video information/signal, audio information/signal, data, and/ Alternatively, information input from the user may be input or output.
  • the input/output unit 140c may include a camera, a microphone, a user input unit, a display unit 140d, a speaker, and/or a haptic module.
  • the input/output unit 140c For example, in the case of data communication, the input/output unit 140c
  • the communication unit H0 transfers the information/signals stored in the memory to a wireless signal.
  • the communication unit (H0) can transmit the converted wireless signal to other wireless devices directly or to the base station.
  • the received wireless signal After receiving the wireless signal from the base station, the received wireless signal can be restored to the original information/signal.
  • the restored information/signal is stored in the memory unit 130 and then
  • various forms eg, text, voice, image, video, and heptic
  • various forms eg, text, voice, image, video, and heptic
  • Figure 43 illustrates a vehicle or an autonomous vehicle applied to the present invention.
  • a vehicle or an autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, vehicle, train, manned/unmanned vehicle (Aerial Vehicle, AV), or a ship.
  • AV Automated Vehicle
  • the vehicle or autonomous vehicle 100 includes an antenna unit 108,
  • a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a driving unit 140a, a power supply unit 140b, a sensor unit 140c, and an autonomous driving unit 140d may be included.
  • the antenna unit 108 is a part of the communication unit H0.
  • Blocks 110/130/140a-140d correspond to blocks 110/130/140 of 41, respectively.
  • the communication unit 110 can transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other vehicles, base stations (e.g. base stations, roadside units, etc.), and external devices such as servers.
  • the control unit 120 may control elements of the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 to perform various operations.
  • the control unit 120 may include an ECU (Electronic Control Unit).
  • the driving unit 140a is a vehicle or autonomously driving vehicle 100. The vehicle 100 can be driven on the ground.
  • the driving unit 140a may include an engine, a motor, a powertrain, a wheel, a brake, a steering device, and the like.
  • the power supply unit 140b is provided to the vehicle or autonomous vehicle 100. It supplies power, and may include wired/wireless heavy electrical circuits, batteries, etc.
  • the sensor unit 140c can obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc.
  • the sensor unit 140c is
  • the autonomous driving unit 140d is a technology that maintains a driving lane, amaptive cruise control. As such, it is possible to implement a technology that automatically adjusts the speed, a technology that automatically runs along a specified path, and a technology that automatically sets a path when a destination is set and runs. 2020/175955 1»(:1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889
  • the communication unit 110 may receive map data, traffic information data, etc. from an external server.
  • the autonomous driving unit 140(1) may create an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the acquired data.
  • the control unit 120 moves the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 along the interest rate driving path.
  • Driving part (140 ⁇ can be controlled (e.g. speed/direction control). During autonomous driving
  • the communication unit (0) non/periodically obtains the latest traffic information data from an external server, and can obtain surrounding traffic information data from nearby vehicles.
  • the sensor unit (14) during autonomous driving is the vehicle status and surrounding light information.
  • the autonomous driving unit 140(1) can update the autonomous driving route and driving plan based on the newly acquired data/information.
  • the communication department (0) can obtain the vehicle location, autonomous driving route, driving plan, etc.
  • Information can be transferred to an external server.
  • the external server can predict traffic information data in advance using city technology, etc., based on information collected from vehicles or autonomous vehicles, and can transmit the predicted traffic information data to the vehicle or autonomously. Can be provided to driving vehicles
  • Fig. 44 illustrates a vehicle applied to the present invention.
  • the vehicle can be implemented as a means of transport, a train, a vehicle, a ship, and the like.
  • the vehicle 100 may include a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, an input/output unit 140 and a position measuring unit 140 ratio.
  • the communication unit (0) can transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other vehicles or external devices such as base stations.
  • the control unit 120 controls the components of the vehicle 100 to perform various operations.
  • the memory unit 130 can store data/parameters/programs/codes/commands supporting various functions of the vehicle 100.
  • Input/output unit (140 ⁇ is based on the information in the memory unit 130)
  • the object can be output.
  • the input/output unit (140 ⁇ can include 111 type.
  • the position measurement unit (140) can obtain the location information of the vehicle 100.
  • the location information is the absolute location information of the vehicle 100, It can include location information, acceleration information, location information with nearby vehicles, etc.
  • Position measurement unit (140 ratio can include 0-8 and various sensors.
  • the communication unit 110 of the vehicle 100 may receive map information, traffic information, etc. from an external server and store it in the memory unit 130.
  • the location measurement unit (140 ratio is 0 to 8 and various types)
  • the vehicle location information can be acquired through the sensor and stored in the memory unit 130.
  • the control unit 120 creates a virtual object based on map information, traffic information, and vehicle location information, and the input/output unit 140 is the generated virtual object. Objects can be displayed on the window of the vehicle (1410, 1420).
  • the control unit 120 can determine whether the vehicle 100 is running normally in the driving ship based on the vehicle location information. If it deviates abnormally, the control unit 120 may display a warning on the window of the vehicle through the input/output unit 140.
  • control unit 120 can broadcast a warning message about driving abnormalities to nearby vehicles through the communication unit (no). Depending on the situation, the control unit 120 is the communication unit) Through (H0), information on the location of the vehicle and information on the driving/vehicle can be transmitted to the relevant agencies.
  • FIG. 45 illustrates an XR device applied to the present invention.
  • XR devices can be implemented with HMD, head-up display (HUD) provided in vehicles, televisions, smartphones, computers, wearable devices, home appliances, digital signage, vehicles, and robots.
  • HMD head-up display
  • FIG. 45 illustrates an XR device applied to the present invention.
  • XR devices can be implemented with HMD, head-up display (HUD) provided in vehicles, televisions, smartphones, computers, wearable devices, home appliances, digital signage, vehicles, and robots.
  • HMD head-up display
  • the XR device (100a) includes a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a memory unit (130), an input/output unit (140a), a sensor unit (140b) and a power supply unit (140c)
  • blocks 110-130/140a-140c correspond to blocks 110-130/140 of 41, respectively.
  • the communication unit (110) is an external device such as other wireless devices, portable devices, or media servers.
  • the control unit 120 is XR
  • controller 120 controls and/or processes processes such as video/image acquisition, (video/image) encoding, and metadata generation and processing. Or it can be configured to perform.
  • the memory unit 130 is required to drive the XR device 100a / create an XR object.
  • the input/output unit (1 40a) obtains control information and data from the outside, and can output the generated XR object.
  • the input/output unit 140a is a camera and a microphone. , A user input unit, a display unit, a speaker and/or a haptic module, etc.
  • the sensor unit 140b can obtain XR device status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc.
  • the sensor unit 140b is a proximity sensor, illuminance. Sensors, acceleration sensors, magnetic sensors, gyro sensors, inertial sensors, RGB sensors, IR sensors, fingerprint recognition sensors, ultrasonic sensors, optical sensors, microphones and/or radars.
  • Power supply unit 140c is an XR device It supplies power to 100a), and may include wired/wireless charging circuits, batteries, etc.
  • the memory unit 130 of the XR device 100a is an XR object (eg, ARAVR/MR
  • the input/output unit 140a can obtain a command for operating the XR device 100a from the user, and the control unit 120 can drive the XR device 100a according to the user's driving command. For example, the user can drive the XR device 100a.
  • the control unit 120 may transmit the content request information to another device (eg, a mobile device 100b) or a media server through the communication unit 130.
  • the communication unit 130 may download/stream content such as movies and news from another device (e.g., a portable device (WOb)) or a media server to the memory unit 130.
  • the control unit 120 receives video/images for the content.
  • procedures such as acquisition, (video/image) encoding, and metadata generation/processing, and is based on information about the surrounding space or real objects acquired through the input/output unit 140a/sensor unit 140b.
  • the operation of the XII device (100 ⁇ ) can be controlled by the portable device (10A5).
  • the mobile device (10015) can operate as a controller for the XII device (100 ⁇ .
  • XII After acquiring the 3D location information of the device (100 ⁇ ), it is possible to create and output XII objects corresponding to the mobile device (10 yrs5).
  • Fig. 46 illustrates a robot applied to the present invention. Robots can be classified into industrial, medical, household, military, etc. depending on the purpose or field of use.
  • the robot 100 is a communication unit 110, the control unit 120, the memory unit 130,
  • the input/output unit 140, the sensor unit 140 and the drive unit 14 may be included.
  • blocks 110 to 130/14 ( ⁇ to 14) correspond to blocks 110 and 130/140 of 41, respectively.
  • the communication unit 110 can transmit and receive signals (eg, driving information, control signals, etc.) with other wireless devices, other robots, or external devices such as a control server.
  • signals eg, driving information, control signals, etc.
  • the memory unit 130 supports various functions of the robot 100.
  • I/O unit (1 40°) obtains information from the outside of the robot 100 and can output information to the outside of the robot 100.
  • I/O unit (140 units) May include a camera, a microphone, a user input unit, a display unit, a speaker and/or a haptic module, etc.
  • a sensor unit (140 is able to obtain internal information of the robot 100, information about a peripheral environment, user information, etc.
  • Sensor unit) (140 ratio may include proximity sensor, illumination sensor, acceleration sensor, magnetic sensor, gyro sensor, inertial sensor, III sensor, fingerprint recognition sensor, ultrasonic sensor, light sensor, microphone, radar, etc.
  • the drive unit 14 can perform various physical movements such as moving the robot joint. In addition, the drive unit 14 can make the robot 100 run on the ground or fly in the air.
  • the drive unit 140 is an actuator, a motor, and so on. , Wheels, brakes, propellers, etc.
  • FIG. 47 illustrates the timing period applied to the present invention.
  • the timing period is IV, projector, smartphone, 1 (, laptop, digital broadcasting terminal, tablet 1 (, wearable device, set-top box 16), radio, washing machine, refrigerator It can be implemented as a fixed device, such as a digital signage, a robot, a vehicle, or a mobile device.
  • the timing device 100 includes a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, an input/output unit 1403/14A5, and a running processor unit 14( ⁇ And a sensor unit 140(1).
  • Blocks 110 to 130/14 ( ⁇ to 140 (1) correspond to blocks 110 and 130/140 of 41, respectively.
  • the communication unit 110 uses wired/wireless communication technology to communicate with external devices such as other devices (eg, Figs. 38, 100, 200, 400) and wired/wireless signals (eg, 400 in Fig. 38). Sensor information, user input, learning model, control signal, etc.) can be transmitted and received. 2020/175955 1» (: 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2020/002889)
  • the communication unit (0) can transmit information in the memory unit 130 to an external device, or transmit a signal received from the external device to the memory unit 130.
  • the control unit 120 may determine at least one executable operation of the timing unit ( ⁇ 0) based on information determined or generated using a data analysis algorithm or a machine learning algorithm. And, the control unit 120 ) Can perform a determined operation by controlling the components of the timing device 100. For example, the control unit 120 may request, search, and receive data from the learning processor unit 14 (or memory unit 130). Alternatively, it is possible to control the components of the timing device 100 to perform an action that is available, and at least one of the possible actions that are predicted or that is judged to be desirable. In addition, the control unit 120 is the viewing device 100.
  • the collected historical information can be used to update the learning model.
  • the memory unit 130 may store data supporting various functions of the timing device 100.
  • the memory unit 130 may store data obtained from the input unit 140,
  • the data obtained from the communication unit 0, the learning processor unit 14 (output data, and data obtained from the sensing unit 140) can be stored.
  • the memory unit 130 is used for the operation/execution of the control unit 120. The necessary control information and/or software code can be stored.
  • the input unit 140 can acquire various types of data from the outside of the timing device 100.
  • the input unit 140 stores learning data for model learning, and input data to which the learning model is applied.
  • the input unit 140 may include a camera, a microphone and/or a user input unit.
  • the output unit 140 may generate an output related to the visual, audible or tactile sense.
  • the output unit 140 is a display unit. , A speaker and/or a haptic module, etc.
  • the sensing unit 140 can obtain at least one of internal information of the device 100, information of the peripheral environment of the device 100, and user information by using various sensors.
  • the sensing unit 140 is a proximity sensor, illuminance sensor, acceleration sensor, magnetic sensor, gyro sensor, inertial sensor, 1 36 sensor, ⁇ sensor, fingerprint recognition sensor, ultrasonic sensor, optical sensor, microphone and/or radar.
  • Learning processor unit (14) can train a model composed of an artificial neural network using the learning data.
  • the running processor unit 140 performs sea processing together with the running processor unit of the city server (Figs. 38 and 400).
  • the running processor unit 14 can process information received from an external device through the communication unit 0 and/or the information stored in the memory unit 130.
  • the running processor unit 14 can process the information stored in the memory unit 130.
  • the output value may be transmitted to an external device through the communication unit 0 and/or may be stored in the memory unit 130.
  • Embodiments as described above can be applied to various mobile communication systems.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

An embodiment relates to a signal transmission/reception method for a first terminal in a wireless communication system, the method comprising the steps of: receiving a physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH) including sidelink control information (SCI) from a second terminal; receiving a physical sidelink shared channel (PSSCH) including a reference signal on the basis of the SCI from the second terminal; measuring a channel state on the basis of the reference signal; and transmitting radio link control (RLC) layer information to the second terminal, wherein on the basis of a result of the measurement showing that the channel state has a value equal to or smaller than a threshold value, the RLC layer information includes information for triggering of an RLC automatic repeat request (ARQ) operation.

Description

2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 명세서 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Specification
발명의명칭:무선통신시스템에서신호송수신방법 및이를 수행하는장치 Name of the invention: Method for transmitting and receiving signals in a wireless communication system and apparatus for performing the same
기술분야 Technical field
[1] 이하의설명은무선통신시스템에대한것으로,보다상세하게는채널상태에 기반하여 RLC ARQ동작을트리거링하는방법및장치에대한것이다. [1] The following description is for a wireless communication system, and more specifically, a method and apparatus for triggering an RLC ARQ operation based on a channel state.
배경기술 Background
[2] 무선통신시스템이음성이나데이터등과같은다양한종류의통신서비스를 제공하기위해광범위하게전개되고있다.일반적으로무선통신시스템은 가용한시스템자원 (대역폭,전송파워등)을공유하여다중사용자와의통신을 지원할수있는다중접속 (multiple access)시스템이다.다중접속시스템의 예들로는 CDMA(code division multiple access)시스템, FDMA(frequency division multiple access)시스템, TDMA(time division multiple access)시스템, [2] Wireless communication systems are widely deployed to provide various types of communication services such as voice and data. In general, wireless communication systems share available system resources (bandwidth, transmission power, etc.) It is a multiple access system capable of supporting communication. Examples of multiple access systems include a code division multiple access (CDMA) system, a frequency division multiple access (FDMA) system, a time division multiple access (TDMA) system, and
OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access)시스템, SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access)시스템, MC-FDMA(multi carrier frequency division multiple access)시스템등이있다. OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and the like.
[3] 무선통신시스템에서는 LTE, LTE-A, WiFi등의다양한 RAT(Radio Access Technology)이사용되고있으며, 5G도여기에포함된다. 5G의세가지주요요구 사항영역은 (1)개선된모바일광대역 (Enhanced Mobile Broadband, eMBB)영역 , (2)다량의머신타입통신 (massive Machine Type Communication, mMTC)영역 및 (3)초-신뢰및저지연통신 (Ultra-reliable and Low Latency Communications, URLLC)영역을포함한다.일부사용예 (Use Case)는최적화를위해다수의 영역들이요구될수있고,다른사용예는단지하나의핵심성능지표 (Key Performance Indicator, KPI)에만포커싱될수있다. 5G는이러한다양한사용 예들을유연하고신뢰할수있는방법으로지원하는것이다. [3] In the wireless communication system, various RAT (Radio Access Technologies) such as LTE, LTE-A, and WiFi are used, and 5G is also included here. The three main requirements areas of 5G are (1) Enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) area, (2) Massive Machine Type Communication (mMTC) area, and (3) Ultra-reliability and low cost. It includes the field of Ultra-reliable and Low Latency Communications (URLLC); some use cases may require multiple domains for optimization, while others use only one key performance indicator (Key Performance). Indicator, KPI) can only be focused. 5G is to support these different use cases in a flexible and reliable way.
[4] eMBB는기본적인모바일인터넷액세스를훨씬능가하게하며,풍부한양방향 작업,클라우드또는증강현실에서미디어및엔터테인먼트애플리케이션을 커버한다.데이터는 5G의핵심동력중하나이며, 5G시대에서처음으로전용 음성서비스를볼수없을수있다. 5G에서,음성은단순히통신시스템에의해 제공되는데이터연결을사용하여응용프로그램으로서처리될것이기대된다. 증가된트래픽양 (volume)을위한주요원인들은콘텐츠크기의증가및높은 데이터전송률을요구하는애플리케이션수의증가이다.스트리밍서비스 (오디오및비디오),대화형비디오및모바일인터넷연결은더많은장치가 인터넷에연결될수록더널리사용될것이다.이러한많은응용프로그램들은 사용자에게실시간정보및알림을푸쉬하기위해항상켜져 있는연결성이 필요하다.클라우드스토리지및애플리케이션은모바일통신플랫폼에서 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 급속히증가하고있으며,이것은업무및 엔터테인먼트모두에 적용될수있다. 그리고,클라우드스토리지는상향링크데이터 전송률의성장을견인하는 특별한사용예이다. 5G는또한클라우드의 원격 업무에도사용되며,촉각 인터페이스가사용될때우수한사용자경험을유지하도록훨씬더낮은 단-대-단 (end-to-end)지연을요구한다.엔터테인먼트예를들어,클라우드게임 및비디오스트리밍은모바일광대역 능력에 대한요구를증가시키는또다른 핵심요소이다.엔터테인먼트는기차,차및비행기와같은높은이동성환경을 포함하는어떤곳에서든지스마트폰및 태블릿에서필수적이다.또다른사용 예는엔터테인먼트를위한증강현실및정보검색이다.여기서,증강현실은 매우낮은지연과순간적인데이터 양을필요로한다. [4] eMBB far surpasses basic mobile Internet access, covers rich bi-directional operations, media and entertainment applications in the cloud or augmented reality. Data is one of the core drivers of 5G, and is the first dedicated voice service in the 5G era. May not be able to see In 5G, it is expected that voice will be treated as an application simply using the data connection provided by the communication system. The main reasons for increased traffic volume are the increase in content size and the increase in the number of applications that require high data transfer rates. Streaming services (audio and video), interactive video and mobile Internet connections allow more devices to connect to the Internet. As they become more widely used, many of these applications require always-on connectivity to push real-time information and notifications to users. Cloud storage and applications are on mobile communication platforms. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 It is increasing rapidly, it can be applied to both work and entertainment. And cloud storage is a special use case that drives the growth of the uplink data rate. 5G is also used for remote work in the cloud, and requires much lower end-to-end latency to maintain a good user experience when tactile interfaces are used; entertainment e.g. cloud gaming and Video streaming is another key factor in increasing the demand for mobile broadband capabilities. Entertainment is essential for smartphones and tablets anywhere, including high mobility environments such as trains, cars, and airplanes. Another use case is entertainment. For augmented reality and information retrieval, where augmented reality requires very low latency and an instantaneous amount of data.
[5] 또한,가장많이 예상되는 5G사용예중하나는모든분야에서 임베디드 [5] Also, one of the most anticipated 5G use cases is embedded in all fields.
센서를원활하게 연결할수있는기능즉, mMTC에 관한것이다. 2020년까지 잠재적인 IoT장치들은 204억 개에 이를것으로예측된다.산업 IoT는 5G가 스마트도시,자산추적 (asset tracking),스마트유틸리티,농업 및보안인프라를 가능하게하는주요역할을수행하는영역중하나이다. It's about the ability to connect sensors seamlessly, i.e. mMTC. By 2020, the number of potential IoT devices is expected to reach 24.4 billion. Industrial IoT is one of the areas where 5G plays a major role in enabling smart cities, asset tracking, smart utilities, agriculture and security infrastructure. Is one.
[6] URLLC는주요인프라의원격 제어 및자체-구동차량 (self-driving vehicle)과 같은초신뢰 /이용가능한지연이 적은링크를통해산업을변화시킬새로운 서비스를포함한다.신뢰성과지연의수준은스마트그리드제어,산업자동화, 로봇공학,드론제어 및조정에 필수적이다. [6] URLLC includes new services that will change the industry with ultra-reliable/low-latency links such as remote control of key infrastructure and self-driving vehicles. The level of reliability and delay is Essential for smart grid control, industrial automation, robotics, and drone control and adjustment.
[7] 다음으로,다수의사용예들에 대해보다구체적으로살펴본다. [7] Next, we look at a number of usage examples in more detail.
[8] 5G는초당수백메가비트에서초당기가비트로평가되는스트림을제공하는 수단으로 FTTH (fiber-to-the-home)및케이블기반광대역 (또는 DOCSIS)을 보완할수있다.이러한빠른속도는가상현실과증강현실뿐아니라 4K 이상 (6K, 8K및그이상)의 해상도로 TV를전달하는데요구된다. VR(Virtual Reality)및 AR(Augmented Reality)애늘리케이션들은거의몰입형 (immersive) 스포츠경기를포함한다.특정응용프로그램은특별한네트워크설정이요구될 수있다.예를들어, VR게임의 경우,게임회사들이지연을최소화하기 위해 코어서버를네트워크오퍼레이터의 에지 네트워크서버와통합해야할수있다. [8] 5G can complement FTTH (fiber-to-the-home) and cable-based broadband (or DOCSIS) as a means of providing streams rated from hundreds of megabits per second to gigabits per second. These fast speeds are virtual reality. In addition to over-augmented reality, TVs are delivered with a resolution of 4K or higher (6K, 8K and higher). Virtual Reality (VR) and Augmented Reality (AR) applications include almost immersive sports events. Certain applications may require special network settings, e.g. for VR games, game companies In order to minimize these delays, the core server may need to be integrated with the network operator's edge network server.
[9] 자동차 (Automotive)는차량에 대한이동통신을위한많은사용예들과함께 5G에 있어중요한새로운동력이 될것으로예상된다.예를들어,승객을위한 엔터테인먼트는동시의높은용량과높은이동성모바일광대역을요구한다.그 이유는미래의사용자는그들의위치 및속도와관계 없이고품질의 연결을 계속해서 기대하기 때문이다.자동차분야의다른활용예는증강현실 [9] Automotive is expected to be an important new engine for 5G, with many use cases for mobile communications to vehicles. For example, entertainment for passengers is simultaneously high capacity and high mobility mobile. They demand broadband because future users will continue to expect high-quality connections regardless of their location and speed. Another example of use in the automotive sector is augmented reality.
대시보드이다.이는운전자가앞면창을통해보고있는것위에 어둠속에서 물체를식별하고,물체의거리와움직임에 대해운전자에게말해주는정보를 겹쳐서 디스플레이 한다.미래에,무선모듈은차량들간의통신,차량과 지원하는인프라구조사이에서 정보교환및자동차와다른연결된 It is a dashboard, which is superimposed on top of what the driver is looking through the front window and displays information that identifies objects in the dark and tells the driver about the distance and movement of the objects. In the future, the wireless module will enable communication between vehicles, Exchange of information between the vehicle and the supporting infrastructure and
디바이스들 (예를들어,보행자에의해수반되는디바이스들)사이에서 정보 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 교환을가능하게한다.안전시스템은운전자가보다안전한운전을할수 있도록행동의 대체코스들을안내하여사고의위험을낮출수있게한다.다음 단계는원격조종되거나자체운전차량 (self-driven vehicle)이될것이다.이는 서로다른자체운전차량들사이 및자동차와인프라사이에서 매우신뢰성이 있고,매우빠른통신을요구한다.미래에,자체운전차량이모든운전활동을 수행하고,운전자는차량자체가식별할수없는교통이상에만집중하도록할 것이다.자체운전차량의 기술적요구사항은트래픽 안전을사람이 달성할수 없을정도의수준까지증가하도록초저지연과초고속신뢰성을요구한다. Information between devices (e.g. devices carried by a pedestrian) 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Enables the exchange. The safety system allows the driver to lower the risk of accidents by guiding alternative courses of action so that the driver can drive more safely. The next step is It will be either remotely controlled or a self-driven vehicle, which requires very reliable and very fast communication between different self-driving vehicles and between the vehicle and the infrastructure. In the future, the self-driving vehicle will all drive itself. The activities will be carried out, and the driver will focus only on traffic abnormalities that the vehicle itself cannot identify. The technical requirements of self-driving vehicles require ultra-low latency and ultra-fast reliability to increase traffic safety to levels unattainable to humans. do.
[10] 스마트사회 (smart society)로서 언급되는스마트도시와스마트홈은고밀도 무선센서 네트워크로임베디드될것이다.지능형 센서의분산네트워크는도시 또는집의비용및에너지-효율적인유지에 대한조건을식별할것이다.유사한 설정이 각가정을위해수행될수있다.온도센서,창및난방컨트롤러,도난 경보기 및가전제품들은모두무선으로연결된다.이러한센서들중많은 것들이 전형적으로낮은데이터 전송속도,저전력 및저비용이다.하지만,예를 들어 ,실시간 HD비디오는감시를위해특정 타입의장치에서요구될수있다. [10] Smart cities and smart homes, referred to as smart society, will be embedded with high-density wireless sensor networks. Distributed networks of intelligent sensors will identify the cost of the city or home and the conditions for energy-efficient maintenance. Similar Settings can be done for each home. Temperature sensors, window and heating controllers, burglar alarms and appliances are all wirelessly connected. Many of these sensors typically have low data rates, low power and low cost. However, For example, real-time HD video may be required on certain types of devices for surveillance.
[11] 열또는가스를포함한에너지의소비 및분배는고도로분산화되고있어,분산 센서 네트워크의자동화된제어가요구된다.스마트그리드는정보를수집하고 이에 따라행동하도록디지털정보및통신기술을사용하여 이런센서들을상호 연결한다.이 정보는공급업체와소비자의 행동을포함할수있으므로,스마트 그리드가효율성,신뢰성,경제성,생산의지속가능성 및자동화된방식으로 전기와같은연료들의분배를개선하도록할수있다.스마트그리드는지연이 적은다른센서 네트워크로볼수도있다. [11] The consumption and distribution of energy, including heat or gas, is highly decentralized, requiring automated control of distributed sensor networks. Smart grids use digital information and communication technologies to collect information and act accordingly. Interconnecting sensors This information can include the behavior of suppliers and consumers, allowing smart grids to improve the distribution of fuels such as electricity in an efficient, reliable, economical, sustainable and automated way. The smart grid can also be viewed as another sensor network with low latency.
[12] 건강부문은이동통신의 혜택을누릴수있는많은응용프로그램을보유하고 있다.통신시스템은멀리 떨어진곳에서 임상진료를제공하는원격 진료를 지원할수있다.이는거리에 대한장벽을줄이는데도움을주고,거리가먼 농촌에서지속적으로이용하지못하는의료서비스들로의접근을개선시킬수 있다.이는또한중요한진료및응급상황에서 생명을구하기 위해사용된다. 이동통신기반의무선센서 네트워크는심박수및혈압과같은파라미터들에 대한원격모니터링 및센서들을제공할수있다. [12] The health sector has a number of applications that can benefit from mobile communications. Communication systems can support remote care providing clinical care from remote locations. This helps to reduce barriers to distance. It can improve access to medical services that are not continuously available in remote rural areas, which are also used to save lives in critical care and emergency situations. Mobile communication-based wireless sensor networks can provide sensors and remote monitoring of parameters such as heart rate and blood pressure.
[13] 무선및모바일통신은산업응용분야에서 점차중요해지고있다.배선은설치 및유지비용이높다.따라서,케이블을재구성할수있는무선링크들로의교체 가능성은많은산업분야에서 매력적인기회이다.그러나,이를달성하는것은 무선연결이 케이블과비슷한지연,신뢰성 및용량으로동작하는것과,그 관리가단순화될것이요구된다.낮은지연과매우낮은오류확률은 5G로 연결될필요가있는새로운요구사항이다. [13] Wireless and mobile communications are becoming increasingly important in industrial applications. Wiring is expensive to install and maintain. Therefore, the possibility of replacing cables with wireless links that can be reconfigured is an attractive opportunity for many industries. However, to achieve this. What is required is that the wireless connection operates with a delay, reliability and capacity similar to that of the cable, and its management will be simplified. Low latency and very low error rate are new requirements that need to be connected to 5G.
[14] 물류 (logistics)및화물주적 (freight tracking)은위치기반정보시스템을 [14] Logistics and freight tracking use a location-based information system.
사용하여 어디에서든지 인벤토리 (inventory)및패키지의주적을가능하게하는 이동통신에 대한중요한사용예이다.물류및화물추적의사용예는 2020/175955 1»(:1/10公020/002889 전형적으로낮은데이터속도를요구하지만넓은범위와신뢰성있는위치 정보가필요하다. It is an important use case for mobile communications, which enables inventory and package tracking anywhere by using Logistics and Cargo Tracking. 2020/175955 1»(:1/10公020/002889 Typically requires a low data rate, but requires a wide range and reliable location information.
[15] 무선통신시스템은가용한시스템자원 (예를들어,대역폭,전송전력등)을 공유하여다중사용자와의통신을지원하는다중접속 (multiple access) 시스템이다.다중접속시스템의 예로는 CDMA(code division multiple access) 시스템, FDMA(frequency division multiple access)시스템, TDMA(time division multiple access)시스템, OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access) 시스템, SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access)시스템, MC-FDMA(multi carrier frequency division multiple access)시스템등이있다. [15] A wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (eg, bandwidth, transmission power, etc.). An example of a multiple access system is a CDMA (code code). division multiple access) system, frequency division multiple access (FDMA) system, time division multiple access (TDMA) system, orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system, single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) system, MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.
[16] 사이드링크 (sidelink, SL)란단말 (User Equipment, UE)들간에직접적인링크를 설정하여,기지국 (Base Station, BS)을거치지않고,단말간에음성또는데이터 등을직접주고받는통신방식을말한다. SL는급속도로증가하는데이터 트래픽에따른기지국의부담을해결할수있는하나의방안으로서고려되고 있다. [16] Sidelink (SL) is a communication method that directly exchanges voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS) by establishing a direct link between terminals (User Equipment, UE). Say. SL is being considered as a solution to the burden of base stations due to the rapidly increasing data traffic.
[17] V2X(vehicle-to-everything)는유/무선통신을통해다른차량,보행자,인프라가 구축된사물등과정보를교환하는통신기술을의미한다. V2X는 [17] V2X (vehicle-to-everything) refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects on which infrastructure is built through wired/wireless communication. V2X
V2V(vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I(vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N(vehicle-to- network)및 V2P(vehicle-to-pedestrian)와같은 4가지유형으로구분될수있다. V2X통신은 PC5인터페이스및/또는 Uu인터페이스를통해제공될수있다. It can be classified into four types: vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I), vehicle-to-network (V2N), and vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P). V2X communication can be provided through PC5 interface and/or Uu interface.
[18] 한편,더욱많은통신기기들이더욱큰통신용량을요구하게됨에따라, [18] On the other hand, as more and more communication devices are demanding higher communication capacity,
기존의무선액세스기술 (Radio Access Technology, RAT)에비해향상된모바일 광대역 (mobile broadband)통신에대한필요성이대두되고있다.이에따라, 신뢰도 (reliability)및지연 (latency)에민감한서비스또는단말을고려한통신 시스템이논의되고있는데,개선된이동광대역통신,매시브 MTC(Machine Type Communication), URLLC(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication)등을 고려한차세대무선접속기술을새로운 RAT(new radio access technology)또는 NR(new radio)이라칭할수있다. NR에서도 V2X(vehicle-to-everything)통신이 지원될수있다. The need for mobile broadband communication, which is improved compared to the existing radio access technology (RAT), is emerging. Accordingly, a communication system that considers a service or terminal that is sensitive to reliability and latency. This is being discussed, and the next-generation wireless access technology considering improved mobile broadband communication, Massive MTC (Machine Type Communication), URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication), etc. will be introduced as a new RAT (new radio access technology) or NR (new radio). ). V2X (vehicle-to-everything) communication can also be supported in NR.
[19] 도 1은 NR이전의 RAT에기반한 V2X통신과 NR에기반한 V2X통신을 [19] Figure 1 shows V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.
비교하여설명하기위한도면이다. This is a drawing for comparison and explanation.
[2이 V2X통신과관련하여, NR이전의 RAT에서는 BSM(Basic Safety Message), [2 is related to V2X communication, in RAT before NR, BSM (Basic Safety Message),
CAM(Cooperative Awareness Message), DENM(Decentralized Environmental Notification Message)과같은 V2X메시지를기반으로,안전서비스 (safety service)를제공하는방안이주로논의되었다. V2X메시지는,위치정보,동적 정보,속성정보등을포함할수있다.예를들어,단말은주기적인 Based on V2X messages such as CAM (Cooperative Awareness Message) and DENM (Decentralized Environmental Notification Message), a method of providing safety service was mainly discussed. V2X messages can include location information, dynamic information, property information, etc. For example, the terminal
메시지 (periodic message)타입의 CAM,및/또는이벤트트리거메시지 (event triggered message)타입의 DENM을다른단말에게전송할수있다. CAM of the message (periodic message) type and/or DENM of the event triggered message type can be transmitted to other terminals.
[21] 예를들어 , CAM은방향및속도와같은차량의동적상태정보,치수와같은 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 차량정적데이터,외부조명상태,경로내역등기본차량정보를포함할수 있다.예를들어,단말은 CAM을방송할수있으며, CAM의지연 (latency)은 100ms보다작을수있다.예를들어,차량의고장,사고등의돌발적인상황이 발행하는경우,단말은 DENM을생성하여다른단말에게전송할수있다.예를 들어,단말의전송범위내에있는모든차량은 CAM및/또는 DENM을수신할수 있다.이경우, DENM은 CAM보다높은우선순위를가질수있다. [21] For example, the CAM provides information on the dynamic status of the vehicle such as direction and speed, and 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 It can include basic vehicle information such as vehicle static data, exterior lighting condition, route history, etc. For example, the terminal can broadcast CAM, and the CAM latency ) May be less than 100 ms. For example, in the event of a vehicle breakdown or accident, the terminal can generate a DENM and transmit it to another terminal, for example, within the transmission range of the terminal. All vehicles can receive CAM and/or DENM, in which case DENM may have a higher priority than CAM.
[22] 이후, V2X통신과관련하여 ,다양한 V2X시나리오들이 NR에서제시되고 [22] Afterwards, various V2X scenarios related to V2X communication were presented in NR.
있다.예를들어 ,다양한 V2X시나리오들은,차량플래투닝 (vehicle platooning), 향상된드라이빙 (advanced driving),확장된센서들 (extended sensors),리모트 드라이빙 (remote driving)등을포함할수있다. For example, various V2X scenarios could include vehicle platooning, advanced driving, extended sensors, remote driving, and more.
[23] 예를들어,차량플래투닝을기반으로,차량들은동적으로그룹을형성하여 함께이동할수있다.예를들어,차량플래투닝에기반한플라툰동작들 (platoon operations)을수행하기위해,상기그룹에속하는차량들은선두차량으로부터 주기적인데이터를수신할수있다.예를들어,상기그룹에속하는차량들은 주기적인데이터를이용하여 ,차량들사이의간격을줄이거나넓힐수있다. [23] For example, based on vehicle platooning, vehicles can dynamically form groups and move together. For example, to perform platoon operations based on vehicle platooning, the above Vehicles in a group can receive periodic data from leading vehicles, for example, vehicles in the group can use periodic data to reduce or widen the gap between vehicles.
[24] 예를들어,향상된드라이빙을기반으로,차량은반자동화또는완전자동화될 수있다.예를들어 ,각차량은근접차량및/또는근접로지컬엔티티 (logical entity)의로컬센서 (local sensor)에서획득된데이터를기반으로,궤도 (trajectories) 또는기동 (maneuvers)을조정할수있다.또한,예를들어 ,각차량은근접한 차량들과드라이빙인텐션 (driving intention)을상호공유할수있다. [24] For example, on the basis of improved driving, vehicles can be semi-automated or fully automated. For example, each vehicle may be located on a local sensor of a nearby vehicle and/or a nearby logical entity. Based on the acquired data, trajectories or maneuvers can be adjusted. In addition, for example, each vehicle can mutually share a driving intention with nearby vehicles.
[25] 예를들어,확장센서들을기반으로,로컬센서들을통해획득된로데이터 (raw data)또는처리된데이터 (processed data),또는라이브비디오데이터 (live video data)는차량,로지컬엔티티,보행자들의단말및/또는 V2X응용서버간에상호 교환될수있다.따라서,예를들어,차량은자체센서를이용하여감지할수있는 환경보다향상된환경을인식할수있다. [25] For example, based on extended sensors, raw data or processed data acquired through local sensors, or live video data is a vehicle, a logical entity, a pedestrian They can be interchanged between their terminals and/or the V2X application server, so, for example, a vehicle can perceive an improved environment than it can detect using its own sensors.
[26] 예를들어,리모트드라이빙을기반으로,운전을하지못하는사람또는위험한 환경에위치한리모트차량을위해,리모트드라이버또는 V2X애플리케이션은 상기리모트차량을동작또는제어할수있다.예를들어,대중교통과같이 경로를예측할수있는경우,클라우드컴퓨팅기반의드라이빙이상기리모트 차량의동작또는제어에이용될수있다.또한,예를들어,클라우드기반의 백엔드서비스늘랫픔 (cloud-based back-end service platform)에대한액세스가 리모트드라이빙을위해고려될수있다. [26] Based on remote driving, for example, for people who cannot drive or for remote vehicles located in hazardous environments, the remote driver or V2X application can operate or control the remote vehicle. For example, public transport department If the route can be predicted together, cloud computing-based driving can be used for the operation or control of the remote vehicle. In addition, for example, access to a cloud-based back-end service platform. Can be considered for remote driving.
[27] 한편,차량플래투닝,향상된드라이빙,확장된센서들,리모트드라이빙등 [27] Meanwhile, vehicle planing, improved driving, extended sensors, remote driving, etc.
다양한 V2X시나리오들에대한서비스요구사항 (service requirements)들을 구체화하는방안이 NR에기반한 V2X통신에서논의되고있다. A plan for specifying service requirements for various V2X scenarios is being discussed in V2X communication based on NR.
발명의상세한설명 Detailed description of the invention
기술적과제 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Technical task 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[28] 실시예 (들)은 RLC ARQ동작이특정조건의만족여부에따라필요한경우에만 수행되는것을기술적과제로한다. [28] The technical task of the embodiment(s) is that the RLC ARQ operation is performed only when necessary depending on whether a specific condition is satisfied.
[29] 실시예 (들)에서이루고자하는기술적과제들은이상에서언급한기술적 [29] The technical tasks to be achieved in the embodiment(s) are the technical tasks mentioned above.
과제들로제한되지않으며,언급하지않은또다른기술적과제들은아래의 기재로부터실시예 (들)이속하는기술분야에서통상의지식을가진자에게 명확하게이해될수있을것이다. Not limited to the tasks, and other technical tasks not mentioned will be clearly understood by those of ordinary skill in the technical field to which the example(s) belongs from the following description.
과제해결수단 Problem solving means
[3이 일실시예는,무선통신시스템에서제 1단말을위한신호송수신방법에 [3] In this embodiment, a method for transmitting and receiving signals for a first terminal in a wireless communication system
있어서 ,제 2단말로부터 SCI(Sidelink Control Information)를포함하는 In, including SCI (Sidelink Control Information) from the second terminal
PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)를수신하는단계 ;상기제 2단말로부터 상기 SCI에기반하여참조신호를포함하는 PSSCH((Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)를수신하는단계 ;상기참조신호를기반으로채널상태측정을 수행하는단계 ;및 RLC(Radio Link Control)계층의정보를상기제 2단말로 전송하는단계;를포함하되,상기채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인것에 기반하여 ,상기 RLC계증의정보는 RLC ARQ(Automatic Repeat reQuest)동작을 트리거링하는정보를포함하는,방법이다. Receiving a physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH); receiving a PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) including a reference signal based on the SCI from the second terminal; performing channel state measurement based on the reference signal And transmitting information of the RLC (Radio Link Control) layer to the second terminal; including, but based on that the result of the channel state measurement is less than or equal to a threshold, the RLC verification information is RLC ARQ ( Automatic Repeat reQuest) is a method, including information that triggers an action.
[31] 일실시예는,무선통신시스템에서,적어도하나의프로세서;및상기적어도 하나의프로세서에동작가능하게연결될수있고,실행될때상기적어도 하나의프로세서로하여금동작들을수행하게하는명령들을저장하는적어도 하나의컴퓨터메모리를포함하며,상기동작들은,제 2단말로부터 SCI(Sidelink Control Information)를포함하는 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)를 수신하는단계 ;상기제 2단말로부터상기 SCI에기반하여참조신호를포함하는 PSSCH((Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)를수신하는단계 ;상기참조신호를 기반으로채널상태측정을수행하는단계 ;및 RLC(Radio Link Control)계층의 정보를상기제 2단말로전송하는단계;를포함하되,상기채널상태측정의 결과가임계값이하인것에기반하여,상기 RLC계층의정보는 RLC [31] In one embodiment, in a wireless communication system, at least one processor; and the at least one processor, which can be operably connected to the at least one processor, and stores instructions for performing the operations by the at least one processor when executed. Including at least one computer memory, wherein the operations include: receiving a PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel) including SCI (Sidelink Control Information) from a second terminal; a reference signal from the second terminal based on the SCI Receiving a PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) comprising; performing channel state measurement based on the reference signal; and transmitting information of a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer to the second terminal; Including, but based on the result of the channel state measurement is less than the threshold value, the information of the RLC layer is RLC
ARQ(Automatic Repeat reQuest)동작을트리거링하는정보를포함하는,제 1 단말이다. It is a first terminal containing information for triggering an automatic repeat request (ARQ) operation.
[32] 일실시예는,적어도하나의프로세서에의해실행될때,적어도하나의 [32] One embodiment, when executed by at least one processor, at least one
프로세서가 UE를위한동작들을수행하게하는명령을포함하는적어도하나의 컴퓨터프로그램을저장하는컴퓨터판독가능저장매체에있어서,상기 동작들은,제 2단말로부터 SCI(Sidelink Control Information)를포함하는 In a computer-readable storage medium storing at least one computer program containing instructions for causing a processor to perform operations for the UE, the operations include Sidelink Control Information (SCI) from the second terminal.
PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)를수신하는단계 ;상기제 2단말로부터 상기 SCI에기반하여참조신호를포함하는 PSSCH((Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)를수신하는단계 ;상기참조신호를기반으로채널상태측정을 수행하는단계 ;및 RLC(Radio Link Control)계층의정보를상기제 2단말로 전송하는단계;를포함하되,상기채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인것에 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 기반하여 ,상기 RLC계증의정보는 RLC ARQ(Automatic Repeat reQuest)동작을 트리거링하는정보를포함하는,저장매체이다. Receiving a physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH); receiving a PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) including a reference signal based on the SCI from the second terminal; performing channel state measurement based on the reference signal And transmitting information of the RLC (Radio Link Control) layer to the second terminal; including, but the result of the channel state measurement is less than or equal to a threshold value. Based on 2020/175955 1» (: 1^1{2020/002889), the RLC inheritance information is a storage medium containing information for triggering an RLC Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) operation.
[33] 상기채널상태측정의결과가상기임계값이하인것에기반하여 ,상기제 2 단말로부터상기 RLC계증의정보에대한 ACK( Acknowledgement)또는 [33] Based on the fact that the result of the channel state measurement is less than the threshold value, ACK (Acknowledgement) for the RLC verification information from the second terminal or
NACK(Negative-ACK)정보를수신하는단계를더포함할수있다. It may further include a step of receiving NACK (Negative-ACK) information.
[34] 상기 RLC계층의정보는 RLC PDU(Protocol Data Unit)일수있다. [34] The information of the RLC layer may be an RLC Protocol Data Unit (PDU).
[35] 상기 RLC PDU는 RLC헤더 (Header)를포함할수있고,상기 RLC헤더는상기 RLC ARQ동작을트리거링하는정보를포함할수있다. [35] The RLC PDU may include an RLC header, and the RLC header may include information for triggering the RLC ARQ operation.
[36] 상기 RLC헤더는 1비트의폴링비트를포함할수있고,상기채널상태측정의 결과가임계값이하인것에기반하여,상기폴링비트는 1로설정되고,상기채널 상태측정의결과가임계값초과인것에기반하여,상기폴링비트는 0으로 설정될수있다. [36] The RLC header may include a polling bit of 1 bit, and based on that the result of the channel state measurement is less than or equal to the threshold value, the polling bit is set to 1, and the result of the channel state measurement exceeds the threshold value. Based on being, the polling bit may be set to 0.
[37] 상기채널상태측정의결과가상기임계값을초과한것에기반하여 ,상기 RLC 계층의정보는상기 RLC ARQ동작을중지하는정보를포함할수있다. Based on the result of the channel state measurement exceeding the threshold value, the information of the RLC layer may include information for stopping the RLC ARQ operation.
[38] 상기 PSSCH에대한 HARQ(Hybrid-ARQ)동작을수행하는단계를더포함할수 있다. [38] The step of performing a HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ) operation on the PSSCH may be further included.
[39] 상기채널상태측정의결과가상기임계값이하인지여부를판단하는단계를 더포함할수있다. [39] The step of determining whether the result of the channel state measurement is less than or equal to the threshold value may be further included.
[4이 상기제 1단말은다른단말,자율주행차량에관련된단말또는기지국또는 네트워크중적어도하나와통신하는단말일수있다. [4] This first terminal may be another terminal, a terminal related to an autonomous vehicle, or a terminal that communicates with at least one of a base station or a network.
발명의효과 Effects of the Invention
[41] 일실시예에의하면, RLC ARQ동작이필요한경우에만수행되도록하여 [41] According to one embodiment, the RLC ARQ operation is performed only when necessary.
사이드링크단말의시그널링오버헤드를줄이고무선자원을효율적으로 이용할수있다. The signaling overhead of the sidelink terminal can be reduced and wireless resources can be efficiently used.
[42] 실시예 (들)에서얻을수있는효과는이상에서언급한효과들로제한되지 [42] The effects that can be obtained in the example(s) are not limited to the effects mentioned above.
않으며,언급하지않은또다른효과들은아래의기재로부터실시예 (들)이 속하는기술분야에서통상의지식을가진자에게명확하게이해될수있을 것이다. In addition, other effects not mentioned can be clearly understood by those of ordinary skill in the technical field to which the embodiment(s) belongs from the following description.
도면의간단한설명 Brief description of the drawing
[43] 본명세서에첨부되는도면은실시예 (들)에대한이해를제공하기위한 [43] The drawings attached to this specification are intended to provide an understanding of the embodiment(s).
것으로서다양한실시형태들을나타내고명세서의기재와함께원리를 설명하기위한것이다. It is intended to show various embodiments and explain the principles together with the description of the specification.
[44] 도 1은 NR이전의 RAT에기반한 V2X통신과 NR에기반한 V2X통신을 1 shows V2X communication based on RAT prior to NR and V2X communication based on NR.
비교하여설명하기위한도면이다. This is a drawing for comparison and explanation.
[45] 도 2는본개시의일실시 예에따른, LTE시스템의구조를나타낸다. 2 shows the structure of an LTE system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[46] 도 3은본개시의일실시 예에따른,사용자평면 (user plane),제어평면 (control plane)에대한무선프로토콜구조 (radio protocol architecture)를나타낸다. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 3 shows a radio protocol architecture for a user plane and a control plane according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[47] 도 4는본개시의 일실시 예에따른, NR시스템의구조를나타낸다. 4 shows a structure of an NR system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[48] 도 5는본개시의 일실시 예에따른, NG-RAN과 5GC간의기능적분할을 [48] FIG. 5 illustrates functional division between NG-RAN and 5GC according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
나타낸다. Show.
[49] 도 6은실시예 (들)이 적용될수있는 NR의무선프레임의구조를나타낸다. 6 shows a structure of an NR radio frame to which the embodiment(s) can be applied.
[5이 도 7은본개시의 일실시 예에따른, NR프레임의슬롯구조를나타낸다. [5] Fig. 7 shows a slot structure of an NR frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[51] 도 8은본개시의 일실시 예에따른, SL통신을위한무선프로토콜구조 (radio protocol architecture)를나타낸다. 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[52] 도 9는본개시의 일실시 예에따른, SL통신을위한무선프로토콜구조 (radio protocol architecture)를나타낸다. 9 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[53] 도 10은본개시의 일실시 예에따른, CP타입이 NCP인경우, S-SSB의구조를 나타낸다. 10 shows a structure of an S-SSB when the CP type is NCP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[54] 도 11은본개시의 일실시 예에따른, CP타입이 ECP인경우, S-SSB의구조를 나타낸다. 11 shows a structure of an S-SSB when the CP type is ECP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[55] 도 12는본개시의 일실시 예에따른, V2X또는 SL통신을수행하는단말을 나타낸다. 12 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[56] 도 13은본개시의 일실시 예에따른, V2X또는 SL통신을위한자원단위를 나타낸다. 13 shows a resource unit for V2X or SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[57] 도 14는본개시의 일실시 예에따라,단말이 전송모드에 따라 V2X또는 SL 통신을수행하는절차를나타낸다. 14 shows a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a transmission mode according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[58] 도 15는본개시의 일실시 예에따른,세가지 캐스트타입을나타낸다. 15 shows three cast types according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[59] 도 16은본개시의 일실시 예에따른, LTE모듈과 NR모듈을포함하는단말을 나타낸다. 16 shows a terminal including an LTE module and an NR module according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[6이 도 17은본개시의 일실시 에에따른, RRC메시지의 전송절차를나타낸다. [6] Fig. 17 shows a transmission procedure of an RRC message according to an implementation of the present disclosure.
[61] 도 18는본개시의 일실시 예에따른,일방향방식의 UE능력 전달을나타낸다. 18 shows a one-way UE capability delivery according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[62] 도 19는본개시의 일실시 예에따른,양방향방식의 UE능력 전달을나타낸다. 19 shows a bidirectional UE capability delivery according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[63] 도 20는본개시의 일실시 예에따른,양방향방식의 AS계층설정을나타낸다. [63] Figure 20 shows a bidirectional AS layer setting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[64] 도 21은본개시의 일실시 예에따른,전송측물리 계층프로세싱을나타낸다. 21 shows the physical layer processing of the transmission side according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[65] 도 22는본개시의 일실시 예에따른,수신측물리 계층프로세싱을나타낸다. 22 shows the physical layer processing of the receiving side according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[66] 도 23은본개시의 일실시 예에따라, NG-RAN (Next Generation-Radio Access Network)또는 E-UTRAN에접속되는 UE에 대한측위가가능한, 5G [66] Figure 23 is, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, 5G capable of positioning for a UE connected to a Next Generation-Radio Access Network (NG-RAN) or E-UTRAN
시스템에서의 아키텍처의 일 예를나타낸다. It shows an example of the architecture in the system.
[67] 도 24는본개시의 일실시 예에따라 UE의 위치를측정하기 위한네트워크의 구현예를나타낸다. 24 shows an implementation example of a network for measuring the location of a UE according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[68] 도 25은본개시의 일실시 예에따라 LMF와 UE간의 LPP(LTE Positioning 25 is an LPP (LTE Positioning) between the LMF and the UE according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
Protocol)메시지 전송을지원하기위해사용되는프로토콜레이어의 일 예를 나타낸다. Protocol) shows an example of a protocol layer used to support message transmission.
[69] 도 26는본개시의 일실시 예에따라 LMF와 NG-RAN노드간의 NRPPa(NR Positioning Protocol A) PDU전송을지원하는데사용되는프로토콜레이어의 일 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 예를나타낸다. 26 is a diagram of a protocol layer used to support NRPPa (NR Positioning Protocol A) PDU transmission between LMF and NG-RAN nodes according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 gives an example.
P이 도 27는본개시의일실시예에따른 OTDOA(Observed Time Difference Of Fig. 27 is an OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of) according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
Arrival)측위방법을설명하기위한도면이다 This is a drawing to explain the positioning method.
R1] 도 28은본개시의일실시예에따른, V2X의동기화소스 (synchronization R1] Figure 28 is a synchronization source of V2X according to an embodiment of the present disclosure (synchronization
source)또는동기화기준 (synchronization reference)을나타낸다. source) or synchronization reference.
2] 도 29은본개시의일실시예에따른,복수의 BWP를나타낸다. 2] Fig. 29 shows a plurality of BWPs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
3] 도 30는본개시의일실시예에따른, BWP를나타낸다. 3] Fig. 30 shows a BWP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
4] 도 31은본개시의일실시예에따른, CBR측정을위한자원단위를나타낸다. 5] 도 32의 PSCCH와 PSSCH가멀티플렉싱되는경우의예시이다. 4] Fig. 31 shows a resource unit for CBR measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 5] This is an example of a case where the PSCCH and PSSCH of FIG. 32 are multiplexed.
[76] 도 33은본개시의일실시예에따른, SL에대한물리계층프로세싱을 [76] Figure 33 shows a physical layer processing for SL according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
나타낸다. Show.
刀 도 34내지도 37은실시예 (들)을설명하기위한도면이다. 34 to 37 are views for explaining the embodiment(s).
8] 도 38내지도 47은실시예 (들)이적용될수있는다양한장치를설명하는 8] Figures 38 to 47 illustrate various devices to which the embodiment(s) can be applied.
도면이다. It is a drawing.
발명의실시를위한최선의형태 Best mode for carrying out the invention
[79] 본개시의다양한실시예에서,“/”및“,”는“및/또는”을나타내는것으로 [79] In various embodiments of the present disclosure, “/” and “,” are meant to represent “and/or”
해석되어야한다.예를들어,“ A/B”는“A및/또는 B”를의미할수있다.나아가, “A, B”는“A및/또는 B”를의미할수있다.나아가,“A/B/C”는“A, B및/또는 C중 적어도어느하나”를의미할수있다.나아가,“A, B, 는“A, B및/또는 C중 적어도어느하나”를의미할수있다. It should be interpreted. For example, “A/B” can mean “A and/or B”. Further, “A, B” can mean “A and/or B”. Further, “A” /B/C" can mean "at least one of A, B and/or C". Further, "A, B," can mean "at least one of A, B and/or C".
[8이 본개시의다양한실시예에서,“또는”은“및/또는”을나타내는것으로 [8] In various embodiments of the present disclosure, "or" is meant to represent "and/or"
해석되어야한다.예를들어 ,“ A또는 는“오직 A”,“오직 B”,및/또는“A및 B 모두”를포함할수있다.다시말해,“또는”은“부가적으로또는대안적으로”를 나타내는것으로해석되어야한다. For example, “A or” may include “only A”, “only B”, and/or “both A and B.” In other words, “or” is “additionally or alternatively” It should be interpreted as representing “to”.
[81] 이하의기술은 CDMA(code division multiple access), FDMA(frequency division multiple access), TDMA(time division multiple access), OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access), SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access)등과같은다양한무선통신시스템에사용될수있다. CDMA는 UTRA(universal terrestrial radio access)나 CDMA2000과같은무선기술로구현될 수있다. TDMA는 GSM(global system for mobile communications)/GPRS(general packet radio service)/EDGE(enhanced data rates for GSM evolution)와같은무선 기술로구현될수있다. OFDMA는 IEEE(institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16(WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA(evolved UTRA)등과같은무선기술로구현될수있다. IEEE 802.16m은 IEEE 802.16e의 진화로, IEEE 802.16e에기반한시스템과의하위호환성 (backward [81] The following technologies are CDMA (code division multiple access), FDMA (frequency division multiple access), TDMA (time division multiple access), OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access), SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) ) Can be used in various wireless communication systems. CDMA can be implemented with a radio technology such as universal terrestrial radio access (UTRA) or CDMA2000. TDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as global system for mobile communications (GSM)/general packet radio service (GPRS)/enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE). OFDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as IEEE (institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, and E-UTRA (evolved UTRA). IEEE 802.16m is an evolution of IEEE 802.16e, and backward compatibility with IEEE 802.16e-based systems (backward compatibility)
compatibility)를제공한다. UTRA는 UMTS(universal mobile telecommunications system)의일부이다. 3GPP(3rd generation partnership project) LTE(long term 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 evolution)은 E-UTRA(evolved-UMT S terrestrial radio access)를사용하는 compatibility). UTRA is part of a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS). 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) long term (LTE) 2020/175955 1» (:1^1(2020/002889 evolution) is the E-UTRA (evolved-UMT S terrestrial radio access)
E-UMTS(evolved UMTS)의일부로써,하향링크에서 OFDMA를채용하고 상향링크에서 SC-FDMA를채용한다. LTE-A(advanced)는 3GPP LTE의진화이다. As a part of E-UMTS (evolved UMTS), OFDMA is employed in the downlink and SC-FDMA is employed in the uplink. LTE-A (advanced) is the evolution of 3GPP LTE.
[82] 5G NR은 LTE-A의후속기술로서 ,고성능,저지연,고가용성등의특성을 [82] 5G NR is the successor technology of LTE-A, and has features such as high performance, low latency, and high availability.
가지는새로운 Clean-slate형태의이동통신시스템이다. 5G NR은 lGHz미만의 저주파대역에서부터 miiz- LOGPiz의중간주파대역 , 24GHz이상의 Eggplant is a new clean-slate type mobile communication system. 5G NR ranges from low frequency bands of less than lGHz to mid-frequency bands of miiz-LOGPiz and over 24GHz.
고주파 (밀리미터파)대역등사용가능한모든스펙트럼자원을활용할수있다. All available spectrum resources such as high frequency (millimeter wave) bands can be utilized.
[83] 설명을명확하게하기위해 , LTE-A또는 5G NR을위주로기술하지만본 [83] For clarity, LTE-A or 5G NR is mainly described.
개시의일실시예에따른기술적사상이이에제한되는것은아니다. The technical idea according to one embodiment of the disclosure is not limited thereto.
[84] 도 2는본개시의일실시예에따른, LTE시스템의구조를나타낸다.이는 2 shows the structure of an LTE system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
E-UTRAN(Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network),또는 LTE(Long Term Evolution)/LTE-A시스템이라고불릴수있다. E-UTRAN (Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network), or LTE (Long Term Evolution) / LTE-A system may be called.
[85] 도 2를참조하면, E-UTRAN은단말 (10)에게제어평면 (control plane)과사용자 평면 (user plane)을제공하는기지국 (20)을포함한다.단말 (10)은고정되거나 이동성을가질수있으며 , MS (Mobile Station), UT(User Terminal), SS(Subscriber Station), MT(Mobile Terminal),무선기기 (Wireless Device)등다른용어로불릴수 있다.기지국 (20)은단말 (10)과통신하는고정된지점 (fixed station)을말하며 , eNB(evolved-NodeB), BTS(Base Transceiver System),액세스포인트 (Access Point) 등다른용어로불릴수있다. [85] Referring to FIG. 2, the E-UTRAN includes a base station 20 that provides a control plane and a user plane to the terminal 10. The terminal 10 is fixed or mobile. , And can be called in other terms such as MS (Mobile Station), UT (User Terminal), SS (Subscriber Station), MT (Mobile Terminal), wireless device, etc. Base station 20 is the terminal 10 ) Refers to a fixed station that communicates with, and can be called in other terms, such as eNB (evolved-NodeB), BTS (Base Transceiver System), and Access Point.
[86] 기지국 (20)들은 X2인터페이스를통하여서로연결될수있다.기지국 (20)은 S1 인터페이스를통해 EPC(Evolved Packet Core, 30),보다상세하게는 S 1-MME를 통해 MME(Mobility Management Entity)와 S1-U를통해 S-GW(Serving Gateway)와 연결된다. [86] The base stations 20 can be connected to each other through the X2 interface. The base station 20 is an EPC (Evolved Packet Core, 30) through the S1 interface, and more specifically, the Mobility Management Entity (MME) through the S 1-MME. ) And S1-U through S-GW (Serving Gateway).
[87] EPC(30)는 MME, S-GW및 P-GW(Packet Data Network-Gateway)로구성된다. [87] The EPC 30 is composed of MME, S-GW and P-GW (Packet Data Network-Gateway).
MME는단말의접속정보나단말의능력에관한정보를가지고있으며,이러한 정보는단말의이동성관리에주로사용된다. S-GW는 E-UTRAN을종단점으로 갖는게이트웨이이며 , P-GW는 PDN(Packet Date Network)을종단점으로갖는 게이트웨이이다. The MME has information about the terminal's access information or the terminal's capabilities, and this information is mainly used to manage the mobility of the terminal. S-GW is a gateway with E-UTRAN as an endpoint, and P-GW is a gateway with PDN (Packet Date Network) as an endpoint.
[88] 단말과네트워크사이의무선인터페이스프로토콜 (Radio Interface Protocol)의 계층들은통신시스템에서널리알려진개방형시스템간상호접속 (Open System Interconnection, OSI)기준모델의하위 3개계증을바탕으로 L1 (제 1계증), L2 (제 2계층), L3(제 3계층)로구분될수있다.이중에서제 1계층에속하는물리 계증은물리채널 (Physical Channel)을이용한정보전송서비스 (Information Transfer Service)를제공하며 ,제 3계증에위치하는 RRC(Radio Resource Control) 계층은단말과네트워크간에무선자원을제어하는역할을수행한다.이를위해 RRC계층은단말과기지국간 RRC메시지를교환한다. [88] The layers of the radio interface protocol between the terminal and the network are L1 (No. 1 Inheritance), L2 (layer 2), and L3 (layer 3), among which, the physical inheritance belonging to the first layer provides an information transfer service using a physical channel The RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer located in the third line plays the role of controlling radio resources between the terminal and the network. For this purpose, the RRC layer exchanges RRC messages between the terminal and the base station.
[89] 도 3(a)는본개시의일실시예에따른,사용자평면 (user plane)에대한무선 [89] Fig. 3(a) is a wireless device for a user plane according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
프로토콜구조 (radio protocol architecture)를나타낸다. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Represents the radio protocol architecture. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[9이 도 3(b)은본개시의일실시예에따른,제어평면 (control plane)에대한무선 프로토콜구조를나타낸다.사용자평면은사용자데이터전송을위한프로토콜 스택 (protocol stack)이고,제어평면은제어신호전송을위한프로토콜스택이다. [9] Fig. 3(b) shows a wireless protocol structure for a control plane according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The user plane is a protocol stack for transmitting user data, and the control plane is It is a protocol stack for transmission of control signals.
[91] 도 3(a)및 A3을참조하면,물리계층 (physical layer)은물리채널을이용하여 상위계층에게정보전송서비스를제공한다.물리계층은상위계층인 3(a) and A3, the physical layer provides an information transmission service to an upper layer using a physical channel. The physical layer is a higher layer, which is a higher layer.
MAC(Medium Access Control)계증과는전송채널 (transport channel)을통해 연결되어 있다.전송채널을통해 MAC계층과물리계층사이로데이터가 이동한다.전송채널은무선인터페이스를통해데이터가어떻게어떤특징으로 전송되는가에따라분류된다. It is connected to the MAC (Medium Access Control) system through a transport channel. Data moves between the MAC layer and the physical layer through the transport channel. The transport channel transmits data through a wireless interface, with how and with what characteristics. It is classified according to whether or not.
[92] 서로다른물리계층사이,즉송신기와수신기의물리계층사이는물리채널을 통해데이터가이동한다.상기물리채널은 OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)방식으로변조될수있고,시간과주파수를무선자원으로 활용한다. [92] Data is transferred through a physical channel between different physical layers, i.e. between the physical layers of the transmitter and the receiver. The physical channel can be modulated by the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) method, and time and frequency are radio resources. Use it as.
[93] MAC계층은논리채널 (logical channel)을통해상위계층인 RLC(radio link control)계층에게서비스를제공한다. MAC계층은복수의논리채널에서복수의 전송채널로의맵핑기능을제공한다.또한, MAC계층은복수의논리채널에서 단수의전송채널로의맵핑에의한논리채널다중화기능을제공한다. MAC부 계층은논리채널상의데이터전송서비스를제공한다. [93] The MAC layer provides a service to the upper layer, the radio link control (RLC) layer, through a logical channel. The MAC layer provides a mapping function from a plurality of logical channels to a plurality of transport channels, and the MAC layer provides a logical channel multiplexing function by mapping from a plurality of logical channels to a single transmission channel. The MAC layer provides a data transmission service on a logical channel.
[94] RLC계증은 RLC SDU(Serving Data Unit)의연결 (concatenation), [94] RLC inheritance is the concatenation of RLC Serving Data Unit (SDU),
분할 (segmentation)및재결합 (reassembly)을수행한다.무선베어러 (Radio Bearer, RB)가요구하는다양한 QoS(Quality of Service)를보장하기위해, RLC계층은 투명모드 (Transparent Mode, TM),비확인모드 (Unacknowledged Mode, UM)및 확인모드 (Acknowledged Mode, AM)의세가지의동작모드를제공한다. AM RLC는 ARQ(automatic repeat request)를통해오류정정을제공한다. Segmentation and reassembly are performed To ensure various QoS (Quality of Service) required by Radio Bearer (RB), RLC layer is in Transparent Mode (TM), Non-Confirmed Mode It provides three operating modes: (Unacknowledged Mode, UM) and Acknowledged Mode (AM). AM RLC provides error correction through automatic repeat request (ARQ).
[95] RRC(Radio Resource Control)계층은제어평면에서만정의된다. RRC계층은 무선베어러들의설정 (configuration),재설정 (re-configuration)및해제 (release)와 관련되어논리채널,전송채널및물리채널들의제어를담당한다 . RB는단말과 네트워크간의데이터전달을위해제 1계층 (physical계층또는 PHY계층)및제 2계증 (MAC계증, RLC계증, PDCP(Packet Data Convergence Protocol)계증)에 의해제공되는논리적경로를의미한다. [95] The Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer is defined only in the control plane. The RRC layer is in charge of controlling the logical channels, transport channels and physical channels in relation to the configuration, re-configuration, and release of radio bearers. RB refers to the logical path provided by the first layer (physical layer or PHY layer) and the second layer (MAC verification, RLC verification, PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) verification) for data transfer between the terminal and the network.
[96] 사용자평면에서의 PDCP계층의기능은사용자데이터의전달,헤더 [96] The function of the PDCP layer in the user plane is the transmission of user data and the header
압죽 (header compression)및암호화 (ciphering)를포함한다.제어평면에서의 PDCP계층의기능은제어평면데이터의전달및암호화/무결성보호 (integrity protection)를포함한다. Includes header compression and ciphering The functions of the PDCP layer in the control plane include the transfer of control plane data and encryption/integrity protection.
[97] RB가설정된다는것은특정서비스를제공하기위해무선프로토콜계층및 채널의특성을규정하고,각각의구체적인파라미터및동작방법을설정하는 과정을의미한다. RB는다시 SRB(Signaling Radio Bearer)와 DRB(Data Radio Bearer)두가지로나누어질수있다. SRB는제어평면에서 RRC메시지를 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 전송하는통로로사용되며, DRB는사용자평면에서사용자데이터를전송하는 통로로사용된다. [97] Setting the RB means the process of defining the characteristics of the wireless protocol layer and channel to provide a specific service, and setting specific parameters and operation methods for each. RB can be further divided into two types, SRB (Signaling Radio Bearer) and DRB (Data Radio Bearer). SRB sends RRC messages in the control plane. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 It is used as a transmission path, and DRB is used as a path for transmitting user data in the user plane.
[98] 단말의 RRC계층과 E-UTRAN의 RRC계층사이에 RRC연결 (RRC [98] RRC connection between the RRC layer of the terminal and the RRC layer of the E-UTRAN (RRC
connection)이확립되면,단말은 RRC_CONNECTED상태에있게되고,그렇지 못할경우 RRCJDLE상태에있게된다. NR의경우, RRCJNACTIVE상태가 추가로정의되었으며 , RRCJNACTIVE상태의단말은코어네트워크와의 연결을유지하는반면기지국과의연결을해지 (release)할수있다. connection) is established, the terminal is in RRC_CONNECTED state, otherwise it is in RRCJDLE state. In the case of NR, the RRCJNACTIVE state is additionally defined, and the terminal in the RRCJNACTIVE state can release the connection with the base station while maintaining the connection with the core network.
[99] 네트워크에서단말로데이터를전송하는하향링크전송채널로는시스템 [99] Downlink transmission channel for data transmission from network to terminal
정보를전송하는 BCH(Broadcast Channel)과그이외에사용자트래픽이나제어 메시지를전송하는하향링크 SCH(Shared Channel)이있다.하향링크멀티캐스트 또는브로드캐스트서비스의트래픽또는제어메시지의경우하향링크 SCH를 통해전송될수도있고,또는별도의하향링크 MCH(Multicast Channel)을통해 전송될수도있다.한편,단말에서네트워크로데이터를전송하는상향링크전송 채널로는초기제어메시지를전송하는 RACH(Random Access Channel)와그 이외에사용자트래픽이나제어메시지를전송하는상향링크 SCH(Shared Channel)가있다. In addition to the BCH (Broadcast Channel) that transmits information, there is a downlink SCH (Shared Channel) that transmits user traffic or control messages. In the case of downlink multicast or broadcast service traffic or control messages, the downlink SCH is used. On the other hand, the uplink transmission channel that transmits data from the terminal to the network is the RACH (Random Access Channel) that transmits the initial control message and other user traffic. There is an uplink shared channel (SCH) that transmits or control messages.
[100] 전송채널상위에있으며 ,전송채널에맵핑되는논리채널 (Logical [100] A logical channel that is above the transmission channel and is mapped to the transmission channel (Logical
Channel)로는 BCCH(Broadcast Control Channel), PCCH(Paging Control Channel), CCCH(Common Control Channel), MCCH(Multicast Control Channel), Channel) includes BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel), PCCH (Paging Control Channel), CCCH (Common Control Channel), MCCH (Multicast Control Channel),
MTCH(Multicast Traffic Channel)등이있다. There are MTCH (Multicast Traffic Channel).
[101] 물리채널 (Physical Channel)은시간영역에서여러개의 OFDM심벌과주파수 영역에서여러개의부반송파 (sub-carrier)로구성된다.하나의 [101] A physical channel consists of several OFDM symbols in the time domain and several sub-carriers in the frequency domain.
서브프레임 (sub-frame)은시간영역에서복수의 OFDM심벌 (symbol)들로 구성된다.자원블록은자원할당단위로,복수의 OFDM심벌들과복수의 부반송파 (sub-carrier)들로구성된다.또한각서브프레임은 PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel)즉, L1/L2제어채널을위해해당서브프레임의특정 OFDM심벌들 (예,첫번째 OFDM심볼)의특정부반송파들을이용할수있다. TTI(Transmission Time Interval)는서브프레임전송의단위시간이다. A sub-frame is composed of a plurality of OFDM symbols in a time domain. A resource block is a resource allocation unit, and is composed of a plurality of OFDM symbols and a plurality of sub-carriers. In addition, each subframe can use specific government carriers of specific OFDM symbols (eg, the first OFDM symbol) of the corresponding subframe for the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel), that is, the L1/L2 control channel. TTI (Transmission Time Interval) is a unit time of subframe transmission.
[102] 도 4는본개시의일실시예에따른, NR시스템의구조를나타낸다. 4 shows a structure of an NR system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[103] 도 4를참조하면, NG-RAN(Next Generation Radio Access Network)은단말에게 사용자평면및제어평면프로토콜종단 (termination)을제공하는 gNB(next generation-Node B)및/또는 eNB를포함할수있다.도 4에서는 gNB만을포함하는 경우를예시한다. gNB및 eNB는상호간에 Xn인터페이스로연결되어있다. gNB및 eNB는 5세대코어네트워크 (5G Core Network: 5GC)와 NG인터페이스를 통해연결되어있다.보다구체적으로, AMF(access and mobility management function)과는 NG-C인터페이스를통해연결되고, UPF(user plane function)과는 NG-U인터페이스를통해연결된다. [103] Referring to FIG. 4, a Next Generation Radio Access Network (NG-RAN) may include a next generation-Node B (gNB) and/or an eNB that provides a terminal with a user plane and a control plane protocol termination. In FIG. 4, a case where only gNB is included is illustrated. The gNB and the eNB are connected to each other through an Xn interface. The gNB and the eNB are connected to the 5th generation core network (5G Core Network: 5GC) through the NG interface. More specifically, the access and mobility management function (AMF) is connected through the NG-C interface, and the UPF (user plane function) is connected through the NG-U interface.
[104] 도 5는본개시의일실시예에따른, NG-RAN과 5GC간의기능적분할을 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 나타낸다. 5 illustrates functional division between NG-RAN and 5GC according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 2020/175955 1» (:1^1{2020/002889 indicates.
[105] 도 5를참조하면, gNB는인터셀간의무선자원관리 (Inter Cell RRM),무선 [105] Referring to Figure 5, the gNB is a wireless resource management (Inter Cell RRM), a wireless
베어러관리 (RB control),연결이동성제어 (Connection Mobility Con仕 ol),무선 허용제어 (Radio Admission Con仕 ol),즉정설정및제공 (Measurement configuration & Provision),동적자원할당 (dynamic resource allocation)등의기능을제공할수 있다. AMF는 NAS(Non Access Stratum)보안,아이들상태이동성처리등의 기능을제공할수있다. UPF는이동성앵커링 (Mobility Anchoring), PDU(Protocol Data Unit)처리등의기능을제공할수있다. SMF(Session Management Bearer management (RB control), connection mobility control (Connection Mobility Control), radio admission control (Radio Admission Control), immediate setting and provision (Measurement configuration & Provision), dynamic resource allocation (dynamic resource allocation), etc. Function can be provided. AMF can provide functions such as NAS (Non Access Stratum) security and idle state mobility processing. UPF can provide functions such as mobility anchoring and PDU (Protocol Data Unit) processing. SMF(Session Management
Function)는단말 IP(Internet Protocol)주소할당, PDU세션제어등의기능을 제공할수있다. Function) can provide functions such as terminal IP (Internet Protocol) address allocation and PDU session control.
[106] 도 6은본발명이적용될수있는 NR의무선프레임의구조를나타낸다. 6 shows the structure of an NR wireless frame to which the present invention can be applied.
[107] 도 6을참조하면, NR에서상향링크및하향링크전송에서무선프레임을 [107] Referring to FIG. 6, radio frames are transmitted in uplink and downlink transmission in NR.
사용할수있다.무선프레임은 Wms의길이를가지며, 2개의 5ms The wireless frame has a length of Wms, and two 5ms
하프-프레임 (Half-Frame, HF)으로정의될수있다.하프-프레임은 5개의 1ms 서브프레임 (Subframe, SF)을포함할수있다.서브프레임은하나이상의 슬롯으로분할될수있으며,서브프레임내슬롯개수는부반송파 Can be defined as half-frame (HF) Half-frame can contain 5 1ms subframes (Subframe, SF) Subframe can be divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in the subframe Is subcarrier
간격 (Subcarrier Spacing, SCS)에따라결정될수있다.각슬롯은 CP(cyclic prefix)에따라 12개또는 14개의 OFDM(A)심볼을포함할수있다. It can be determined according to the interval (Subcarrier Spacing, SCS). Each slot can contain 12 or 14 OFDM(A) symbols according to CP (cyclic prefix).
[108] 노멀 CP(normal CP)가사용되는경우,각슬롯은 14개의심볼을포함할수있다. 확장 CP가사용되는경우,각슬롯은 12개의심볼을포함할수있다.여기서 , 심볼은 OFDM심볼 (또는, CP-OFDM심볼), SC-FDMA심볼 (또는, DFT-s-OFDM 심볼)을포함할수있다. [108] When normal CP (normal CP) is used, each slot can contain 14 symbols. When extended CP is used, each slot may include 12 symbols, where the symbol may include an OFDM symbol (or CP-OFDM symbol), an SC-FDMA symbol (or DFT-s-OFDM symbol). have.
[109] 다음표 1은노멀 CP가사용되는경우, SCS설정 (山에따라슬롯별심볼의 [109] Table 1 below shows the SCS setting (according to the
개수 ( N slot ),프레임별슬롯의개수 ( Number ( N slot ), number of slots per frame (
1 symbol v/ )와서브프레임별슬롯의개수 ( slot 1 symbol v/) and the number of slots per subframe (slot
subframe, 를예시한다. subframe, is shown.
丄、 slot 丄、 slot
[11이 [표 1] [11] [Table 1]
Figure imgf000015_0001
Figure imgf000015_0001
[111] 표 2는확장 05가사용되는경우, 808에따라슬롯별심볼의개수,프레임별 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 슬롯의개수와서브프레임별슬롯의개수를예시한다. [111] Table 2 shows the number of symbols per slot and per frame according to 808 when extension 0 5 is used. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Shows the number of slots and the number of slots per subframe.
[112] [표 2]
Figure imgf000016_0001
[112] [Table 2]
Figure imgf000016_0001
[113] NR시스템에서는하나의단말에게병합되는복수의셀들간에 OFDM(A) [113] In the NR system, OFDM(A) between a plurality of cells merged into one terminal
뉴머놀로지 (numerology) (예, SCS, CP길이등)가상이하게설정될수있다.이에 따라,동일한개수의심볼로구성된시간자원 (예 ,서브프레임 ,슬롯또는 Numerology (e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.) can be set differently; accordingly, a time resource consisting of the same number of symbols (e.g., subframe, slot or
TTI) (편의상, TU(Time Unit)로통칭 )의 (절대시간)구간이병합된셀들간에 상이하게설정될수있다. TTI) (for convenience, the (absolute time) section of (collectively referred to as TU (Time Unit)) may be set differently between the merged cells.
[114] NR에서 ,다양한 5G서비스들을지원하기위한다수의뉴머놀로지 (numerology) 또는 SCS가지원될수있다.예를들어, SCS가 15kHz인경우,전통적인셀룰러 밴드들에서의넓은영역 (wide area)이지원될수있고, SCS가 30kHz/60mz인 경우,밀집한-도시 (dense-urban),더낮은지연 (lower latency)및더넓은캐리어 대역폭 (wider carrier bandwidth)이지원될수있다. SCS가 60kHz또는그보다높은 경우,위상잡음 (phase noise)을극복하기위해 24.25GPiz보다큰대역폭이지원될 수있다. [114] In NR, a number of numerology or SCS can be supported to support various 5G services. For example, if the SCS is 15 kHz, a wide area in traditional cellular bands is supported. If the SCS is 30kHz/60mz, dense-urban, lower latency and wider carrier bandwidth can be supported. If the SCS is 60kHz or higher, a bandwidth greater than 24.25GPiz can be supported to overcome the phase noise.
[115] NR주파수밴드 (frequency band)는두가지타입의주파수범위 (frequency [115] NR frequency band (frequency band) is two types of frequency range (frequency
range)로정의될수있다.상기두가지타입의주파수범위는 FR1및 FR2일수 있다.주파수범위의수치는변경될수있으며,예를들어,상기두가지타입의 주파수범위는하기표 3과같을수있다. NR시스템에서사용되는주파수범위 중 FR1은“sub 6GHz range”를의미할수있고, FR2는“above 6GHz range”를 의미할수있고밀리미터웨이브 (millimeter wave, mmW)로불릴수있다. The frequency range of the above two types can be FR1 and FR2. The numerical value of the frequency range can be changed, for example, the frequency range of the above two types can be as shown in Table 3 below. Among the frequency ranges used in the NR system, FR1 can mean “sub 6GHz range” and FR2 can mean “above 6GHz range” and can be called millimeter wave (mmW).
[116] [표 3]
Figure imgf000016_0002
[116] [Table 3]
Figure imgf000016_0002
[117] 상술한바와같이, NR시스템의주파수범위의수치는변경될수있다.예를 들어, FR1은하기표 4와같이 410MHz내지기 25MHz의대역을포함할수있다. 즉, FR1은 6GHz (또는 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz등)이상의주파수대역을포함할수 있다.예를들어 , FR1내에서포함되는 6GHz (또는 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz등) 이상의주파수대역은비면허대역 (unlicensed band)을포함할수있다.비면허 대역은다양한용도로사용될수있고,예를들어차량을위한통신 (예를들어, 자율주행)을위해사용될수있다. [117] As described above, the value of the frequency range of the NR system can be changed. For example, FR1 may include a band of 410MHz to 25MHz as shown in Table 4 below. In other words, FR1 may include a frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher. For example, a frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher included in FR1 is an unlicensed band ( Unlicensed bands can be used for a variety of purposes, e.g. for communication for vehicles (e.g. autonomous driving).
[118] [표 4]
Figure imgf000016_0003
2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[118] [Table 4]
Figure imgf000016_0003
2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[119] 도 7은본개시의일실시예에따른, NR프레임의슬롯구조를나타낸다. 7 shows a slot structure of an NR frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[120] 도 7을참조하면,슬롯은시간영역에서복수의심볼들을포함한다.예를들어, 노멀 모의경우하나의슬롯이 14개의심볼을포함하나,확장 CP의경우하나의 슬롯이 12개의심볼을포함할수있다.또는노멀 CP의경우하나의슬롯이 Referring to Fig. 7, a slot includes a plurality of symbols in the time domain. For example, in the case of a normal simulation, one slot includes 14 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot includes 12 symbols. Or, for normal CP, one slot is
7개의심볼을포함하나,확장 CP의경우하나의슬롯이 6개의심볼을포함할수 있다. It contains 7 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot can contain 6 symbols.
[121] 반송파는주파수영역에서복수의부반송파들을포함한다. RB(Resource [121] A carrier includes a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain. RB(Resource
Block)는주파수영역에서복수 (예를들어, 12)의연속한부반송파로정의될수 있다. BWP(Bandwidth Part)는주파수영역에서복수의연속한 (P)RB((Physical) Resource Block)로정의될수있으며,하나의뉴머놀로지 (numerology) (예, SCS, Block) can be defined as a plurality of (eg, 12) consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. BWP (Bandwidth Part) can be defined as a plurality of consecutive (P)RBs ((Physical) Resource Blocks) in the frequency domain, and one numerology (e.g., SCS,
CP길이등)에대응될수있다.반송파는최대 N개 (예를들어, 5개)의 BWP를 포함할수있다.데이터통신은활성화된 BWP를통해서수행될수있다.각각의 요소는자원그리드에서자원요소 (Resource Element, RE)로지칭될수있고, 하나의복소심볼이맵핑될수있다. CP length, etc.) A carrier can contain up to N (e.g. 5) BWPs. Data communication can be carried out through an active BWP. Each element is a resource element in the resource grid. It can be referred to as (Resource Element, RE), and one complex symbol can be mapped.
[122] 한편,단말과단말간무선인터페이스또는단말과네트워크간무선 [122] On the other hand, a terminal-to-terminal wireless interface or a terminal-to-network wireless interface
인터페이스는 L1계층, L2계층및 L3계층으로구성될수있다.본개시의 다양한실시예에서 , L1계층은물리 (physical)계층을의미할수있다.또한,예를 들어, L2계층은 MAC계층, RLC계층, PDCP계층및 SDAP계층중적어도 하나를의미할수있다.또한,예를들어, L3계층은 RRC계층을의미할수있다. The interface may be composed of the L1 layer, the L2 layer, and the L3 layer. In various embodiments of the present disclosure, the L1 layer may refer to the physical layer. Also, for example, the L2 layer is the MAC layer, the RLC layer. , PDCP layer, and SDAP layer can mean at least one layer. Also, for example, L3 layer can mean RRC layer.
[123] 이하, V2X또는 SL(sidelink)통신에대하여설명한다. [123] Hereinafter, V2X or SL (sidelink) communication will be described.
[124] 도 8은본개시의일실시예에따른, SL통신을위한무선프로토콜구조 (radio protocol architecture)를나타낸다.구체적으로,도 8의 (a)는 LTE의사용자평면 프로토콜스택을나타내고,도 8의 (b)는 LTE의제어평면프로토콜스택을 나타낸다. 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Specifically, FIG. 8A shows a user plane protocol stack of LTE, and FIG. 8 (B) of shows the LTE control plane protocol stack.
[125] 도 9는본개시의일실시예에따른, SL통신을위한무선프로토콜구조 (radio protocol architecture)를나타낸다.구체적으로,도 9의 (a)는 NR의사용자평면 프로토콜스택을나타내고,도 9의 (b)는 NR의제어평면프로토콜스택을 나타낸다. 9 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Specifically, FIG. 9A shows a user plane protocol stack of NR, and FIG. 9 (B) of the NR shows the control plane protocol stack.
[126] 이하, SL동기신호 (Sidelink Synchronization Signal, SLSS)및동기화정보어! 대해설명한다. [126] Hereinafter, Sidelink Synchronization Signal (SLSS) and synchronization information! Explain about it.
[127] SLSS는 SL특정적인시퀀스 (sequence)로, PSSS (Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)와 SSSS(Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)를포함할수있다.상기 PSSS는 S-PSS(Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal)라고칭할수있고,상기 SSSS는 S-SSS(Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal)라고칭할수있다.여]를 들어,길이- 127 M-시퀀스 (leng比!- 127 M-sequences)가 S-PSS에대하여사용될수 있고,길이- 127골드-시퀀스 (length- 127 Gold sequences)가 S-SSS에대하여사용될 수있다.예를들어,단말은 S-PSS를이용하여최초신호를검출 (signal detection)할수있고,동기를획득할수있다.예를들어 ,단말은 S-PSS및 S-SSS를 2020/175955 1»(:1/10公020/002889 이용하여세부동기를획득할수있고,동기신히 D를검출할수있다. [127] SLSS is an SL-specific sequence, and may include PSSS (Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal) and SSSS (Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal). The PSSS can be referred to as S-PSS (Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal). , The SSSS may be referred to as S-SSS (Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal). F] For example, length-127 M-sequences (leng- 127 M-sequences) may be used for S-PSS, and length -127 gold-sequences (length-127 Gold sequences) can be used for S-SSS, e.g. the terminal can use S-PSS to detect the initial signal and acquire synchronization For example, the terminal uses S-PSS and S-SSS. By using 2020/175955 1»(:1/10公020/002889, you can acquire detailed synchronization, and synchronously detect D.
[128] PSBCH(Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel)는 SL신호송수신전에단말이 가장먼저알아야하는기본이되는 (시스템)정보가전송되는 (방송)채널일수 있다.예를들어,상기기본이되는정보는 SLSS에관련된정보,듀플렉스 모드 (Duplex Mode, DM), TDD UL/DL(Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) 구성,리소스풀관련정보, SLSS에관련된애플리케이션의종류,서브프레임 오프셋,방송정보등일수있다.예를들어, PSBCH성능의평가를위해, NR V2X에서, PSBCH의페이로드크기는 24비트의 CRC를포함하여 56비트일수 있다. [128] The PSBCH (Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel) may be a (broadcast) channel through which basic (system) information that the terminal needs to know first before transmitting and receiving SL signals is transmitted. For example, the basic information is in SLSS. Related information, Duplex Mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, SLSS related application type, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc. For example, for the evaluation of PSBCH performance, in NR V2X, the payload size of the PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC.
[129] S-PSS, S-SSS및 PSBCH는주기적전송을지원하는블록포맷 (예를들어, SL SS(Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH블록,이하 S-SSB(Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block))에포함될수있다.상기 S-SSB는캐리어내의 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)와동일한 뉴머놀로지 (즉, SCS및 CP길이)를가질수있고,전송대역폭은 (미리)설정된 SL BWP(Sidelink BWP)내에 있을수있다.예를들어 , S-SSB의대역폭은 11 RB(Resource Block)일수있다.예를들어, PSBCH는 11 RB에걸쳐있을수있다. 그리고, S-SSB의주파수위치는 (미리)설정될수있다.따라서,단말은 캐리어에서 S-SSB를발견하기위해주파수에서가설검출 (hypothesis detection)을수행할필요가없다. [129] S-PSS, S-SSS, and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (eg, SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)). The S-SSB may have the same neurology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in the carrier, and the transmission bandwidth is (pre-)set SL BWP. (Sidelink BWP), for example, the bandwidth of S-SSB could be 11 RB (Resource Block), for example, PSBCH could span 11 RBs. And, the frequency position of the S-SSB can be set (in advance). Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection at the frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.
[13이 한편, NR SL시스템에서 ,서로다른 SCS및/또는 CP길이를가지는복수의 뉴머놀로지가지원될수있다.이때, SCS가증가함에따라서,전송단말이 S-SSB를전송하는시간자원의길이가짧아질수있다.이에따라, S-SSB의 커버리지 (coverage)가감소할수있다.따라서 , S-SSB의커버리지를보장하기 위하여,전송단말은 SCS에따라하나의 S-SSB전송주기내에서하나이상의 S-SSB를수신단말에게전송할수있다.예를들어,전송단말이하나의 S-SSB 전송주기내에서수신단말에게전송하는 S-SSB의개수는전송단말에게 사전에설정되거나 (pre-configured),설정 (configured)될수있다.예를들어, S-SSB 전송주기는 160ms일수있다.예를들어,모든 SCS에대하여, 160ms의 S-SSB 전송주기가지원될수있다. [13 On the other hand, in the NR SL system, a plurality of neurons having different SCS and/or CP lengths can be supported. At this time, as the SCS increases, the length of the time resource for the transmission terminal to transmit the S-SSB is Accordingly, the coverage of the S-SSB can be reduced. Therefore, in order to ensure the coverage of the S-SSB, the transmitting terminal can be used for one or more S-SSBs within one S-SSB transmission period according to the SCS. SSBs can be transmitted to the receiving terminal; for example, the number of S-SSBs that the transmitting terminal transmits to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period is pre-configured (pre-configured) or configured in the transmitting terminal. For example, the S-SSB transmission period may be 160 ms. For example, for all SCS, an S-SSB transmission period of 160 ms may be supported.
[131] 예를들어, SCS가 FR1에서 15kHz인경우,전송단말은하나의 S-SSB전송주기 내에서수신단말에게 1개또는 2개의 S-SSB를전송할수있다.예를들어, SCS가 FR1에서 30kPiz인경우,전송단말은하나의 S-SSB전송주기내에서수신 단말에게 1개또는 2개의 S-SSB를전송할수있다.예를들어, SCS가 FR1에서 60kHz인경우,전송단말은하나의 S-SSB전송주기내에서수신단말에게 1개, [131] For example, if the SCS is 15 kHz in FR1, the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, the SCS is FR1. In the case of 30kPiz, the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, when the SCS is 60kHz in FR1, the transmitting terminal can transmit one 1 to the receiving terminal within the S-SSB transmission period,
2개또는 4개의 S-SSB를전송할수있다. You can transmit 2 or 4 S-SSBs.
[132] 예를들어, SCS가 FR2에서 60kPiz인경우,전송단말은하나의 S-SSB전송주기 내에서수신단말에게 1개, 2개, 4개, 8개, 16개또는 32개의 S-SSB를전송할수 있다.예를들어, SCS가 FR2에서 120kHz인경우,전송단말은하나의 S-SSB전송 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 주기내에서수신단말에게 1개, 2개, 4개, 8개, 16개, 32개또는 64개의 S-SSB를 전송할수있다. [132] For example, if the SCS is 60kPiz in FR2, the transmitting terminal is 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, if the SCS is 120 kHz in FR2, the transmitting terminal transmits one S-SSB. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 It is possible to transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 or 64 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within a period of 1^1{2020/002889.
[133] 한편, SCS가 60kHz인경우,두가지타입의 CP가지원될수있다.또한, CP 타입에따라서전송단말이수신단말에게전송하는 S-SSB의구조가상이할수 있다.예를들어,상기 CP타입은 Normal CP(NCP)또는 Extended CP(ECP)일수 있다.구체적으로,예를들어, CP타입이 NCP인경우,전송단말이전송하는 S-SSB내에서 PSBCH를맵핑하는심볼의개수는 9개또는 8개일수있다.반면, 예를들어, CP타입이 ECP인경우,전송단말이전송하는 S-SSB내에서 On the other hand, when the SCS is 60 kHz, two types of CP can be supported. In addition, the structure of the S-SSB transmitted from the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal may be different depending on the CP type. For example, the CP type. The type may be Normal CP (NCP) or Extended CP (ECP). Specifically, for example, when the CP type is NCP, the number of symbols for mapping PSBCH in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal is 9 Or it can be 8. On the other hand, for example, if the CP type is ECP, in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal
PSBCH를맵핑하는심볼의개수는 7개또는 6개일수있다.예를들어,전송 단말이전송하는 S-SSB내의첫번째심볼에는, PSBCH가맵핑될수있다.예를 들어, S-SSB를수신하는수신단말은 S-SSB의첫번째심볼구간에서 The number of symbols for mapping the PSBCH may be 7 or 6. For example, in the first symbol in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal, the PSBCH may be mapped. For example, the receiving signal receiving the S-SSB may be mapped. The terminal is in the first symbol section of the S-SSB.
AGC(Automatic Gain Control)동작을수행할수있다. AGC (Automatic Gain Control) operation can be performed.
[134] 도 10은본개시의일실시예에따른, CP타입이 NCP인경우, S-SSB의구조를 나타낸다. 10 shows a structure of an S-SSB when the CP type is NCP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[135] 예를들어, CP타입이 NCP인경우, S-SSB의구조,즉,전송단말이전송하는 S-SSB내에 S-PSS, S-SSS및 PSBCH가맵핑되는심볼들의순서는도 10을참조할 수있다. [135] For example, when the CP type is NCP, the structure of the S-SSB, that is, the order of the symbols in which the S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH are mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal is shown in FIG. Can refer to
[136] 도 11은본개시의일실시예에따른, CP타입이 ECP인경우, S-SSB의구조를 나타낸다. 11 shows the structure of an S-SSB when the CP type is ECP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[137] 예를들어, CP타입이 ECP인경우,도 10과달리,전송단말이 S-SSB내에서 S-SSS이후에 PSBCH를맵핑하는심볼의개수가 6개일수있다.따라서, CP 타입이 NCP또는 ECP인지여부에따라 S-SSB의커버리지가상이할수있다. [137] For example, when the CP type is ECP, unlike FIG. 10, the number of symbols for which the transmitting terminal maps the PSBCH after the S-SSS in the S-SSB may be 6. Therefore, the CP type is Depending on whether it is NCP or ECP, the coverage of S-SSB may vary.
[138] 한편,각각의 SLSS는 SL동기화식별자 (Sidelink Synchronization Identifier, SLSS ID)를가질수있다. [138] Meanwhile, each SLSS may have a Sidelink Synchronization Identifier (SLSS ID).
[139] 예를들어, LTE SL또는 LTE V2X의경우, 2개의서로다른 S-PSS시퀀스와 168개의서로다른 S-SSS시퀀스의조합을기반으로, SLSS ID의값이정의될수 있다.예를들어, SLSS ID의개수는 336개일수있다.예를들어, SLSS ID의값은 0내지 335중어느하나일수있다. [139] For example, in the case of LTE SL or LTE V2X, the value of SLSS ID may be defined based on a combination of two different S-PSS sequences and 168 different S-SSS sequences. For example, The number of SLSS IDs can be 336, for example, the value of SLSS ID can be any one of 0 to 335.
[14이 예를들어, NR SL또는 NR V2X의경우, 2개의서로다른 S-PSS시퀀스와 [14 For example, for NR SL or NR V2X, two different S-PSS sequences and
336개의서로다른 S-SSS시퀀스의조합을기반으로, SLSS ID의값이정의될수 있다.예를들어, SLSS ID의개수는 672개일수있다.예를들어, SLSS ID의값은 0내지 671중어느하나일수있다.예를들어, 2개의서로다른 S-PSS중에서, 하나의 S-PSS는인-커버리지 (in-coverage)와연관될수있고,나머지하나의 S-PSS는아웃-커버리지 (out-of-coverage)와연관될수있다.예를들어, 0내지 335의 SLSS ID는인-커버리지에서사용될수있고, 336내지 6기의 SLSS ID는 아웃-커버리지에서사용될수있다. Based on a combination of 336 different S-SSS sequences, the value of the SLSS ID can be defined. For example, the number of SLSS IDs can be 672. For example, the value of SLSS ID can be any one of 0 to 671. For example, of two different S-PSSs, one S-PSS can be associated with in-coverage, and the other S-PSS can be associated with out-of-coverage. For example, SLSS IDs of 0 to 335 can be used in in-coverage, SLSS IDs of 336 to 6 can be used in out-coverage.
[141] 한편,전송단말은수신단말의 S-SSB수신성능을향상시키기위해, S-SSB를 구성하는각각의신호의특성에따라전송전력을최적화할필요가있다.예를 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 들어 , S-SSB를구성하는각각의신호의 PAPR(Peak to Average Power Ratio)등에 따라,전송단말은각각의신호에대한 MPR(Maximum Power Reduction)값을 결정할수있다.예를들어, PAPR값이 S-SSB를구성하는 S-PSS및 S-SSS사이에 서로다르면,수신단말의 S-SSB수신성능을향상시키기위해,전송단말은 S-PSS및 S-SSS의전송에대하여각각최적의 MPR값을적용할수있다.또한, 예를들어,전송단말이각각의신호에대하여증폭동작을수행하기위해서, 천이구간 (transient period)이적용될수있다.천이구간은전송단말의전송 전력이달라지는경계에서전송단말의송신단엠프가정상동작을수행하는데 필요한시간을보호 (preserve)할수있다.예를들어, FR1의경우,상기천이 구간은 lOus일수있다.예를들어, FR2의경우,상기천이구간은 5us일수있다. 예를들어,수신단말이 S-PSS를검출하기위한검색윈도우 (search window)는 80ms및/또는 160ms일수있다. [141] On the other hand, the transmitting terminal needs to optimize the transmission power according to the characteristics of each signal constituting the S-SSB in order to improve the S-SSB reception performance of the receiving terminal. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{For 2020/002889, according to the PAPR (Peak to Average Power Ratio) of each signal constituting the S-SSB, the transmitting terminal has the MPR (Maximum Power Reduction) for each signal. For example, if the PAPR value is different between the S-PSS and S-SSS constituting the S-SSB, in order to improve the S-SSB reception performance of the receiving terminal, the transmitting terminal is S- For the transmission of PSS and S-SSS, the optimum MPR value can be applied respectively. Also, for example, for the transmitting terminal to perform an amplification operation for each signal, a transition period can be applied. The transition period can protect the time required for the transmitting terminal amplifier of the transmitting terminal to perform the normal operation at the boundary where the transmission power of the transmitting terminal is different. For example, in the case of FR1, the transition period may be lOus. For example, for FR2, the transition section may be 5us. For example, the search window for the receiving terminal to detect the S-PSS may be 80 ms and/or 160 ms.
[142] 도 12는본개시의일실시 예에따른, V2X또는 SL통신을수행하는단말을 나타낸다. 12 shows a terminal that performs V2X or SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[143] 도 12를참조하면, V2X또는 SL통신에서단말이라는용어는주로사용자의 단말을의미할수있다.하지만,기지국과같은네트워크장비가단말사이의 통신방식에따라신호를송수신하는경우,기지국또한일종의단말로간주될 수도있다.예를들어 ,단말 1은제 1장치 (100)일수있고,단말 2는제 2 장치 (200)일수있다. 12, in V2X or SL communication, the term terminal can mainly mean a user's terminal. However, when a network device such as a base station transmits and receives signals according to the communication method between the terminals, the base station also It may be considered a kind of terminal, for example, terminal 1 may be the first device 100, and terminal 2 may be the second device 200.
[144] 예를들어 ,단말 1은일련의자원의집합을의미하는자원풀 (resource pool) 내에서특정한자원에해당하는자원단위 (resource unit)를선택할수있다. 그리고,단말 1은상기자원단위를사용하여 SL신호를전송할수있다.예를 들어,수신단말인단말 2는단말 1이신호를전송할수있는자원풀을설정받을 수있고,상기자원풀내에서단말 1의신호를검출할수있다. [144] For example, terminal 1 can select a resource unit corresponding to a particular resource within a resource pool, which means a set of resources. In addition, Terminal 1 can transmit an SL signal using the resource unit. For example, Terminal 2, which is a receiving terminal, can receive a resource pool in which terminal 1 can transmit signals, and detect the signal of terminal 1 in the resource pool. can do.
[145] 여기서,단말 1이기지국의연결범위내에 있는경우,기지국이자원풀을단말 1에게알려줄수있다.반면,단말 1이기지국의연결범위밖에 있는경우,다른 단말이단말 1에게자원풀을알려주거나,또는단말 1은사전에설정된자원 물을사용할수있다. [145] Here, if terminal 1 is within the connection range of the base station, the base station can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool. On the other hand, when terminal 1 is outside the connection range of the base station, another terminal sends the resource pool to terminal 1 Or, terminal 1 can use the resource set in advance.
[146] 일반적으로자원풀은복수의자원단위로구성될수있고,각단말은하나또는 복수의자원단위를선택하여자신의 SL신호전송에사용할수있다. [146] In general, a resource pool can be composed of a plurality of resource units, and each terminal can select one or more resource units and use it for its own SL signal transmission.
[147] 도 13은본개시의일실시 예에따른, V2X또는 SL통신을위한자원단위를 나타낸다. 13 shows a resource unit for V2X or SL communication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[148] 도 13을참조하면,자원풀의전체주파수자원이 NF개로분할될수있고,자원 풀의전체시간자원이 NT개로분할될수있다.따라서,총 NF * NT개의자원 단위가자원풀내에서정의될수있다.도 13은해당자원풀이 NT개의 서브프레임의주기로반복되는경우의예를나타낸다. 13, the total frequency resources of the resource pool can be divided into NF, and the total time resources of the resource pool can be divided into NT. Accordingly, a total of NF * NT resource units can be defined in the resource pool. 13 shows an example in which the corresponding resource pool is repeated with a period of NT subframes.
[149] 도 13에나타난바와같이,하나의자원단위 (예를들어, Unit #0)는주기적으로 반복하여나타날수있다.또는,시간또는주파수차원에서의 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 다이버시티 (diversity)효과를얻기위해서,하나의논리적인자원단위가 맵핑되는물리적자원단위의인덱스가시간에따라사전에정해진패턴으로 변화할수도있다.이러한자원단위의구조에있어서,자원풀이란 SL신호를 전송하고자하는단말이전송에사용할수있는자원단위들의집합을의미할수 있다. As shown in Fig. 13, one resource unit (for example, Unit #0) may be repeatedly displayed periodically. Or, in the time or frequency dimension. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 In order to obtain a diversity effect, the index of the physical resource unit to which one logical resource unit is mapped may change in a predetermined pattern over time. In the structure of such a resource unit, a resource pool can mean a set of resource units that a terminal that wishes to transmit an SL signal can use for transmission.
[150] 자원풀은여러종류로세분화될수있다.예를들어 ,각자원풀에서전송되는 SL신호의컨텐츠 (content)에따라,자원풀은아래와같이구분될수있다. [150] The resource pool can be subdivided into several types. For example, depending on the content of the SL signal transmitted from each resource pool, the resource pool can be classified as follows.
[151] (1)스케줄링할당 (Scheduling Assignment, SA)은전송단말이 SL데이터채널의 전송으로사용하는자원의위치,그외데이터채널의복조를위해서필요한 MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme)또는 MIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output) 전송방식, TA(Timing Advance)등의정보를포함하는신호일수있다. SA는동일 자원단위상에서 SL데이터와함께멀티플렉싱되어전송되는것도가능하며,이 경우 SA자원풀이란 SA가 SL데이터와멀티플렉싱되어전송되는자원풀을 의미할수있다. SA는 SL제어채널 (control channel)로불릴수도있다. [151] (1) Scheduling Assignment (SA) is the location of resources used by the transmitting terminal for transmission of SL data channels, and MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) or MIMO (Multiple Input) required for demodulation of other data channels. It may be a signal that includes information such as multiple output) transmission method and TA (Timing Advance). The SA can be multiplexed and transmitted with SL data on the same resource unit. In this case, the SA resource pool may mean a resource pool in which SA is multiplexed with SL data and transmitted. SA may also be referred to as an SL control channel.
[152] (2) SL데이터채널 (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH)은전송단말이 사용자데이터를전송하는데사용하는자원풀일수있다.만약동일자원단위 상에서 SL데이터와함께 SA가멀티플렉싱되어전송되는경우, SA정보를 제외한형태의 SL데이터채널만이 SL데이터채널을위한자원풀에서전송될 수있다.다시말해, SA자원풀내의개별자원단위상에서 SA정보를 전송하는데사용되었던 REs(Resource Elements)는 SL데이터채널의자원풀에서 여전히 SL데이터를전송하기위해사용될수있다.예를들어,전송단말은 연속적인 PRB에 PSSCH를맵핑시켜서전송할수있다. [152] (2) The SL data channel (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH) can be a resource pool used by the transmitting terminal to transmit user data. If SA is multiplexed and transmitted together with SL data on the same resource unit, Only SL data channels of the type excluding SA information can be transmitted from the resource pool for the SL data channel. In other words, REs (Resource Elements) used to transmit SA information on individual resource units in the SA resource pool are SL data. It can still be used to transmit SL data in the resource pool of the channel; for example, the transmitting terminal can transmit by mapping the PSSCH to successive PRBs.
[153] (3)디스커버리채널은전송단말이자신의 ID등의정보를전송하기위한자원 풀일수있다.이를통해,전송단말은인접단말이자신을발견하도록할수 있다. [153] (3) The discovery channel can be a resource pool for transmitting information such as the transmitting terminal's own ID. Through this, the transmitting terminal can discover itself.
[154] 이상에서설명한 SL신호의컨텐츠가동일한경우에도, SL신호의송수신 [154] Sending/receiving SL signals even if the contents of the SL signal described above are the same
속성에따라서상이한자원풀을사용할수있다.일예로,동일한 SL데이터 채널이나디스커버리메시지라하더라도, SL신호의전송타이밍결정 방식 (예를들어,동기기준신호의수신시점에서전송되는지아니면상기수신 시점에서일정한타이밍어드밴스를적용하여전송되는지),자원할당방식 (예를 들어,개별신호의전송자원을기지국이개별전송단말에게지정해주는지 아니면개별전송단말이자원풀내에서자체적으로개별신호전송자원을 선택하는지 ),신호포맷 (예를들어 ,각 SL신호가한서브프레임에서차지하는 심볼의개수,또는하나의 SL신호의전송에사용되는서브프레임의개수), 기지국으로부터의신호세기, SL단말의송신전력세기등에따라서다시 상이한자원풀로구분될수도있다. Different resource pools can be used depending on the properties. For example, even with the same SL data channel or discovery message, the transmission timing determination method of the SL signal (e.g., whether it is transmitted at the time of reception of the synchronization reference signal or at the time of the reception) Whether it is transmitted by applying a certain timing advance), resource allocation method (e.g., whether the base station assigns the transmission resource of an individual signal to an individual transmission terminal, or whether the individual transmission terminal selects the individual signal transmission resource itself within the resource pool) ,Signal format (e.g., the number of symbols each SL signal occupies in one subframe, or the number of subframes used for transmission of one SL signal), the signal strength from the base station, the transmission power strength of the SL terminal, etc. Therefore, it can be divided into different resource pools again.
[155] 이하, SL에서자원할당 (resource allocation)에대하여설명한다. [155] Hereinafter, resource allocation in SL will be described.
[156] 도 14는본개시의일실시예에따라,단말이전송모드에따라 V2X또는 SL 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 통신을수행하는절차를나타낸다.본개시의다양한실시예에서,전송모드는 모드또는자원할당모드라고칭할수있다.이하,설명의편의를위해, LTE에서 전송모드는 LTE전송모드라고칭할수있고, NR에서전송모드는 NR자원 할당모드라고칭할수있다. 14 is a V2X or SL according to the transmission mode according to an embodiment of the present disclosure 2020/175955 1» (: 1^1{2020/002889 Indicates a procedure for performing communication. In various embodiments of the present disclosure, the transmission mode may be referred to as a mode or resource allocation mode. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, , In LTE, the transmission mode can be called LTE transmission mode, and in NR, the transmission mode can be called NR resource allocation mode.
[157] 예를들어,도 14의 (a)는 LTE전송모드 1또는 LTE전송모드 3과관련된단말 동작을나타낸다.또는,예를들어,도 14의 (a)는 NR자원할당모드 1과관련된 단말동작을나타낸다.예를들어, LTE전송모드 1은일반적인 SL통신에 적용될수있고, LTE전송모드 3은 V2X통신에적용될수있다. [157] For example, (a) of FIG. 14 shows a terminal operation related to LTE transmission mode 1 or LTE transmission mode 3. Or, for example, (a) of FIG. 14 is related to NR resource allocation mode 1 It shows the terminal operation. For example, LTE transmission mode 1 can be applied to general SL communication, and LTE transmission mode 3 can be applied to V2X communication.
[158] 예를들어,도 14의 (비는 LTE전송모드 2또는 LTE전송모드 4와관련된단말 동작을나타낸다.또는,예를들어,도 14의 (비는 NR자원할당모드 2와관련된 단말동작을나타낸다. [158] For example, (ratio of FIG. 14 represents a terminal operation related to LTE transmission mode 2 or LTE transmission mode 4). Or, for example, (ratio of FIG. 14 is a terminal operation related to NR resource allocation mode 2) Represents
[159] 도 14의 (a)를참조하면, LTE전송모드 1, LTE전송모드 3또는 NR자원할당 모드 1에서,기지국은 SL전송을위해단말에의해사용될 SL자원을스케줄링할 수있다.예를들어 ,기지국은단말 1에게 PDCCH (보다구체적으로 DCI(Downlink Control Information))를통해자원스케줄링을수행할수있고,단말 1은상기 자원스케줄링에따라단말 2와 V2X또는 SL통신을수행할수있다.예를들어 , 단말 1은 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)를통해 SCI(Sidelink Control Information)를단말 2에게전송한후,상기 SCI에기반한데이터를 Referring to FIG. 14A, in LTE transmission mode 1, LTE transmission mode 3, or NR resource allocation mode 1, the base station can schedule SL resources to be used by the terminal for SL transmission. For example For example, the base station can perform resource scheduling to terminal 1 through PDCCH (more specifically, DCI (Downlink Control Information)), and terminal 1 can perform V2X or SL communication with terminal 2 according to the above resource scheduling. , Terminal 1 transmits SCI (Sidelink Control Information) through PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel) to terminal 2, and then transmits the data based on the SCI.
PSSCH(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)를통해단말 2에게전송할수있다. It can be transmitted to Terminal 2 through PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel).
[16이 예를들어 요자원할당모드 1에서 ,단말은동적그랜트 (dynamic grant)를 [16 In this example, in the resource allocation mode 1, the terminal uses a dynamic grant.
통해하나의 TB(Transport Block)의하나이상의 SL전송을위한자원을 기지국으로부터제공또는할당받을수있다.예를들어,기지국은동적 그랜트를이용하여 PSCCH및/또는 PSSCH의전송을위한자원을단말에게 제공할수있다.예를들어 ,전송단말은수신단말로부터수신한 SL Through this, resources for one or more SL transmissions of one TB (Transport Block) can be provided or allocated from the base station. For example, the base station provides resources for PSCCH and/or PSSCH transmission to the terminal using a dynamic grant. For example, the transmitting terminal is the SL received from the receiving terminal.
HARQ(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request)피드백을기지국에게보고할수있다. 이경우,기지국이 SL전송을위한자원을할당하기위한 PDCCH내의 HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) feedback can be reported to the base station. In this case, the base station allocates resources for SL transmission within the PDCCH.
지시 (indication)를기반으로, SL HARQ피드백을기지국에게보고하기위한 PUCCH자원및타이밍 (timing)이결정될수있다. Based on the indication, PUCCH resources and timing for reporting SL HARQ feedback to the base station can be determined.
[161] 예를들어, DCI는 DCI수신과 DCI에의해스케줄링된첫번째 SL전송사이의 슬롯오프셋을나타낼수있다.예를들어, SL전송자원을스케줄링하는 DCI와 첫번째스케줄링된 SL전송자원사이의최소갭은해당단말의처리 [161] For example, DCI may represent the slot offset between DCI reception and the first SL transmission scheduled by the DCI. For example, the minimum between DCI scheduling SL transmission resources and the first SL transmission resource scheduled by the DCI. Gap is handled by the terminal
시간 (processing time)보다작지않을수있다. It may not be less than the processing time.
[162] 예를들어 , NR자원할당모드 1에서 ,단말은설정된그랜트 (configured grant)를 통해복수의 SL전송을위해주기적으로자원세트를기지국으로부터제공또는 할당받을수있다.예를들어,상기설정될그랜트는설정된그랜트타입 1또는 설정된그랜트타입 2를포함할수있다.예를들어,단말은주어진설정된 그랜트 (given configured grant)에의해지시되는각각의경우 (occasions)에서 전송할 TB를결정할수있다. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 [162] For example, in the NR resource allocation mode 1, the terminal can provide or receive a resource set from the base station for multiple SL transmissions through a configured grant. A grant may include a configured grant type 1 or a configured grant type 2. For example, a terminal may determine the TB to be transmitted in (occasions) in each case indicated by a given configured grant. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[163] 예를들어,기지국은동일한캐리어상에서 자원을단말에게할당할수 [163] For example, a base station can allocate resources to terminals on the same carrier.
있고,서로다른캐리어상에서 자원을단말에게할당할수있다. And resources can be allocated to terminals on different carriers.
[164] 예를들어, NR기지국은 1그¾기반의 통신을제어할수있다.예를들어, NR 기지국은 1그¾ 자원을스케줄링하기위해 NR DCI를단말에게전송할수 있다.이경우,예를들어,상기 NR DCI를스크램블하기위한새로운 RNTI가 정의될수있다.예를들어 ,상기단말은 NR ^모듈및 1그¾ 모듈을포함할수 있다. [164] For example, an NR base station can control 1⁄4 based communication. For example, an NR base station may transmit an NR DCI to the terminal to schedule 1⁄4 resource. In this case, for example A new RNTI may be defined for scrambling the NR DCI. For example, the terminal may include an NR ^ module and a 1 ¾ module.
[165] 예를들어 요 모듈및 L^E 모듈을포함하는단말이 gNB로부터 NR [165] For example, a terminal containing a yaw module and an L^E module is NR from gNB
0(:1를수신한후, NR ^모듈은 NR ^ 0(그를 L^E 00타입 5쇼로변환할수 있고, NR 모듈은
Figure imgf000023_0001
모듈에 L^E 00타입 5쇼를전달할수 있다.예를들어, 1그¾ 모듈이 NR SL모듈로부터 1그¾ 0(:1포맷 5쇼를수신한
Figure imgf000023_0002
후에첫번째 L^E서브프레임에활성화및/또는해제를 적용할수있다.예를들어,상기 는。(:1의필드를사용하여동적으로표시될수 있다.예를들어,상기 의최솟값은
Figure imgf000023_0003
상이할수 있다.예를들어 ,단말은단말능력에따라하나의값( 1¾노 value)을보고할수 있다.예를들어,상기 는양수일수있다.
After receiving 0(:1, NR ^ module can convert it to NR ^ 0(L^E 00 type 5 show, NR module
Figure imgf000023_0001
L^E 00 type 5 shows can be delivered to the module. For example, a 1 ¾ module receives 1 ¾ 0 (:1 format 5 shows from an NR SL module).
Figure imgf000023_0002
The activation and/or deactivation can be applied to the first L^E subframe afterwards. For example, the above can be displayed dynamically using a field of .(:1. For example, the minimum value of the above can be applied to
Figure imgf000023_0003
It can be different. For example, the terminal can report one value (1⁄4 no value) according to the terminal's capabilities. For example, the above can be positive.
[166] 도 14의(비를참조하면, L^E전송모드 2, L^E전송모드 4또는 NR자원할당 모드 2에서 ,단말은기지국/네트워크에의해설정된
Figure imgf000023_0004
자원또는미리설정된 자원내에서 전송자원을결정할수있다.예를들어,상기설정된 자원 또는미리설정된 자원은자원풀일수있다.예를들어,단말은자율적으로 전송을위한자원을선택또는스케줄링할수있다.예를들어,단말은설정된 자원풀내에서자원을스스로선택하여,
Figure imgf000023_0005
통신을수행할수있다.예를들어, 단말은센싱(8¥ 1¾)및자원(재)선택절차를수행하여,선택윈도우내에서 스스로자원을선택할수있다.예를들어,상기센싱은서브채널단위로수행될 수있다.그리고,자원풀내에서자원을스스로선택한단말 1은모3(:幻1를통해 3(:1를단말 2에게전송한후,상기 3(:1에기반한데이터를
Figure imgf000023_0006
통해단말
[166] In Fig. 14 (referring to the ratio, in L^E transmission mode 2, L^E transmission mode 4, or NR resource allocation mode 2, the terminal is set by the base station/network.
Figure imgf000023_0004
The transmission resource can be determined within a resource or a preset resource. For example, the set resource or a preset resource can be a resource pool. For example, the terminal can autonomously select or schedule a resource for transmission. For example, the terminal selects the resource itself from the set resource pool,
Figure imgf000023_0005
Communication can be performed. For example, the terminal can perform sensing (8¥ 1¾) and resource (re) selection procedures to select resources by itself in the selection window. For example, the sensing above is a subchannel unit. In the resource pool, terminal 1, which has selected a resource by itself, transmits 3 (:1 to terminal 2 through parent 3 (:幻1), and then transmits the data based on 3 (:1) above.
Figure imgf000023_0006
Through terminal
2에게전송할수있다. Can be sent to 2.
[167] 예를들어,단말은다른단말에대한 ^자원선택을도울수있다.예를들어, NR자원할당모드 2에서 ,단말은 ^전송을위한설정된그랜트(¥11^11  1 밝 를설정받을수있다.예를들어 요자원할당모드 2에서 ,단말은다른 단말의 전송을스케줄링할수있다.예를들어, NR자원할당모드 2에서, 단말은블라인드재전송을위한 자원을예약할수있다. [167] For example, the terminal can help ^ resource selection for other terminals. For example, in NR resource allocation mode 2, the terminal can receive the ^ set grant for transmission (¥11^11  1 bright). For example, in the required resource allocation mode 2, the terminal can schedule the transmission of another terminal. For example, in the NR resource allocation mode 2, the terminal can reserve resources for blind retransmission.
[168] 예를들어 요자원할당모드 2에서 ,제 1단말은 3(그를이용하여 ^전송의 우선순위를제 2단말에게지시할수있다.예를들어 ,제 2단말은상기 8011- 디코딩할수있고,제 2단말은상기우선순위를기반으로센싱및/또는자원 (재)선택을수행할수있다.예를들어,상기자원(재)선택절차는,제 2단말이 자원선택윈도우에서후보자원을식별하는단계및제 2단말이식별된후보 자원중에서(재)전송을위한자원을선택하는단계를포함할수있다.예를들어, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 자원선택윈도우는단말이 SL전송을위한자원을선택하는시간간격(time interval)일수있다.예를들어,제 2단말이자원(재)선택을트리거한이후,자원 선택윈도우는 T1 > 0에서시작할수있고,자원선택윈도우는제 2단말의남은 패킷지연버짓(remaining packet delay budget)에의해제한될수있다.예를들어 , 제 2단말이자원선택윈도우에서후보자원을식별하는단계에서,제 2단말이 제 1단말로부터수신한 SCI에의해특정자원이지시되고및상기특정자원에 대한 LI SL RSRP측정값이 SL RSRP임계값을초과하면,상기제 2단말은상기 특정자원을후보자원으로결정하지않을수있다.예를들어, SL RSRP 임계값은제 2단말이제 1단말로부터수신한 SCI에의해지시되는 SL전송의 우선순위및제 2단말이선택한자원상에서 SL전송의우선순위를기반으로 결정될수있다. [168] For example, in the required resource allocation mode 2, the first terminal can instruct the second terminal 3 (using it ^ transmission priority. For example, the second terminal can decode the 8011- above, and ,The second terminal can perform sensing and/or resource (re)selection based on the priority. For example, the resource (re) selection procedure, the second terminal identifies candidate resources in the resource selection window. And selecting a resource for (re)transmission from among the candidate resources for which the second terminal has been identified. For example, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 The resource selection window may be a time interval at which the terminal selects a resource for SL transmission. For example, the second terminal selects a resource (re). After triggering, the resource selection window can start at T1> 0, and the resource selection window can be limited by the remaining packet delay budget of terminal 2. For example, terminal 2 is a resource resource. In the step of identifying candidate resources in the selection window, when a specific resource is indicated by the SCI received from the first terminal by the second terminal and the LI SL RSRP measurement value for the specific resource exceeds the SL RSRP threshold, the The second terminal may not determine the specific resource as a candidate resource. For example, the SL RSRP threshold is the priority of the SL transmission as indicated by the SCI received from the first terminal and the second terminal selected. It can be determined based on the priority of SL transmission on the resource.
[169] 예를들어 ,상기 LI SL RSRP는 SL DMRS(Demodulation Reference Signal)를 기반으로측정될수있다.예를들어 ,자원풀별로시간영역에서하나이상의 PSSCH DMRS패턴이설정되거나사전에설정될수있다.예를들어 , PDSCH DMRS설정타입 1및/또는타입 2는 PSSCH DMRS의주파수영역패턴과동일 또는유사할수있다.예를들어 ,정확한 DMRS패턴은 SCI에의해지시될수 있다.예를들어, NR자원할당모드 2에서,전송단말은자원풀에대하여설정된 또는사전에설정된 DMRS패턴중에서특정 DMRS패턴을선택할수있다. [169] For example, the LI SL RSRP can be measured based on the SL Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS). For example, one or more PSSCH DMRS patterns can be set or preset in the time domain for each resource pool. For example, the PDSCH DMRS configuration type 1 and/or type 2 may be the same or similar to the frequency domain pattern of the PSSCH DMRS. For example, the correct DMRS pattern may be indicated by the SCI. For example, NR resource allocation In mode 2, the transmitting terminal can select a specific DMRS pattern from among the DMRS patterns set for the resource pool or preset.
[17이 예를들어, NR자원할당모드 2에서,센싱및자원(재)선택절차를기반으로, 전송단말은예약없이 TB(Transport Block)의초기전송을수행할수있다.예를 들어,센싱및자원(재)선택절차를기반으로,전송단말은제 1 TB와연관된 SCI를이용하여제 2 TB의초기전송을위한 SL자원을예약할수있다. [17 For example, in NR resource allocation mode 2, based on the sensing and resource (re) selection procedure, the transmitting terminal can perform the initial transmission of TB (Transport Block) without reservation. For example, sensing and resource (re) selection procedure. Based on the resource (re) selection procedure, the transmitting terminal can reserve the SL resources for the initial transmission of the second TB using the SCI associated with the first TB.
[171] 예를들어, NR자원할당모드 2에서,단말은동일한 TB(Transport Block)의 이전전송과관련된시그널링을통해,피드백기반의 PSSCH재전송을위한 자원을예약할수있다.예를들어,현재전송을포함하여하나의전송에의해 예약되는 SL자원의최대개수는 2개 3개또는 4개일수있다.예를들어 ,상기 SL자원의최대개수는 HARQ피드백이인에이블되는지여부와관계없이 동일할수있다.예를들어,하나의 TB에대한최대 HARQ(재)전송횟수는설정 또는사전설정에의해제한될수있다.예를들어,최대 HARQ(재)전송횟수는 최대 32일수있다.예를들어,상기설정또는사전설정이없으면,최대 HARQ (재)전송횟수는지정되지않은것일수있다.예를들어,상기설정또는사전 설정은전송단말을위한것일수있다.예를들어 , NR자원할당모드 2에서 , 단말이사용하지않는자원을해제하기위한 HARQ피드백이지원될수있다. [171] For example, in NR resource allocation mode 2, the terminal can reserve resources for feedback-based PSSCH retransmission through signaling related to the previous transmission of the same TB (Transport Block). For example, the current transmission The maximum number of SL resources reserved by one transmission including, for example, may be 2, 3 or 4. For example, the maximum number of SL resources may be the same regardless of whether HARQ feedback is enabled or not. For example, the maximum number of HARQ (re) transmissions for one TB can be limited by settings or presets. For example, the maximum number of HARQ (re) transmissions can be up to 32. For example, above If there is no setting or preset, the maximum number of HARQ (re) transmissions may not be specified. For example, the above setting or preset may be for the transmitting terminal. For example, in NR resource allocation mode 2 , HARQ feedback to release resources not used by the terminal may be supported.
[172] 예를들어 , NR자원할당모드 2에서 ,단말은 SCI를이용하여상기단말에의해 사용되는하나이상의서브채널및/또는슬롯을다른단말에게지시할수있다. 예를들어 ,단말은 SCI를이용하여 PSSCH(재)전송을위해상기단말에의해 예약된하나이상의서브채널및/또는슬롯을다른단말에게지시할수있다. 예를들어 , SL자원의최소할당단위는슬롯일수있다.예를들어 ,서브채널의 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 사이즈는단말에대하여설정되거나미리설정될수있다. [172] For example, in NR resource allocation mode 2, a terminal can use SCI to instruct another terminal of one or more sub-channels and/or slots used by the terminal. For example, a terminal can use SCI to instruct another terminal of one or more sub-channels and/or slots reserved by the terminal for PSSCH (re) transmission. For example, the smallest allocation unit of an SL resource can be a slot. For example, a subchannel 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 The size can be set for the terminal or can be preset.
[173] 이하, SCI(Sidelink Control Information)에대하여설명한다. [173] Hereinafter, SCI (Sidelink Control Information) will be described.
[174] 기지국이 PDCCH를통해단말에게전송하는제어정보를 DCI(Downlink [174] DCI (Downlink) control information transmitted by the base station to the terminal through the PDCCH
Control Information)라칭하는반면,단말이 PSCCH를통해다른단말에게 전송하는제어정보를 SCI라칭할수있다.예를들어 ,단말은 PSCCH를 디코딩하기전에, PSCCH의시작심볼및/또는 PSCCH의심볼개수를알고있을 수있다.예를들어, SCI는 SL스케줄링정보를포함할수있다.예를들어, 단말은 PSSCH를스케줄링하기위해적어도하나의 SCI를다른단말에게전송할 수있다.예를들어,하나이상의 SCI포맷 (format)이정의될수있다. Control Information), while control information transmitted by a terminal to another terminal through the PSCCH can be referred to as SCI. For example, before the terminal decodes the PSCCH, the start symbol of the PSCCH and/or the number of symbols of the PSCCH are determined. For example, the SCI may contain SL scheduling information. For example, a terminal may transmit at least one SCI to another terminal to schedule a PSSCH. For example, one or more SCI formats. (format) can be defined.
[175] 예를들어 ,전송단말은 PSCCH상에서 SCI를수신단말에게전송할수있다. 수신단말은 PSSCH를전송단말로부터수신하기위해하나의 SCI를디코딩할 수있다. [175] For example, the transmitting terminal can transmit SCI to the receiving terminal on the PSCCH. The receiving terminal can decode one SCI to receive the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal.
[176] 예를들어,전송단말은 PSCCH및/또는 PSSCH상에서두개의연속적인 [176] For example, the transmitting terminal has two consecutive devices on the PSCCH and/or PSSCH.
SCI (예를들어, 2-stage SCI)를수신단말에게전송할수있다.수신단말은 PSSCH를전송단말로부터수신하기위해두개의연속적인 SCI (예를들어, 2-stage SCI)를디코딩할수있다.예를들어 , (상대적으로)높은 SCI SCI (e.g., 2-stage SCI) can be transmitted to the receiving terminal. The receiving terminal can decode two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCI) to receive the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal. For example, (relatively) high SCI
페이로드 (payload)크기를고려하여 SCI구성필드들을두개의그룹으로구분한 경우에 ,제 1 SCI구성필드그룹을포함하는 SCI를제 1 SCI또는 1st SCI라고 칭할수있고,제 2 SCI구성필드그룹을포함하는 SCI를제 2 SCI또는 2nd SCI라고칭할수있다.예를들어 ,전송단말은 PSCCH를통해서제 1 SCI를수신 단말에게전송할수있다.예를들어 ,전송단말은 PSCCH및/또는 PSSCH상에서 제 2 SCI를수신단말에게전송할수있다.예를들어 ,제 2 SCI는 (독립된) When the SCI configuration fields are divided into two groups in consideration of the payload size, the SCI including the first SCI configuration field group can be referred to as the first SCI or the 1st SCI, and the second SCI configuration field group is The included SCI may be referred to as a 2nd SCI or 2nd SCI. For example, the transmitting terminal may transmit the first SCI to the receiving terminal through the PSCCH. For example, the transmitting terminal may transmit the second SCI on the PSCCH and/or PSSCH. SCI can be transmitted to the receiving terminal, e.g. the second SCI is (independent)
PSCCH를통해서수신단말에게전송되거나, PSSCH를통해데이터와함께 피기백되어전송될수있다.예를들어,두개의연속적인 SCI는서로다른 전송 (예를들어,유니캐스트 (unicast),브로드캐스트 (broadcast)또는 It can be transmitted to the receiving terminal through PSCCH, or piggybacked with data through PSSCH and transmitted. For example, two consecutive SCIs can be transmitted in different ways (e.g., unicast, broadcast). )or
그룹캐스트 (groupcast))에대하여적용될수도있다. It can also be applied for groupcast).
[177] 예를들어,전송단말은 SCI를통해서,아래정보중에일부또는전부를수신 단말에게전송할수있다.여기서,예를들어,전송단말은아래정보중에일부 또는전부를제 1 SCI및/또는제 2 SCI를통해서수신단말에게전송할수있다. [177] For example, the transmitting terminal may transmit some or all of the following information to the receiving terminal through SCI. Here, for example, the transmitting terminal may transmit some or all of the following information to the first SCI and/or It can be transmitted to the receiving terminal through the second SCI.
[178] - PSSCH및/또는 PSCCH관련자원할당정보,예를들어,시간/주파수자원 위치/개수,자원예약정보 (예를들어,주기),및/또는 [178]-PSSCH and/or PSCCH-related resource allocation information, for example, time/frequency resource location/number, resource reservation information (eg, period), and/or
[179] - SL CSI보고요청지시자또는 SL (LI) RSRP (및/또는 SL (LI) RSRQ및/또는 SL (LI) RSSI)보고요청지시자,및/또는 [179]-SL CSI reporting request indicator or SL (LI) RSRP (and/or SL (LI) RSRQ and/or SL (LI) RSSI) reporting request indicator, and/or
[18이 - (PSSCH상의 ) SL CSI전송지시자 (또는 SL (LI) RSRP (및/또는 SL (LI) RSRQ 및/또는 SL (LI) RSSI)정보전송지시자),및/또는 [18-(on PSSCH) SL CSI transmission indicator (or SL (LI) RSRP (and/or SL (LI) RSRQ and/or SL (LI) RSSI) information transmission indicator), and/or
[181] - MCS정보,및/또는 [181]-MCS information, and/or
[182] -전송전력정보,및/또는 [182]-transmission power information, and/or
[183] - L1데스티네이션 (destination) ID정보및/또는 L1소스 (source) ID정보, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 및/또는 [183]-L1 destination ID information and/or L1 source ID information, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 and/or
[184] - SL HARQ프로세스 (process) ID정보,및/또는 [184]-SL HARQ process (process) ID information, and/or
[185] - NDI(New Data Indicator)정보,및/또는 [185]-NDI (New Data Indicator) information, and/or
[186] - RV (Redundanc y Version)정보,및/또는 [186]-RV (Redundanc y Version) information, and/or
[187] - (전송트래픽/패킷관련) QoS정보,예를들어,우선순위정보,및/또는 [187]-(transmission traffic/packet related) QoS information, for example, priority information, and/or
[188] - SL CSI-RS전송지시자또는 (전송되는) SL CSI-RS안테나포트의개수정보 [188]-Information on the number of SL CSI-RS transmission indicators or (transmitted) SL CSI-RS antenna ports
[189] -전송단말의위치정보또는 (SL HARQ피드백이요청되는)타겟수신단말의 위치 (또는거리영역 )정보,및/또는 [189]-location information of the transmitting terminal or location (or distance area) information of the target receiving terminal (for which SL HARQ feedback is requested), and/or
[19이 - PSSCH를통해전송되는데이터의디코딩및/또는채널추정과관련된참조 신호 (예를들어, DMRS등)정보,예를들어, DMRS의 (시간-주파수)맵핑자원의 패턴과관련된정보,랭크 (rank)정보,안테나포트인덱스정보; [19-Reference signal (eg, DMRS, etc.) information related to decoding and/or channel estimation of data transmitted through the PSSCH, information related to the pattern of (time-frequency) mapping resources of the DMRS, Rank information, antenna port index information;
[191] 예를들어,제 1 SCI는채널센싱과관련된정보를포함할수있다.예를들어, 수신단말은 PSSCH DMRS를이용하여제 2 SCI를디코딩할수있다. PDCCH에 사용되는폴라코드 (polar code)가제 2 SCI에적용될수있다.예를들어,자원 풀에서,제 1 SCI의페이로드사이즈는유니캐스트,그룹캐스트및 [191] For example, the first SCI may include information related to channel sensing. For example, the receiving terminal may decode the second SCI using the PSSCH DMRS. The polar code used for the PDCCH can be applied to the second SCI. For example, in the resource pool, the payload size of the first SCI is unicast, groupcast and
브로드캐스트에대하여동일할수있다.제 1 SCI를디코딩한이후에,수신 단말은제 2 SCI의블라인드디코딩을수행할필요가없다.예를들어,제 1 SCI는 제 2 SCI의스케줄링정보를포함할수있다. It may be the same for broadcast. After decoding the first SCI, the receiving terminal does not need to perform blind decoding of the second SCI. For example, the first SCI may contain the scheduling information of the second SCI. have.
[192] 한편,본개시의다양한실시예에서 ,전송단말은 PSCCH를통해 SCI,제 1 SCI 및/또는제 2 SCI중적어도어느하나를수신단말에게전송할수있으므로, PSCCH는 SCI,제 1 SCI및/또는제 2 SCI중적어도어느하나로대체/치환될수 있다.그리고/또는,예를들어, SCI는 PSCCH,제 1 SCI및/또는제 2 SCI중적어도 어느하나로대체/치환될수있다.그리고/또는,예를들어 ,전송단말은 PSSCH를 통해제 2 SCI를수신단말에게전송할수있으므로, PSSCH는제 2 SCI로 대체/치환될수있다. On the other hand, in various embodiments of the present disclosure, since the transmitting terminal can transmit at least one of SCI, the first SCI and/or the second SCI to the receiving terminal through the PSCCH, the PSCCH is SCI, the first SCI and /Or may be substituted/substituted with at least one of the second SCI; and/or, for example, SCI may be substituted/substituted with at least one of PSCCH, the first SCI and/or the second SCI, and/or, For example, since the transmitting terminal can transmit the second SCI to the receiving terminal through the PSSCH, the PSSCH can be replaced/replaced with the second SCI.
[193] 한편,도 15는본개시의일실시예에따른,세가지캐스트타입을나타낸다. Meanwhile, FIG. 15 shows three cast types according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[194] 구체적으로,도 15의 (a)는브로드캐스트타입의 SL통신을나타내고,도 15의 (b)는유니캐스트타입의 SL통신을나타내며,도 15의 ( 는그룹캐스트타입의 SL통신을나타낸다.유니캐스트타입의 SL통신의경우,단말은다른단말과일 대일통신을수행할수있다.그룹캐스트타입의 SL통신의경우,단말은자신이 속하는그룹내의하나이상의단말과 SL통신을수행할수있다.본개시의 다양한실시예에서, SL그룹캐스트통신은 SL멀티캐스트 (multicast)통신, SL일 대다 (one-to-many)통신등으로대체될수있다. [194] Specifically, Fig. 15(a) shows a broadcast type SL communication, Fig. 15(b) shows a unicast type SL communication, and Fig. 15(a) shows a groupcast type SL communication. In the case of unicast type SL communication, a terminal can perform one-to-one communication with other terminals. In the case of groupcast type SL communication, a terminal can perform SL communication with one or more terminals in the group to which it belongs. In various embodiments of the present disclosure, SL groupcast communication may be replaced with SL multicast communication, SL one-to-many communication, or the like.
[195] 이하, LTE SL와 NR SL의장치내공존 (in-device coexistence)에대하여 [195] Hereinafter, regarding the in-device coexistence of LTE SL and NR SL
설명한다. Explain.
[196] 도 16은본개시의일실시예에따른, LTE모듈과 NR모듈을포함하는단말을 나타낸다. 16 shows a terminal including an LTE module and an NR module according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[197] 도 16을참조하면,단말은 LTE SL전송과관련된모듈및 NR SL전송과관련된 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 모듈일포함할수있다.상위계층에서생성된
Figure imgf000027_0001
전송과관련된패킷은
[197] Referring to FIG. 16, the terminal is a module related to LTE SL transmission and a module related to NR SL transmission. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 May contain modules. Created in higher layers
Figure imgf000027_0001
Packets related to transmission are
1그¾모듈로전달될수있다.상위계층에서생성된 NR SL전송과관련된패킷은 NR모듈로전달될수있다.여기서,예를들어, 1그¾모듈및 NR모듈은공통의 상위계층 (예를들어,응용계층)과관련될수있다.또는,예를들어, 1그¾모듈및 NR모듈은서로다른상위계층 (예를들어, 1그¾모듈과관련된상위계층및 NR 모듈과관련된상위계층)과관련될수있다.각각의패킷은특정우선순위와 관련될수있다.이경우, 1그¾모듈은 NR
Figure imgf000027_0002
전송과관련된패킷의우선순위를 알지못하고, NR모듈은 1그¾
Figure imgf000027_0003
전송과관련된패킷의우선순위를알지못할수 있다.우선순위의비교를
Figure imgf000027_0004
전송과관련된패킷의우선순위및 NR 전송과관련된패킷의우선순위는 1그¾모듈과 NR모듈사이에서교환될수 있다.따라서, 1그¾모듈과 NR모듈은 1그¾
Figure imgf000027_0005
전송과관련된패킷의우선순위와 전송과관련된패킷의우선순위를알수있다.그리고,
Figure imgf000027_0006
전송과 NR 전송이중첩되는경우,단말은 1그¾ 전송과관련된패킷의우선순위와 NR 81^전송과관련된패킷의우선순위를비교하여,높은우선순위와관련된 전송만을수행할수있다.예를들어, NR V2X우선순위필드와모모모!5는서로 직접비교될수있다.
Packets related to the NR SL transmission generated in the upper layer can be delivered to the NR module, where, for example, the 1⁄4 module and the NR module can be delivered to a common upper layer (e.g. Or, for example, a 1⁄4 module and an NR module may be associated with different upper layers (e.g., a higher layer associated with a 1⁄4 module and a higher layer associated with an NR module). Each packet can be associated with a specific priority. In this case, the 1⁄4 module is NR
Figure imgf000027_0002
Without knowing the priority of packets related to transmission, the NR module
Figure imgf000027_0003
You may not know the priority of the packet related to the transmission.
Figure imgf000027_0004
The priority of a packet related to transmission and the priority of a packet related to NR transmission can be exchanged between the 1⁄4 module and the NR module. Therefore, the 1⁄4 module and the NR module 1⁄4 module.
Figure imgf000027_0005
You can know the priority of the packet related to transmission and the priority of the packet related to transmission.
Figure imgf000027_0006
When transmission and NR transmission are superimposed, the terminal can only perform transmission related to the high priority by comparing the priority of the packet related to the transmission and the priority of the packet related to the NR 81 ^ transmission. , NR V2X priority field and momo! 5 can be directly compared to each other.
[198]
Figure imgf000027_0008
전송과관련된서비스의
Figure imgf000027_0007
전송과 관련된서비스의우선순위의일예를나타낸다.설명의편의를위해,모모모모를 기반으로설명하지만,우선순위가모모모모에한정되는것은아니다.예를들어, 우선순위는다양한방식으로정의될수있다.예를들어 , NR관련서비스와 L^E 관련서비스에는,동일한타입의공통우선순위가적용될수있다.
[198]
Figure imgf000027_0008
Of services related to transmission
Figure imgf000027_0007
Describes an example of the priority of a service related to transmission. For convenience of explanation, the explanation is based on the Momo Momo, but the priority is not limited to Momo Momo. For example, the priority can be defined in various ways. For example, the same type of common priority can be applied to NR-related services and L^E-related services.
[199] [표 5] [199] [Table 5]
Figure imgf000027_0009
Figure imgf000027_0009
[20이 예를들어 ,표 5의실시 예에서 ,단말이 LTE SL서비스 A및 NR SL서비스 E를 전송하도록결정하고, LTE SL서비스 A에대한전송및 NR SL서비스 E에대한 전송은중첩된다고가정한다.예를들어, LTE SL서비스 A에대한전송및 NR SL서비스 E에대한전송은시간영역상에서일부또는전부중첩될수있다.이 경우,단말은높은우선순위와관련된 SL전송만을수행하고,낮은우선순위와 관련된 SL전송은생략할수있다.예를들어,단말은 LTE SL서비스 A만을제 1 캐리어및/또는제 1채널상에서전송할수있다.반면,단말은 NR SL서비스 E를 제 2캐리어및/또는제 2채널상에서전송하지않을수있다. [20] For example, in the embodiment of Table 5, it is assumed that the terminal decides to transmit the LTE SL service A and the NR SL service E, and the transmission for the LTE SL service A and the transmission for the NR SL service E are superimposed. For example, transmissions for LTE SL service A and transmissions for NR SL service E may be partially or completely superimposed in the time domain. In this case, the terminal performs only the SL transmissions associated with high priority, and low priority. The SL transmission related to the ranking may be omitted. For example, the terminal may transmit only LTE SL service A on the first carrier and/or the first channel. On the other hand, the terminal may transmit the NR SL service E to the second carrier and/or It may not transmit on the second channel.
[201] 이하, CAM(Cooperative Awareness Message)및 DENM(Decentralized [201] Hereinafter, CAM (Cooperative Awareness Message) and DENM (Decentralized
Environmental Notification Message)에대하여설명한다. Environmental Notification Message).
[202] 차량간통신에서는주기적인메시지 (periodic message)타입의 CAM,이벤트 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 트리거메시지 (event triggered message)타입의 DENM등이전송될수있다. [202] In vehicle-to-vehicle communication, periodic message type CAM and event 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 DENM of the event triggered message type can be transmitted.
CAM은방향및속도와같은차량의동적상태정보,치수와같은차량정적 데이터 ,외부조명상태,경로내역등기본차량정보를포함할수있다. CAM의 크기는 50-300바이트일수있다. CAM은방송되며,지연 (latency)은 100ms보다 작아야한다. DENM은차량의고장,사고등의돌발적인상황시생성되는 메시지일수있다. DENM의크기는 3000바이트보다작을수있으며,전송범위 내에있는모든차량이메시지를수신할수있다.이때, DENM은 CAM보다 높은우선순위를가질수있다. The CAM can contain basic vehicle information such as vehicle dynamic status information such as direction and speed, vehicle static data such as dimensions, exterior lighting conditions, and route history. The size of the CAM can be 50-300 bytes. CAM is broadcast, latency should be less than 100ms. DENM may be a message generated in the event of an unexpected situation such as a vehicle breakdown or accident. The size of DENM can be less than 3000 bytes, and any vehicle within the transmission range can receive the message, at which point DENM can have a higher priority than CAM.
[203] 이하,반송파재선택 (carrier reselection)에대하여설명한다. [203] Hereinafter, carrier reselection will be described.
[204] V2X또는 SL통신에서 ,단말은설정된반송파들의 CBR(Channel Busy Ratio) 및/또는전송될 V2X메시지의 PPPP(Prose Per-Packet Priority)를기반으로반송파 재선택을수행할수있다.예를들어,반송파재선택은단말의 MAC계층에의해 수행될수있다.본개시의다양한실시예에서 , PPPP(ProSe Per Packet Priority)는 PPPR(ProSe Per Packet Reliability)로대체될수있으며 , PPPR은 PPPP로대체될수 있다.예를들어 , PPPP값이작을수록높은우선순위를의미할수있고, PPPP 값이클수록낮은우선순위를의미할수있다.예를들어, PPPR값이작을수록 높은신뢰성을의미할수있고, PPPR값이클수록낮은신뢰성을의미할수있다. 예를들어,높은우선순위와관련된서비스,패킷또는메시지와관련된 PPPP 값은낮은우선순위와관련된서비스,패킷또는메시지와관련된 PPPP값보다 작을수있다.예를들어,높은신뢰성과관련된서비스,패킷또는메시지와 관련된 PPPR값은낮은신뢰성과관련된서비스,패킷또는메시지와관련된 PPPR값보다작을수있다. [204] In V2X or SL communication, the terminal can perform carrier reselection based on the Channel Busy Ratio (CBR) of the set carriers and/or the PPPP (Prose Per-Packet Priority) of the V2X message to be transmitted. For example, ,Carrier reselection may be performed by the MAC layer of the terminal. In various embodiments of the present disclosure, PPPP (ProSe Per Packet Priority) may be replaced by PPPR (ProSe Per Packet Reliability), and PPPR may be replaced by PPPP. For example, a smaller PPPP value can mean a higher priority, a larger PPPP value can mean a lower priority. For example, a smaller PPPR value can mean higher reliability, and a larger PPPR value can mean higher priority. It can mean low reliability. For example, the PPPP value associated with a service, packet or message associated with a high priority may be less than the PPPP value associated with a service, packet or message associated with a low priority, for example, a service, packet or message associated with a high priority. The PPPR value associated with a message may be less than the PPPR value associated with a service, packet, or message associated with low reliability.
[205] CBR은단말에의해측정된 S-RSSI(Sidelink-Received Signal Strength [205] CBR is the S-RSSI (Sidelink-Received Signal Strength) measured by the terminal.
Indicator)가미리설정된임계치를넘는것으로감지된자원풀에서서브채널 부분 (the portion of sub-channels)을의미할수있다.각논리채널과관련된 Indicator) can mean the portion of sub-channels in the resource pool that is detected as exceeding a preset threshold value associated with each logical channel.
PPPP가존재할수있으며, PPPP값의설정은단말및기지국모두에요구되는 레이턴시를반영해야한다.반송파재선택시 ,단말은가장낮은 CBR로부터 증가하는순서로후보반송파들중하나이상의반송파를선택할수있다. PPPP may exist, and the setting of the PPPP value should reflect the latency required for both the terminal and the base station When reselecting a carrier, the terminal can select one or more of the candidate carriers in increasing order from the lowest CBR .
[206] 이하,단말사이의 RRC연결확립 (connection establishment)에대하여설명한다. [206] Hereinafter, the RRC connection establishment between terminals will be described.
[207] V2X또는 SL통신을위해,전송단말은수신단말과 (PC5) RRC연결을확립할 필요가있을수있다.예를들어 ,단말은 V2X-특정 SIB(V2X-specific SIB)을 획득할수있다.상위계층에의해 V2X또는 SL통신을전송하도록설정된, 전송할데이터를가지는,단말에대하여,적어도상기단말이 SL통신을위해 전송하도록설정된주파수가 V2X-특정 SIB에포함되면,해당주파수에대한 전송자원풀의포함없이,상기단말은다른단말과 RRC연결을확립할수있다. 예를들어,전송단말과수신단말사이에 RRC연결이확립되면,전송단말은 확립된 RRC연결을통해수신단말과유니캐스트통신을수행할수있다. [207] For V2X or SL communication, the transmitting terminal may need to establish a (PC5) RRC connection with the receiving terminal. For example, the terminal can acquire a V2X-specific SIB (V2X-specific SIB). For a terminal that has data to be transmitted, which is set to transmit V2X or SL communication by an upper layer, if at least the frequency set to transmit for SL communication is included in the V2X-specific SIB, the transmission resource pool for that frequency Without including, the terminal can establish an RRC connection with another terminal. For example, when an RRC connection is established between a transmitting terminal and a receiving terminal, the transmitting terminal can perform unicast communication with the receiving terminal through the established RRC connection.
[208] 단말들사이에서 RRC연결이확립되면,전송단말은 RRC메시지를수신 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 단말에게전송할수있다. [208] When the RRC connection is established between the terminals, the transmitting terminal receives the RRC message 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Can be sent to the terminal.
[209] 도 17은본개시의일실시에에따른, RRC메시지의전송절차를나타낸다. 17 shows a transmission procedure of an RRC message according to one implementation of the present disclosure.
[210] 도 17을참조하면,전송단말에의해생성된 RRC메시지는 PDCP계층, RLC 계층및 MAC계층을거쳐 PHY계층으로전달될수있다. RRC메시지는 Referring to FIG. 17, an RRC message generated by a transmitting terminal may be transmitted to a PHY layer through a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer. RRC message is
SRB(Signalling Radio Bearer)를통해전송될수있다.그리고,전송단말의 PHY 계층은전달받은정보에대하여코딩,변조및안테나/자원맵핑을수행할수 있고,전송단말은해당정보를수신단말에게전송할수있다. It can be transmitted through SRB (Signalling Radio Bearer), and the PHY layer of the transmitting terminal can perform coding, modulation, and antenna/resource mapping for the transmitted information, and the transmitting terminal can transmit the information to the receiving terminal. .
[211] 수신단말은수신한정보에대하여안테나/자원디맵핑,복조및디코딩을 [211] The receiving terminal performs antenna/resource demapping, demodulation, and decoding for the received information.
수행할수있다.해당정보는 MAC계층, RLC계층및 PDCP계층을거쳐 RRC 계층으로전달될수있다.따라서,수신단말은전송단말에의해생성된 RRC 메시지를수신할수있다. The information can be transmitted to the RRC layer through the MAC layer, RLC layer, and PDCP layer. Therefore, the receiving terminal can receive the RRC message generated by the transmitting terminal.
[212] V2X또는 SL통신은 RRC_CONNECTED모드의단말, RRCJDLE모드의단말 및 (NR) RRCJNACTIVE모드의단말에대하여지원될수있다.즉, [212] V2X or SL communication can be supported for a terminal in RRC_CONNECTED mode, a terminal in RRCJDLE mode, and a terminal in (NR) RRCJNACTIVE mode. That is,
RRC_CONNECTED모드의단말, RRCJDLE모드의단말및 (NR) RRC_CONNECTED mode terminal, RRCJDLE mode terminal and (NR)
RRCJNACTIVE모드의단말은 V2X또는 SL통신을수행할수있다. A terminal in RRCJNACTIVE mode can perform V2X or SL communication.
RRCJNACTIVE모드의단말또는 RRCJDLE모드의단말은 V2X에특정된 SIB에포함된셀-특정설정 (cell- specific configuration)을사용함으로써 V2X또는 SL통신을수행할수있다. A terminal in RRCJNACTIVE mode or a terminal in RRCJDLE mode can perform V2X or SL communication by using the cell-specific configuration included in the SIB specific to V2X.
[213] RRC는적어도 UE능력 (capability)및 AS계층설정을교환하는데사용될수 있다.예를들어,제 1단말은제 1단말의 UE능력및 AS계층설정을제 2 단말에게전송할수있고,제 1단말은제 2단말의 UE능력및 AS계층설정을제 2단말로부터수신할수있다. UE능력전달의경우,정보흐름은직접링크 셋업 (direct link setup)을위한 PC5-S시그널링동안또는후에트리거될수있다. [213] RRC can be used at least to exchange UE capability and AS layer configuration. For example, the first terminal can transmit the UE capability and AS layer configuration of the first terminal to the second terminal, and Terminal 1 can receive the UE capability and AS layer settings of terminal 2 from terminal 2. In the case of UE capability transfer, the information flow can be triggered during or after PC5-S signaling for direct link setup.
[214] 도 18는본개시의일실시예에따른,일방향방식의 UE능력전달을나타낸다. 18 shows a one-way UE capability delivery according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[215] 도 19는본개시의일실시예에따른,양방향방식의 UE능력전달을나타낸다. 19 shows a bidirectional UE capability transfer according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[216] AS계층설정의경우,정보흐름은직접링크설정을위한 PC5-S시그널링동안 또는후에트리거될수있다. [216] For the AS layer configuration, the information flow can be triggered during or after PC5-S signaling for direct link configuration.
[217] 도 20는본개시의일실시예에따른,양방향방식의 AS계층설정을나타낸다. 20 shows a bidirectional AS layer setting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[218] 그룹캐스트의경우,그룹멤버사이에일-대-다 PC5-RRC연결 [218] For groupcast, one-to-many PC5-RRC connections between group members
확립 (one-to-many PC5-RRC connection establishment)은필요하지않을수도있다. Establishment (one-to-many PC5-RRC connection establishment) may not be necessary.
[219] 이하, SL RLM (Radio Link Monitoring)에대하여설명한다. [219] Hereinafter, SL RLM (Radio Link Monitoring) will be described.
[220] 유니캐스트의 AS-레벨링크관리 (AS-level link management)의경우, SL [220] In the case of unicast AS-level link management, SL
RLM (Radio Link Monitoring)및/또는 RLF(Radio Link Failure)선언이지원될수 있다. SL유니캐스트에서 RLC AM(Acknowledged Mode)의경우, RLF선언은 최대재전송횟수에도달했음을나타내는 RLC로부터의지시에의해트리거될 수있다. AS-레벨링크상태 (AS-level link status) (예를들어,실패)는상위계층에 알려져야할수있다.유니캐스트에대한 RLM절차와달리,그룹캐스트관련 RLM디자인은고려되지않을수있다.그룹캐스트를위한그룹멤버들사이에서 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 RLM (Radio Link Monitoring) and/or RLF (Radio Link Failure) declarations may be supported. In the case of RLC AM (Acknowledged Mode) in SL unicast, the RLF declaration can be triggered by an instruction from the RLC indicating that the maximum number of retransmissions has been reached. The AS-level link status (e.g. failure) may have to be known to a higher layer Unlike the RLM procedure for unicast, the RLM design for groupcast may not be considered. Among group members for 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
RLM및/또는 RLF선언은필요하지않을수있다. RLM and/or RLF declarations may not be required.
[221] 예를들어,전송단말은참조신호를수신단말에게전송할수있고,수신 [221] For example, the transmitting terminal can transmit the reference signal to the receiving terminal,
단말은상기참조신호를이용하여 SL RLM을수행할수있다.예를들어,수신 단말은상기참조신호를이용하여 SL RLF를선언할수있다.예를들어,상기 참조신호는 SL참조신호라고칭할수있다. The terminal can perform SL RLM using the reference signal. For example, the receiving terminal can declare the SL RLF by using the reference signal. For example, the reference signal may be referred to as an SL reference signal. .
[222] 이하, SL즉정 (measurement)및보고 (reporting)에대하여설명한다. [222] Hereinafter, the SL measurement and reporting will be described.
[223] QoS예즉 (prediction),초기전송파라미터셋팅 (initial transmission parameter setting),링크적응 (link adaptation),링크관리 (link management),어드미션 제어 (admission control)등의목적으로,단말간의 SL즉정및보고 (예를들어 , RSRP, RSRQ)가 SL에서고려될수있다.예를들어,수신단말은전송 [223] For QoS purposes such as prediction, initial transmission parameter setting, link adaptation, link management, and admission control, SL instantiation between terminals and Reporting (e.g., RSRP, RSRQ) can be considered in the SL, e.g. the receiving terminal
단말로부터참조신호를수신할수있고,수신단말은참조신호를기반으로 전송단말에대한채널상태를측정할수있다.그리고,수신단말은채널상태 정보 (Channel State Information, CSI)를전송단말에게보고할수있다. SL관련 측정및보고는 CBR의측정및보고,및위치정보의보고를포함할수있다. The reference signal can be received from the terminal, the receiving terminal can measure the channel state of the transmitting terminal based on the reference signal, and the receiving terminal can report channel state information (CSI) to the transmitting terminal. . SL related measurement and reporting can include measurement and reporting of CBR, and reporting of location information.
V2X에대한 CSI(Channel Status Information)의예는 CQI(Channel Quality An example of CSI (Channel Status Information) for V2X is CQI (Channel Quality
Indicator), PMI(Precoding Matrix Index), RI(Rank Indicator), RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power), RSRQ(Reference Signal Received Quality), Indicator), PMI (Precoding Matrix Index), RI (Rank Indicator), RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality),
경로이득 (pathgain)/경로손실 (pathloss), SRI(SRS, Sounding Reference Symbols, Resource Indicator), CRI(CSI-RS Resource Indicator),간섭조건 (interference condition),차량동작 (vehicle motion)등일수있다.유니캐스트통신의경우, CQI, RI및 PMI또는그중일부는네개이하의안테나포트를가정한 It may be pathgain/pathloss, SRI (SRS, Sounding Reference Symbols, Resource Indicator), CRI (CSI-RS Resource Indicator), interference condition, vehicle motion, etc. For unicast communication, CQI, RI, and PMI, or some of them, assume four or fewer antenna ports.
비 -서브밴드-기반의비주기 CSI보고 (non-subband-based aperiodic CSI report)에서 지원될수있다. CSI절차는스탠드얼론참조신호 (standalone RS)에의존하지 않을수있다. CSI보고는설정에따라활성화및비활성화될수있다. It may be supported in a non-subband-based aperiodic CSI report. The CSI procedure may not depend on the standalone RS. CSI reporting can be enabled and disabled depending on the settings.
[224] 예를들어 ,전송단말은 CSI-RS를수신단말에게전송할수있고,수신단말은 상기 CSI-RS를이용하여 CQI또는 RI를측정할수있다.예를들어,상기 For example, the transmitting terminal can transmit the CSI-RS to the receiving terminal, and the receiving terminal can measure CQI or RI using the CSI-RS. For example, the above
CSI-RS는 SL CSI-RS라고칭할수있다.예를들어,상기 CSI-RS는 PSSCH전송 내에국한 (confined)될수있다.예를들어 ,전송단말은 PSSCH자원상에 CSI-RS may be referred to as SL CSI-RS. For example, the CSI-RS may be confined within PSSCH transmission. For example, the transmitting terminal is on the PSSCH resource.
CSI-RS를포함시켜수신단말에게전송할수있다. It can be transmitted to the receiving terminal by including the CSI-RS.
[225] 이하,물리계증프로세싱 (physical layer processing)에대하여설명한다. [225] Hereinafter, physical layer processing will be described.
[226] 본개시의일실시예에따르면,데이터유닛은무선인터페이스를통해 [226] According to one embodiment of the present disclosure, the data unit is
송신되기전에전송즉 (transmitting side)에서물리계증프로세싱의대상이될수 있다.본개시의일실시예에따르면,데이터유닛을운반하는무선신호는수신 즉 (receiving side)에서물리계증프로세싱의대상이될수있다. Prior to transmission, the transmission, i.e., may be subject to physical verification processing at the transmitting side. According to one embodiment of the present disclosure, a radio signal carrying a data unit may be subject to physical verification processing at the receiving side. have.
[227] 도 21은본개시의일실시예에따른,전송측물리계층프로세싱을나타낸다. 21 shows the physical layer processing of the transmission side, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[228] 표 6은상향링크전송채널과물리채널사이의맵핑관계를나타낼수있고,표 7는상향링크제어채널정보와물리채널사이의맵핑관계를나타낼수있다. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 [228] Table 6 can show the mapping relationship between the uplink transmission channel and the physical channel, and Table 7 can show the mapping relationship between the uplink control channel information and the physical channel. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[표 6]
Figure imgf000031_0001
[Table 6]
Figure imgf000031_0001
[23이 [표 7]
Figure imgf000031_0002
[23] [Table 7]
Figure imgf000031_0002
[231] 표 8은하향링크전송채널과물리채널사이의맵핑관계를나타낼수있고,표 9는하향링크제어채널정보와물리채널사이의맵핑관계를나타낼수있다. [231] Table 8 can show the mapping relationship between the downlink transmission channel and the physical channel, and Table 9 can show the mapping relationship between the downlink control channel information and the physical channel.
[232] [표 8]
Figure imgf000031_0003
[232] [Table 8]
Figure imgf000031_0003
[233] [표 9]
Figure imgf000031_0004
[233] [Table 9]
Figure imgf000031_0004
[234] 송채널과물리채널사이의맵핑관계를나타낼수있고,표 11은 제어채널정보와물리채널사이의맵핑관계를나타낼수있다. [234] The mapping relationship between the song channel and the physical channel can be shown, and Table 11 can show the mapping relationship between the control channel information and the physical channel.
[235] [표 1이
Figure imgf000031_0005
[235] [Table 1
Figure imgf000031_0005
[236] [표 11]
Figure imgf000031_0006
[236] [Table 11]
Figure imgf000031_0006
[237] 도 21을참조하면,단계 S100에서 ,전송측은전송블록 (Transport Block, TB)에 대하여인코딩을수행할수있다. MAC계층으로부터의데이터및제어 스트림 (stream)은 PHY계증에서무선전송링크 (radio transmission link)를통해 전송 (transport)및제어서비스를제공하도록인코딩될수있다.예를들어, MAC 계증으로부터의 TB는전송즉 (transmitting side)에서코드워드로인코딩될수 있다·채널코딩방식 (scheme)은에러검줄 (error detection),에러정정 (error correcting),레이트매칭 (rate matching),인터리빙 (interleaving)및물리채널로부터 분리된제어정보또는전송채널의조합일수있다.또는,채널코딩 Referring to FIG. 21, in step S100, the transmission side may perform encoding on a transport block (TB). Data and control streams from the MAC layer can be encoded to provide transport and control services over a radio transmission link in the PHY implementation, e.g. TB from the MAC inheritance That is, it can be encoded as a codeword on the (transmitting side) channel coding scheme is error detection, error correcting, rate matching, interleaving, and separation from physical channels. It may be a combination of controlled information or transmission channels. Or, channel coding
방左! (scheme)은에러 ¾줄 (error detection),에러정정 (error correcting),러 1 °|트 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 매칭 (rate matching),인터리빙 (interleaving)및물리채널상에맵핑된제어정보 또는전송채널의조합일수있다. Bang! (scheme) is an error ¾ line (error detection), error correcting, error 1 °| 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 It may be a combination of rate matching, interleaving, and control information mapped on a physical channel or a transmission channel.
[238] NR시스템에서,이하의채널코딩방식이전송채널의상이한타입및제어 정보의상이한타입에대하여사용될수있다.예를들어,전송채널타입별채널 코딩방식은표 12과같을수있다.예를들어,제어정보타입별채널코딩 방식은표 13과같을수있다. [238] In the NR system, the following channel coding scheme can be used for different types of transport channels and different types of control information. For example, the channel coding scheme for each transport channel type can be as shown in Table 12. For example For example, the channel coding method for each control information type can be as shown in Table 13.
[239] [표 12] [239] [Table 12]
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000032_0001
[24이 [표 13]
Figure imgf000032_0002
[24 is [Table 13]
Figure imgf000032_0002
[241] 예를들어,폴라코드가 PSCCH에적용될수있다.예를들어, LDPC코드가 PSSCH를통해전송되는 TB에적용될수있다. [241] For example, a polar code can be applied to the PSCCH. For example, the LDPC code can be applied to a TB transmitted over the PSSCH.
[242] TB (예를들어 , MAC PDU)의전송을위해 ,전송측은 TB에 CRC(cyclic [242] For transmission of TB (eg, MAC PDU), the transmitting side
redundancy check)시퀀스를어태치할수있다.따라서 ,전송즉은수신즉에 대하여오류검출을제공할수있다. SL통신에서,상기전송측은전송단말일수 있고,상기수신측은수신단말일수있다. NR시스템에서,통신장치는 UL-SCH 및 DL-SCH등을인코딩/디코딩하는데 LDPC코드를사용할수있다. NR 시스템은두개의 LDPC베이스그래프 (즉,두개의 LDPC베이스메트릭스)를 지원할수있다.두개의 LDPC베이스그래프는작은 TB에대하여최적화된 LDPC베이스그래프 1및큰 TB에대한 LDPC베이스그래프일수있다.전송 측은 TB의크기및코딩레이트 (R)을기반으로 LDPC베이스그래프 1또는 2를 선택할수있다.코딩레이트는 MCS (modulation coding scheme)인덱스 (I_MCS)에 의해지시될수있다. MCS인덱스는 PUSCH또는 PDSCH를스케줄링하는 PDCCH에의해단말에게동적으로제공될수있다.또는, MCS인덱스는 UL configured grant 2또는 DL SPS를 (재 )초기화하거나활성화하는 PDCCH에의해 단말에게동적으로제공될수있다. MCS인덱스는 UL configured grant타입 1과 관련된 RRC시그널링에의해단말에게제공될수있다. CRC가어태치된 TB가 선택된 LDPC베이스그래프에대한최대코드블록사이즈보다크면,전송측은 CRC가어태치된 TB를복수의코드블록으로분할할수있다.그리고,전송측은 추가적인 CRC시퀀스를각코드블록에어태치할수있다. LDPC베이스그래프 1및 LDPC베이스그래프 2에대한최대코드블록사이즈는각각 8448비트및 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 The redundancy check) sequence can be attached, thus providing error detection on the transmission or reception. In SL communication, the transmitting side may be a transmitting terminal, and the receiving side may be a receiving terminal. In the NR system, the communication device can use the LDPC code to encode/decode UL-SCH and DL-SCH. The NR system can support two LDPC base graphs (i.e. two LDPC base metrics), two LDPC base graphs can be optimized LDPC base graph 1 for small TB and LDPC base graph for large TB. The LDPC base graph 1 or 2 can be selected based on the TB size and the coding rate (R). The coding rate can be indicated by the modulation coding scheme (MCS) index (I_MCS). The MCS index may be dynamically provided to the terminal by the PDCCH scheduling the PUSCH or the PDSCH. Alternatively, the MCS index may be dynamically provided to the terminal by the PDCCH that (re)initializes or activates the UL configured grant 2 or DL SPS. . The MCS index may be provided to the terminal by RRC signaling related to UL configured grant type 1. If the CRC attached TB is larger than the maximum code block size for the selected LDPC base graph, the transmitting side can divide the CRC-attached TB into multiple code blocks, and the transmitting side can attach an additional CRC sequence to each code block. have. The maximum code block size for LDPC Basegraph 1 and LDPC Basegraph 2 is 8448 bits and 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
3480비트일수있다. CRC가어태치된 TB가선택된 LDPC베이스그래프에대한 최대코드블록사이즈보다크지않으면,전송측은 CRC가부착된 TB를선택된 LDPC베이스그래프로인코딩할수있다.전송측은 TB의각코드블록을 선택된 LDPC기본그래프로인코딩할수있다.그리고, LDPC코딩된블록들은 개별적으로레이트매칭될수있다.코드블록연결은 PDSCH또는 PUSCH상의 전송을위한코드워드를생성하기위해수행될수있다. PDSCH에대해 ,최대두 개의코드워드 (즉,최대두개의 TB)가 PDSCH상에서동시에전송될수있다. PUSCH는 UL-SCH데이터및레이어 1및/또는 2제어정보의전송에사용될수 있다.비록도 21에도시되지않았지만,레이어 1및/또는 2제어정보는 UL-SCH 데이터에대한코드워드와멀티플렉싱될수있다. May be 3480 bits. If the CRC attached TB is not larger than the maximum code block size for the selected LDPC base graph, the transmitting side can encode the CRC-attached TB into the selected LDPC base graph. The transmitting side encodes each code block of the TB into the selected LDPC basic graph. And, LDPC-coded blocks can be individually rate matched. Code block concatenation can be performed to generate codewords for transmission on the PDSCH or PUSCH. For the PDSCH, up to two codewords (ie, up to two TBs) can be transmitted simultaneously on the PDSCH. PUSCH may be used for transmission of UL-SCH data and layer 1 and/or 2 control information. Although not shown in FIG. 21, layer 1 and/or 2 control information may be multiplexed with codewords for UL-SCH data. have.
[243] 단계 S101및 S102에서,전송측은코드워드에대하여스크램블링및변조를 수행할수있다.코드워드의비트들은복소수값변조심볼 (complex-valued modulation symbol)의블록을생성하기위해스크램블및변조될수있다. [243] In steps S101 and S102, the transmitting side can perform scrambling and modulation on the codeword. The bits of the codeword can be scrambled and modulated to generate a block of a complex-valued modulation symbol. .
[244] 단계 S103에서,전송측은레이어맵핑을수행할수있다.상기코드워드의 [244] In step S103, the transmitting side may perform layer mapping.
복소수값변조심볼들은하나이상의 MIMO(multiple input multiple output) 레이어에맵핑될수있다.코드워드는최대네개의레이어에맵핑될수있다. PDSCH는두개의코드워드를캐리 (carry)할수있고,따라서 PDSCH는 8 -레이어 전송까지지원할수있다. PUSCH는싱글코드워드를지원할수있고,따라서 PUSCH는최대 4 -레이어전송을지원할수있다. Complex modulated symbols can be mapped to one or more multiple input multiple output (MIMO) layers; codewords can be mapped to up to four layers. The PDSCH can carry two codewords, and thus the PDSCH can support up to 8-layer transmission. PUSCH can support a single codeword, and therefore, PUSCH can support up to 4-layer transmission.
[245] 단계 S104에서 ,전송측은프리코딩변환을수행할수있다.하향링크전송 [245] In step S104, the transmission side can perform precoding conversion. Downlink transmission
파형은 CP(cyclic prefix)를사용하는일반적인 OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)일수있다.하향링크에대하여 ,변환프리코딩 (transform precoding) (즉,이산퓨리에변환 (Discrete Fourier Transform, DFT))이적용되지 않을수있다. The waveform may be a general OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) using a cyclic prefix (CP). For the downlink, transform precoding (i.e., Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)) is not applied. I can't.
[246] 상향링크전송파형은디스에이블또는인에이블될수있는 DFT스프레딩을 수행하는변환프리코딩기능을가지는 CP를사용하는종래의 OFDM일수있다. NR시스템에서 ,상향링크에대하여 ,만약인에이블되면,변환프리코딩은 선택적으로적용될수있다.변환프리코딩은파형의 PAPR(peak-to-average power ratio)을줄이기위해상향링크데이터를특별한방식으로확산하는것일 수있다.변환프리코딩은 DFT의한형태일수있다.즉, NR시스템은상향링크 파형에대하여두가지옵션을지원할수있다.하나는 CP-OFDM(DL파형과 동일)일수있고,다른하나는 DFT-s-OFDM일수있다.단말이 CP-OFDM또는 DFT-s-OFDM을사용해야하는지여부는 RRC파라미터를통해기지국에의해 결정될수있다. [246] The uplink transmission waveform may be a conventional OFDM using a CP having a transform precoding function that performs DFT spreading that can be disabled or enabled. In the NR system, for the uplink, if enabled, conversion precoding can be selectively applied. Conversion precoding is a special way to reduce the uplink data to reduce the peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) of the waveform. Transformation precoding can be a form of DFT, i.e. the NR system can support two options for the uplink waveform, one can be CP-OFDM (same as the DL waveform), the other May be DFT-s-OFDM. Whether the terminal should use CP-OFDM or DFT-s-OFDM can be determined by the base station via the RRC parameter.
[247] 단계 S105에서,전송측은서브캐리어맵핑을수행할수있다.레이어는안테나 포트에맵핑될수있다.하향링크에서,레이어대안테나포트맵핑에대하여, 투명방식 (transparent manner) (비-코드북기반)맵핑이지원될수있고,빔포밍 또는 MIMO프리코딩이어떻게수행되는지는단말에게투명 (transparent)할수 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 있다.상향링크에서,레이어대안테나포트맵핑에대하여,비-코드북기반맵핑 및코드북기반맵핑이모두지원될수있다. [247] In step S105, the transmitting side can perform subcarrier mapping. The layer can be mapped to an antenna port. In the downlink, for layer-to-antenna port mapping, in a transparent manner (non-codebook based). Mapping can be supported, and how beamforming or MIMO precoding is performed can be transparent to the terminal. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 There is. In the uplink, for layer-to-antenna port mapping, both non-codebook-based mapping and codebook-based mapping can be supported.
[248] 물리채널 (예를들어, PDSCH, PUSCH, PSSCH)의전송에사용되는각안테나 포트 (즉,계층)에대하여,전송측은복소수값변조심볼들을물리채널에할당된 자원블록내의서브캐리어에맵핑할수있다. [248] For each antenna port (i.e., layer) used for transmission of a physical channel (eg, PDSCH, PUSCH, PSSCH), the transmitting side transfers complex-value modulated symbols to the subcarriers in the resource block allocated to the physical channel. Can be mapped.
[249] 단계 S106에서 ,전송측은 OFDM변조를수행할수있다.전송측의통신 [249] In step S106, the transmitting side can perform OFDM modulation.
장치는 CP를가산하고 IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)를수행함으로써 , 안테나포트 (p)상에시간-연속적인 OFDM베이스밴드신호와물리채널에대한 TTI내의 OFDM심볼 (1)에대한서브캐리어스페이싱설정 (U)를생성할수있다. 예를들어 ,각 OFDM심볼에대하여 ,전송측의통신장치는해당 OFDM심볼의 자원블록에맵핑된복소수값변조심볼 (complex-valued modulation symbol)에 대하여 IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)를수행할수있다.그리고,전송즉의 통신장치는 OFDM베이스밴드신호를생성하기위해 IFFT된신호에 CP를 부가할수있다. By adding CP and performing IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform), the device sets the time-continuous OFDM baseband signal on the antenna port (p) and subcarrier spacing for the OFDM symbol (1) in the TTI for the physical channel. (U) can be created. For example, for each OFDM symbol, the communication device on the transmitting side can perform Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) on the complex-valued modulation symbol mapped to the resource block of the corresponding OFDM symbol. In addition, a communication device that is transmitted can add a CP to the IFFT signal to generate an OFDM baseband signal.
[25이 단계 S107에서 ,전송측은상향변환 (up-conversion)을수행할수있다.전송 [25 In this step S107, the transmission side can perform up-conversion.
측의통신장치는안테나포트 (머에대한 OFDM베이스밴드신호,서브캐리어 스페이싱설정 (u)및 OFDM심볼 (1)을물리채널이할당된셀의반송파 The communication device of the side is the antenna port (OFDM baseband signal to the target, subcarrier spacing setting (u) and OFDM symbol (1)) to the carrier of the cell to which the physical channel is assigned.
주파수 (f0)로상향변환할수있다. It can up-convert to frequency (f0).
[251] 도 38의프로세서 (102, 202)는인코딩,스크램블링,변조,레이어맵핑, [251] The processors 102 and 202 of FIG. 38 are encoding, scrambling, modulation, layer mapping,
(상향링크에대한)프리코딩변환,서브캐리어맵핑및 OFDM변조를 Precoding transformation (for uplink), subcarrier mapping, and OFDM modulation
수행하도록설정될수있다. Can be set to perform.
[252] 도 22는본개시의일실시 예에따른,수신측물리계층프로세싱을나타낸다. 22 shows the physical layer processing of the receiving side according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[253] 수신측의물리계층프로세싱은기본적으로전송측의물리계층프로세싱의 역프로세싱일수있다. [253] The physical layer processing of the receiving side may basically be the reverse processing of the physical layer processing of the transmitting side.
[254] 단계 SH0에서,수신즉은주파수하향변환 (down-conversion)을수행할수 [254] In step SH0, upon reception, a frequency down-conversion can be performed.
있다.수신측의통신장치는안테나를통해반송파주파수의 RF신호를수신할 수있다.반송파주파수에서 RF신호를수신하는송수신기 (106, 206)는 OFDM 베이스밴드신호를획득하기위해 RF신호의반송파주파수를베이스밴드로 하향변환할수있다. The communication device of the receiving side can receive the RF signal of the carrier frequency through the antenna. The transceivers 106 and 206 that receive the RF signal at the carrier frequency are the carrier frequency of the RF signal to obtain the OFDM baseband signal. Can be downconverted to the baseband.
[255] 단계 Si l l에서,수신측은 OFDM복조 (demodulation)를수행할수있다.수신 즉의통신장치는 CP분리 (detachment)및 FFT(Fast Fourier Transform)를통해 복소수값변조심볼 (complex-valued modulation symbol)을획득할수있다.예를 들어,각각의 OFDM심볼에대하여,수신측의통신장치는 OFDM베이스밴드 신호로부터 CP를제거할수있다.그리고,수신측의통신장치는안테나포트 (p), 서브캐리어스페이싱 (u)및 OFDM심볼 (1)을위한복소수값변조심볼을 획득하기위해 CP-제거된 OFDM베이스밴드신호에대하여 FFT를수행할수 있다. [255] In step Si ll, the receiving side can perform OFDM demodulation. The receiving or communication device uses a complex-valued modulation symbol through CP separation and Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). For example, for each OFDM symbol, the communication device on the receiving side can remove the CP from the OFDM baseband signal, and the communication device on the receiving side can obtain the antenna port (p) and subcarrier. FFT can be performed on the CP-removed OFDM baseband signal to obtain the complex-value modulated symbol for spacing (u) and OFDM symbol (1).
[256] 단계 S112에서,수신즉은서브캐리어디맵핑 (subcarrier demapping)을수행할 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 수있다.서브캐리어디맵핑은대응하는물리 채널의복소수값변조심볼을 획득하기 위해복소수값변조심볼에 대하여수행될수있다.예를들어,단말의 프로세서는 BWP(Bandwidth Part)에서수신된복소수값변조심볼중에서 PDSCH에속하는서브캐리어에 맵핑되는복소수값변조심볼을획득할수 있다. [256] In step S112, subcarrier demapping is to be performed immediately upon reception. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 can be done. Subcarrier demapping can be performed on the complex value modulation symbol to obtain the complex value modulation symbol of the corresponding physical channel. For example, the terminal The processor of can acquire a complex value modulation symbol mapped to a subcarrier belonging to the PDSCH from among the complex value modulation symbols received from the BWP (Bandwidth Part).
[257] 단계 S113에서,수신즉은변환디-프리코딩 (transform de-precoding)을수행할 수있다.변환프리코딩이상향링크물리 채널에 대해 인에이블되면,변환 디 -프리코딩 (예를들어 , IDFT(In verse Discrete Fourier Transform))이상향링크 물리 채널의복소수값변조심볼에 대하여수행될수있다.하향링크물리 채널 및변환프리코딩이 디스에이블된상향링크물리채널에 대하여,변환 [257] In step S113, transform de-precoding may be performed immediately upon reception. Transform de-precoding is enabled for the unidirectional link physical channel, and transform de-precoding (for example, IDFT (In verse Discrete Fourier Transform) can be performed on the complex-value modulated symbol of the uplink physical channel. On the downlink physical channel and the uplink physical channel in which transformation precoding is disabled, transformation
디-프리코딩은수행되지 않을수있다. De-precoding may not be performed.
[258] 단계 S114에서,수신즉은레이어 디맵핑 (layer demapping)을수행할수있다. 복소수값변조심볼은하나또는두개의코드워드로디맵핑될수있다. [258] In step S114, layer demapping can be performed upon reception. The complex value modulation symbol can be demapped into one or two codewords.
[259] 단계 S115및 S116에서,수신측은복조및디스크램블링을수행할수있다. 코드워드의복소수값변조심볼은복조될수있고,코드워드의비트로 [259] In steps S115 and S116, the receiving side can perform demodulation and descrambling. The complex value modulation symbol of a codeword can be demodulated and
디스크램블링될수있다. Can be descrambled.
[26이 단계 S117에서,수신측은디코딩을수행할수있다.코드워드는 TB로 [26 In this step S117, the receiving side can perform decoding. The codeword is TB.
디코딩될수있다. UL-SCH및 DL-SCH에 대하여, LDPC베이스그래프 1또는 2는 TB의사이즈및코딩 레이트 ( 를기반으로선택될수있다.코드워드는 하나또는복수의코딩된블록을포함할수있다.각코딩된블록은선택된 LDPC 베이스그래프로 CRC가어태치된코드블록또는 CRC가어태치된 TB로 디코딩될수있다.코드블록세그멘테이션 (segmentation)이 전송측에서 CRC가 어태치된 TB에 대하여수행되면, CRC가어태치된코드블록들각각으로부터 CRC시퀀스가제거될수있고,코드블록들이 획득될수있다.코드블록은 CRC가어태치된 TB로연결될수있다. TB CRC시퀀스는 CRC가첨부된 Can be decoded. For UL-SCH and DL-SCH, LDPC base graph 1 or 2 may be selected based on the size of TB and the coding rate (. Codewords may include one or more coded blocks. Each coded block The selected LDPC base graph can be decoded into a CRC-attached code block or a CRC-attached TB. If code block segmentation is performed on the TB-attached TB at the transmission side, the CRC-attached code block The CRC sequence can be removed from each of them, and code blocks can be obtained. The code blocks can be connected to the TB to which the CRC is attached. The TB CRC sequence is the CRC attached.
TB로부터 제거될수있고,이에의해 TB가획득될수있다. TB는 MAC계층으로 전달될수있다. It can be removed from TB, whereby TB can be obtained. TB can be delivered to the MAC layer.
[261] 도 38의프로세서 (102, 202)는 OFDM복조,서브캐리어 디맵핑 ,레이어디맵핑 , 복조,디스크램블링 및디코딩을수행하도록설정될수있다. The processors 102 and 202 of FIG. 38 may be configured to perform OFDM demodulation, subcarrier demapping, layer demapping, demodulation, descrambling, and decoding.
[262] 이상에서설명한전송/수신측에서의물리 계층프로세싱에서 ,서브캐리어 맵핑과관련된시간및주파수도메인자원 (예를들어 , OFDM심볼,서브캐리어 , 반송파주파수), OFDM변조및주파수상향/하향변환은자원할당 (예를들어 , 상향링크그랜트,하향링크할당)을기반으로결정될수있다. [262] In the physical layer processing at the transmit/receive side described above, time and frequency domain resources related to subcarrier mapping (for example, OFDM symbol, subcarrier, carrier frequency), OFDM modulation and frequency up/down conversion are resources. It can be determined based on the allocation (eg, uplink grant, downlink allocation).
[263] 이하, HARQ(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request)절차에 대하여설명한다. [263] Hereinafter, a HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) procedure will be described.
[264] 통신의신뢰성을확보하기위한에러보상기법은 FEC(Forward Error [264] The error compensation method for securing the reliability of communication is FEC (Forward Error
Correction)방식 (scheme)과 ARQ(Automatic Repeat Request)방식을포함할수 있다. FEC방식에서는정보비트들에 여분의 에러 정정코드를추가시킴으로써 , 수신단에서의 에러를정정할수있다. FEC방식은시간지연이 적고송수신단 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 사이에별도로주고받는정보가필요없다는장점이있지만,양호한채널 환경에서시스템효율이떨어지는단점이있다. ARQ방식은전송신뢰성을높일 수있지만,시간지연이생기게되고열악한채널환경에서시스템효율이 떨어지는단점이있다. Correction) method (scheme) and ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) method can be included. In the FEC method, errors at the receiving end can be corrected by adding an extra error correction code to the information bits. FEC method has little delay and transmits and receives 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{ 2020/002889 There is an advantage that there is no need to send and receive information separately, but there is a disadvantage that the system efficiency decreases in a good channel environment. Although the ARQ method can increase transmission reliability, there is a disadvantage that a time delay occurs and the system efficiency decreases in a poor channel environment.
[265] HARQ(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request)방식은 FEC와 ARQ를결합한것으로, 물리계층이수신한데이터가복호할수없는오류를포함하는지여부를 확인하고,오류가발생하면재전송을요구함으로써성능을높일수있다. [265] The HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) method is a combination of FEC and ARQ. It checks whether the data received by the physical layer contains an undecryptable error, and if an error occurs, performance can be improved by requesting retransmission. .
[266] SL유니캐스트및그룹캐스트의경우,물리계층에서의 HARQ피드백및 [266] For SL unicast and groupcast, HARQ feedback and
HARQ컴바이닝 (combining)이지원될수있다.예를들어,수신단말이자원할당 모드 1또는 2로동작하는경우,수신단말은 PSSCH를전송단말로부터수신할 수있고,수신단말은 PSFCH(Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel)를통해 HARQ combining can be supported. For example, when the receiving terminal operates in resource allocation mode 1 or 2, the receiving terminal can receive the PSSCH from the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can receive PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel). )Through the
SFCI(Sidelink Feedback Con仕 ol Information)포맷을사용하여 PSSCH에대한 HARQ피드백을전송단말에게전송할수있다. The HARQ feedback for the PSSCH can be transmitted to the transmitting terminal using the SFCI (Sidelink Feedback Conformation Information) format.
[267] 예를들어, SL HARQ피드백은유니캐스트에대하여인에이블될수있다.이 경우, non-CBG(non-Code Block Group)동작에서,수신단말이상기수신단말을 타겟으로하는 PSCCH를디코딩하고,및수신단말이상기 PSCCH와관련된 전송블록을성공적으로디코딩하면,수신단말은 HARQ-ACK을생성할수 있다.그리고,수신단말은 HARQ-ACK을전송단말에게전송할수있다.반면, 수신단말이상기수신단말을타겟으로하는 PSCCH를디코딩한이후에,수신 단말이상기 PSCCH와관련된전송블록을성공적으로디코딩하지못하면,수신 단말은 HARQ-NACK을생성할수있다.그리고,수신단말은 HARQ-NACK을 전송단말에게전송할수있다. [267] For example, SL HARQ feedback can be enabled for unicast. In this case, in a non-Code Block Group (non-CBG) operation, the receiving terminal decodes the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal, And if the receiving terminal successfully decodes the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal can generate HARQ-ACK. And, the receiving terminal can transmit HARQ-ACK to the transmitting terminal. On the other hand, the receiving terminal can transmit the receiving terminal. After decoding the target PSCCH, if the receiving terminal cannot successfully decode the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal can generate HARQ-NACK. And, the receiving terminal can transmit HARQ-NACK to the transmitting terminal. have.
[268] 예를들어, SL HARQ피드백은그룹캐스트에대하여인에이블될수있다.예를 들어, non-CBG동작에서,두가지 HARQ피드백옵션이그룹캐스트에대하여 지원될수있다. [268] For example, SL HARQ feedback can be enabled for groupcast. For example, in non-CBG operation, two HARQ feedback options can be supported for groupcast.
[269] (1)그룹캐스트옵션 1:수신단말이상기수신단말을타겟으로하는 PSCCH를 디코딩한이후에,수신단말이상기 PSCCH와관련된전송블록의디코딩에 실패하면,수신단말은 HARQ-NACK을 PSFCH를통해전송단말에게전송할수 있다.반면,수신단말이상기수신단말을타겟으로하는 PSCCH를디코딩하고, 및수신단말이상기 PSCCH와관련된전송블록을성공적으로디코딩하면,수신 단말은 HARQ-ACK을전송단말에게전송하지않을수있다. [269] (1) Groupcast option 1: After the receiving terminal decodes the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal, if the receiving terminal fails to decode the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal sends HARQ-NACK to the PSFCH. On the other hand, when the receiving terminal decodes the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal, and the receiving terminal successfully decodes the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal transmits HARQ-ACK to the transmitting terminal. You can't.
[27이 (2)그룹캐스트옵션 2:수신단말이상기수신단말을타겟으로하는 PSCCH를 디코딩한이후에,수신단말이상기 PSCCH와관련된전송블록의디코딩에 실패하면,수신단말은 HARQ-NACK을 PSFCH를통해전송단말에게전송할수 있다.그리고,수신단말이상기수신단말을타겟으로하는 PSCCH를 [27] (2) Groupcast option 2: After the receiving terminal decodes the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal, if the receiving terminal fails to decode the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal uses HARQ-NACK to perform the PSFCH. It can be transmitted to the transmitting terminal through the transmission terminal. And, the receiving terminal uses the PSCCH targeting the receiving terminal.
디코딩하고,및수신단말이상기 PSCCH와관련된전송블록을성공적으로 디코딩하면,수신단말은 HARQ-ACK을 PSFCH를통해전송단말에게전송할수 있다. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 After decoding and the receiving terminal successfully decodes the transport block related to the PSCCH, the receiving terminal can transmit HARQ-ACK to the transmitting terminal through the PSFCH. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[271] 예를들어,그룹캐스트옵션 1이 SL HARQ피드백에사용되면,그룹캐스트 통신을수행하는모든단말은 PSFCH자원을공유할수있다.예를들어,동일한 그룹에속하는단말은동일한 PSFCH자원을이용하여 HARQ피드백을전송할 수있다. [271] For example, if groupcast option 1 is used for SL HARQ feedback, all terminals performing groupcast communication can share PSFCH resources. For example, terminals belonging to the same group use the same PSFCH resource. Thus, HARQ feedback can be transmitted.
[272] 예를들어,그룹캐스트옵션 2가 SL HARQ피드백에사용되면,그룹캐스트 통신을수행하는각각의단말은 HARQ피드백전송을위해서로다른 PSFCH 자원을사용할수있다.예를들어,동일한그룹에속하는단말은서로다른 PSFCH자원을이용하여 HARQ피드백을전송할수있다. [272] For example, if groupcast option 2 is used for SL HARQ feedback, each terminal performing groupcast communication can use a different PSFCH resource for HARQ feedback transmission. For example, in the same group. The belonging terminal may transmit HARQ feedback using different PSFCH resources.
[273] 예를들어, SL HARQ피드백이그룹캐스트에대하여인에이블될때,수신 [273] For example, when SL HARQ feedback is enabled for groupcast, receive
단말은 TX-RX(Transmission-Reception)거리및/또는 RSRP를기반으로 HARQ 피드백을전송단말에게전송할지여부를결정할수있다. The terminal may determine whether to transmit HARQ feedback to the transmitting terminal based on the TX-RX (Transmission-Reception) distance and/or RSRP.
[274] 예를들어,그룹캐스트옵션 1에서 TX-RX거리기반 HARQ피드백의경우, TX-RX거리가통신범위요구사항보다작거나같으면,수신단말은 PSSCH에 대한 HARQ피드백을전송단말에게전송할수있다.반면, TX-RX거리가통신 범위요구사항보다크면,수신단말은 PSSCH에대한 HARQ피드백을전송 단말에게전송하지않을수있다.예를들어,전송단말은상기 PSSCH와관련된 SCI를통해상기전송단말의위치를수신단말에게알릴수있다.예를들어, 상기 PSSCH와관련된 SCI는제 2 SCI일수있다.예를들어,수신단말은 TX-RX 거리를상기수신단말의위치와상기전송단말의위치를기반으로추정또는 획득할수있다.예를들어,수신단말은 PSSCH와관련된 SCI를디코딩하여, 상기 PSSCH에사용되는통신범위요구사항을알수있다. [274] For example, in the case of TX-RX distance-based HARQ feedback in groupcast option 1, if the TX-RX distance is less than or equal to the communication range requirement, the receiving terminal can transmit HARQ feedback for the PSSCH to the transmitting terminal. On the other hand, if the TX-RX distance is greater than the communication range requirement, the receiving terminal may not transmit HARQ feedback for the PSSCH to the transmitting terminal. For example, the transmitting terminal may not transmit the HARQ feedback on the PSSCH to the transmitting terminal through the SCI related to the PSSCH. For example, the SCI associated with the PSSCH may be a second SCI. For example, the receiving terminal may determine the TX-RX distance based on the location of the receiving terminal and the location of the transmitting terminal. For example, the receiving terminal decodes the SCI related to the PSSCH to know the communication range requirements used for the PSSCH.
[275] 예를들어,자원할당모드 1의경우에, PSFCH및 PSSCH사이의시간은 [275] For example, in the case of resource allocation mode 1, the time between PSFCH and PSSCH is
설정되거나,미리설정될수있다.유니캐스트및그룹캐스트의경우, SL상에서 재전송이필요하면,이것은 PUCCH를사용하는커버리지내의단말에의해 기지국에게지시될수있다.전송단말은 HARQ ACK/NACK의형태가아닌 SR(Scheduling Request)/BSR(Buffer Status Report)과같은형태로상기전송 단말의서빙기지국에게지시 (indication)를전송할수도있다.또한,기지국이 상기지시를수신하지않더라도,기지국은 SL재전송자원을단말에게스케줄링 할수있다.예를들어,자원할당모드 2의경우에, PSFCH및 PSSCH사이의 시간은설정되거나,미리설정될수있다. In the case of unicast and groupcast, if retransmission is required on the SL, this can be instructed to the base station by the terminal in the coverage using PUCCH. The transmitting terminal is not in the form of HARQ ACK/NACK. It is also possible to transmit an indication to the serving base station of the transmitting terminal in the form of SR (Scheduling Request)/BSR (Buffer Status Report). In addition, even if the base station does not receive the above instruction, the base station transmits the SL retransmission resource to the terminal. For example, in the case of resource allocation mode 2, the time between PSFCH and PSSCH may be set or may be preset.
[276] 예를들어 ,캐리어에서단말의전송관점에서 , PSCOi/PSSCH와 PSFCH사이의 TDM이슬롯에서 SL를위한 PSFCH포맷에대하여허용될수있다.예를들어 , 하나의심볼을가지는시퀀스-기반 PSFCH포맷이지원될수있다.여기서 ,상기 하나의심볼은 AGC구간이아닐수있다.예를들어,상기시퀀스-기반 PSFCH 포맷은유니캐스트및그룹캐스트에적용될수있다. [276] For example, in terms of the transmission of the terminal in the carrier, the TDM between PSCOi/PSSCH and PSFCH may be allowed for the PSFCH format for SL in the slot. For example, a sequence-based PSFCH with one symbol Format may be supported. Here, the single symbol may not be an AGC section. For example, the sequence-based PSFCH format may be applied to unicast and groupcast.
[277] 예를들어,자원풀과연관된슬롯내에서, PSFCH자원은 N슬롯구간으로 주기적으로설정되거나,사전에설정될수있다.예를들어, N은 1이상의하나 이상의값으로설정될수있다.예를들어, N은 1, 2또는 4일수있다.예를들어, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 특정자원풀에서의전송에대한 HARQ피드백은상기특정자원풀상의 [277] For example, in a slot associated with the resource pool, the PSFCH resource may be periodically set to an N slot section, or may be set in advance. For example, N may be set to one or more values of 1 or more. For example, N can be 1, 2 or 4. For example, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 HARQ feedback on transmission in a specific resource pool is
PSFCH를통해서만전송될수있다. It can only be transmitted over PSFCH.
[278] 예를들어,전송단말이슬롯 # X내지슬롯 # N에걸쳐 PSSCH를수신단말에게 전송하는경우,수신단말은상기 PSSCH에대한 HARQ피드백을슬롯 #(N + [278] For example, if the transmitting terminal transmits the PSSCH to the receiving terminal over slots #X to slots #N, the receiving terminal will send HARQ feedback for the PSSCH to slot #(N +
A)에서전송단말에게전송할수있다.예를들어,슬롯 # (N + A)은 PSFCH 자원을포함할수있다.여기서 ,예를들어 , A는 K보다크거나같은가장작은 정수일수있다.예를들어, 는논리적슬롯의개수일수있다.이경우, 는자원 풀내의슬롯의개수일수있다.또는,예를들어, K는물리적슬롯의개수일수 있다.이경우, K는자원풀내부및외부의슬롯의개수일수있다. A) can transmit to the transmitting terminal. For example, slot # (N + A) may contain a PSFCH resource, where, for example, A may be the smallest integer greater than or equal to K. For example For example, can be the number of logical slots. In this case, can be the number of slots in the resource pool. Or, for example, K can be the number of physical slots. In this case, K can be the number of slots inside and outside the resource pool. Can be
[279] 예를들어,전송단말이수신단말에게전송한하나의 PSSCH에대한응답으로, 수신단말이 PSFCH자원상에서 HARQ피드백을전송하는경우,수신단말은 설정된자원풀내에서암시적메커니즘을기반으로상기 PSFCH자원의주파수 영역 (frequency domain)및/또는코드영역 (code domain)을결정할수있다.예를 들어,수신단말은 PSCCH/PSSCH/PSFCH와관련된슬롯인덱스, [279] For example, in response to one PSSCH transmitted by the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal, when the receiving terminal transmits HARQ feedback on the PSFCH resource, the receiving terminal is based on the implicit mechanism within the set resource pool. The frequency domain and/or the code domain of the resource can be determined. For example, the receiving terminal has a slot index related to PSCCH/PSSCH/PSFCH,
PSCCH/PSSCH와관련된서브채널,및/또는그룹캐스트옵션 2기반의 HARQ 피드백을위한그룹에서각각의수신단말을구별하기위한식별자중적어도 어느하나를기반으로, PSFCH자원의주파수영역및/또는코드영역을결정할 수있다.그리고/또는,예를들어,수신단말은 SL RSRP, SINR, L1소스 ID, 및/또는위치정보중적어도어느하나를기반으로, PSFCH자원의주파수영역 및/또는코드영역을결정할수있다. The frequency domain and/or code domain of the PSFCH resource based on at least one of the identifiers for discriminating each receiving terminal in the group for HARQ feedback based on PSCCH/PSSCH-related subchannels and/or groupcast option 2 And/or, for example, the receiving terminal determines the frequency domain and/or code domain of the PSFCH resource based on at least one of SL RSRP, SINR, L1 source ID, and/or location information. can do.
[28이 예를들어 ,단말의 PSFCH를통한 HARQ피드백전송과 PSFCH를통한 HARQ 피드백수신이중첩되는경우,상기단말은우선순위규칙을기반으로 PSFCH를 통한 HARQ피드백전송또는 PSFCH를통한 HARQ피드백수신중어느하나를 선택할수있다.예를들어,우선순위규칙은관련 PSCCH/PSSCH의최소우선 순위지시 (priority indication)를기반으로할수있다. [28] For example, if HARQ feedback transmission through PSFCH of the terminal and HARQ feedback reception through PSFCH are overlapped, the terminal is transmitting HARQ feedback through PSFCH or receiving HARQ feedback through PSFCH based on the priority rule. Either can be selected. For example, the priority rule can be based on the priority indication of the associated PSCCH/PSSCH.
[281] 예를들어,단말의복수의단말에대한 PSFCH를통한 HARQ피드백전송이 중첩되는경우,상기단말은우선순위규칙을기반으로특정 HARQ피드백 전송을선택할수있다.예를들어,우선순위규칙은관련 PSCCH/PSSCH의최소 우선순위지시 (priority indication)를기반으로할수있다. [281] For example, when HARQ feedback transmission through PSFCH for a plurality of terminals of a terminal overlaps, the terminal can select specific HARQ feedback transmission based on a priority rule. For example, a priority rule May be based on the minimum priority indication (priority indication) of the associated PSCCH/PSSCH.
[282] 이하,포지셔닝 (positioning)에대하여설명한다. [282] Hereinafter, positioning will be described.
[283] 도 23은본개시의일실시예에따라, NG-RAN (Next Generation-Radio Access Network)또는 E-UTRAN에접속되는 UE에대한측위가가능한, 5G [283] Figure 23 is, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, 5G capable of positioning for a UE connected to a Next Generation-Radio Access Network (NG-RAN) or E-UTRAN
시스템에서의아키텍처의일예를나타낸다. It shows an example of the architecture in the system.
[284] 도 23을참조하면, AMF는특정타겟애와관련된위치서비스에대한요청을 GMLC(Gateway Mobile Location Center)와같은다른엔티티 (entity)로부터 수신하거나, AMF자체에서특정타겟 UE를대신하여위치서비스를 [284] Referring to FIG. 23, AMF receives a request for a location service related to a specific target group from another entity, such as a Gateway Mobile Location Center (GMLC), or a location service on behalf of a specific target UE in the AMF itself. To
시작하기로결정할수있다.그러면, AMF는 LMF(Location Management You can decide to get started, then AMF will use LMF (Location Management
Function)에게위치서비스요청을전송할수있다.상기위치서비스요청을 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 수신한 LMF는상기위치서비스요청을처리하여애의추정된위치등을 포함하는처리결과를 AMF에반환할수있다.한편,위치서비스요청이 AMF이 이외에 GMLC와같은다른엔티티로부터수신된경우에 , AMF는 LMF로부터 수신한처리결과를다른엔티티로전달할수있다. Function) can send a location service request. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 The received LMF can process the above location service request and return the processing result including the estimated location of love to AMF. Meanwhile, the location service request is AMF. In addition to this, when received from another entity such as GMLC, the AMF can forward the processing result received from the LMF to the other entity.
[285] ng-eNB(new generation evolved-NB)및 gNB는위치주정을위한즉정결과를 제공할수있는 NG-RAN의네트워크요소이며,타겟 UE에대한무선신호를 측정하고그결과값을 LMF에전달할수있다.또한, ng-eNB는원격무선 헤드 (remote radio heads)와같은몇몇 TP (Transmission Point)들또는 E-UTRA를 위한 PRS (Positioning Reference Signal)기반비콘시스템을지원하는 PRS전용 모들을제어할수있다. [285] ng-eNB (new generation evolved-NB) and gNB are network elements of NG-RAN that can provide instantaneous results for location administration, measure radio signals to target UEs, and deliver the results to LMF. In addition, the ng-eNB can control several TP (Transmission Points) such as remote radio heads or PRS-only modules that support a PRS (Positioning Reference Signal)-based beacon system for E-UTRA. .
[286] LMF는 E-SMLC(Enhanced Serving Mobile Location Centre)와연결되고, [286] LMF is connected to E-SMLC (Enhanced Serving Mobile Location Center),
E-SMLC는 LMF가 E-UTRAN에접속가능하게할수있다.예를들어, E-SMLC는 LMF가 eNB및/또는 E-UTRAN내의 PRS전용 TP들로부터전송된신호를통해 타겟 UE가획득한하향링크측정을이용하여 E-UTRAN의측위방법들중 하나인 OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival)을지원하도록할수있다. The E-SMLC allows the LMF to access the E-UTRAN. For example, the E-SMLC is the downlink acquired by the target UE through the signal transmitted by the LMF from the eNB and/or PRS-only TPs in the E-UTRAN. Measurement can be used to support OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival), one of the E-UTRAN positioning methods.
[287] 한편, LMF는 SLP(SUPL Location Platform)에연결될수있다. LMF는타겟 UE들에대한서로상이한위치결정서비스들을지원하고관리할수있다. Meanwhile, the LMF can be connected to the SLP (SUPL Location Platform). LMF can support and manage different location services for target UEs.
LMF는 UE의위치측정을획득하기위하여 ,타겟 UE를위한서빙 ng-eNB또는 서빙 gNB와상호작용할수있다.타겟 UE의측위를위하여 , LMF는 The LMF can interact with the serving ng-eNB or the serving gNB for the target UE to obtain the location measurement of the UE. For positioning of the target UE, the LMF is
LCS(Location Service)클라이언트유형 ,요구되는 QoS(Quality of Service), UE 즉위능력 (UE positioning capabilities), gNB즉위능력및 ng-eNB즉위능력등에 기반하여측위방법을결정하고,이러한측위방법을서빙 gNB및/또는서빙 ng-eNB에게적용할수있다.그리고, LMF는타겟 UE에대한위치추정치와위치 추정및속도의정확도와같은추가정보를결정할수있다. SLP는사용자 평면 (user plane)을통해즉위를담당하는 SUPL (Secure User Plane Location) 엔티티이다. The positioning method is determined based on the LCS (Location Service) client type, required QoS (Quality of Service), UE positioning capabilities, gNB and ng-eNB instantaneous capabilities, and serves these positioning methods. gNB And/or serving ng-eNB. And, the LMF may determine the location estimate for the target UE and additional information such as the location estimate and the accuracy of the speed. SLP is a Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) entity that is responsible for enthronment through a user plane.
[288] UE는 NG-RAN및 E-UTRAN,서로상이한 GNSS(Global Navigation Satellite System), TBS(Terrestrial Beacon System), WLAN(Wireless Local Access Network) 접속포인트,블루투스비콘및 UE기압센서등과같은소스등을통해하향링크 신호를측정할수있다. UE는 LCS어플리케이션을포함할수도있고, UE가 접속된네트워크와의통신또는 UE에포함된다른어플리케이션을통해 LCS 어플리케이션에접속할수있다. LCS어플리케이션은 UE의위치를결정하는데 필요한측정및계산기능을포함할수있다.예를들어,애는 GPS (Global Positioning System)과같은독립적인측위기능을포함할수있고, NG-RAN 전송과는독립적으로 UE의위치를보고할수있다.이러한독립적으로획득한 측위정보는네트워크로부터획득한측위정보의보조정보로서활용될수도 있다. [288] UE is a source such as NG-RAN and E-UTRAN, different GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System), TBS (Terrestrial Beacon System), WLAN (Wireless Local Access Network) access point, Bluetooth beacon and UE pressure sensor. The downlink signal can be measured through. The UE may include an LCS application, and may connect to the LCS application through communication with the network to which the UE is connected or other applications included in the UE. The LCS application may include the measurement and calculation functions necessary to determine the location of the UE, for example, it may include independent positioning functions such as the Global Positioning System (GPS), independent of NG-RAN transmission. The location of the UE can be reported. Such independently obtained positioning information can also be used as auxiliary information of the positioning information obtained from the network.
[289] 도 24는본개시의일실시예에따라 UE의위치를측정하기위한네트워크의 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 구현예를나타낸다. [289] Figure 24 is a network for measuring the location of the UE according to an embodiment of the present disclosure 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 shows an implementation example.
[29이 UE가 CM-IDLE(Connection Management - IDLE)상태에있을때 , AMF가위치 서비스요청을수신하면, AMF는 UE와의시그널링연결을수립하고,특정서빙 gNB또는 ng-eNB를할당하기위해네트워크트리거서비스를요청할수있다. 이러한동작과정은도 24에서는생략되어있다.즉,도 24에서는애가연결 모드 (connected mode)에있는것으로가정할수있다.하지만,시그널링및데이터 비활성등의이유로 NG-RAN에의해시그널링연결이측위과정이진행되는 도중에해제될수도있다. [29 When the UE is in CM-IDLE (Connection Management-IDLE) state, when the AMF receives the location service request, the AMF establishes a signaling connection with the UE, and a network trigger to allocate a specific serving gNB or ng-eNB You can request service. This operation process is omitted in Fig. 24. That is, in Fig. 24, it can be assumed that it is in the connected mode. However, for reasons such as signaling and data inactivity, the NG-RAN is used to determine the signalling connection. It may be dismissed during the process.
[291] 도 24를참조하여구체적으로 UE의위치를측정하기위한네트워크의동작 과정을살펴보면,단계 la에서 , GMLC와같은 5GC엔티티는서빙 AMF로타겟 UE의위치를측정하기위한위치서비스를요청할수있다.다만, GMLC가위치 서비스를요청하지않더라도,단계 lb에따라,서빙 AMF가타겟 UE의위치를 측정하기위한위치서비스가필요하다고결정할수도있다.예를들어,긴급 호출 (emergency call)을위한 UE의위치를측정하기위하여 ,서빙 AMF가직접 위치서비스를수행할것을결정할수도있다. [291] Looking at the operation process of the network to specifically measure the location of the UE with reference to FIG. 24, in step la, a 5GC entity such as GMLC can request a location service to measure the location of the target UE with a serving AMF. However, even if the GMLC does not request location services, according to step lb, it may determine that the serving AMF needs location services to measure the location of the target UE, e.g. for an emergency call. In order to measure the location of the UE, the serving AMF may decide to perform location services directly.
[292] 그후, AMF는단계 2에따라, LMF로위치서비스요청을전송하고,단계 3a에 따라, LMF는위치측정데이터또는위치측정보조데이터를획득하기위한 위치절차 (location procedures)를서빙 ng-eNB,서빙 gNB와함께시작할수있다. 추가적으로,단계 3b에따라, LMF는애와함께하향링크측위를위한위치 절차 (location procedures)시작할수있다.예를들어 , LMF는 UE에게위치보조 데이터 (Assistance data defined in 3GPP TS 36.355)를전송하거나,위치추정치 또는위치측정치를획득할수있다.한편,단계 3b는단계 3a가수행된이후 추가적으로수행될수도있으나,단계 3a에대신하여수행될수도있다. [292] Thereafter, the AMF transmits a location service request to the LMF according to step 2, and according to step 3a, the LMF serves location procedures for acquiring location measurement data or location information assistant data. Can start with eNB, serving gNB. In addition, according to step 3b, the LMF may initiate location procedures for downlink positioning along with the failure. For example, the LMF transmits location assistance data defined in 3GPP TS 36.355 to the UE, or Position estimates or position measurements can be obtained. On the other hand, step 3b may be performed additionally after step 3a is performed, but may be performed in place of step 3a.
[293] 단계 4에서 LMF는 AMF에위치서비스응답을제공할수있다.또한,위치 서비스응답에는 UE의위치추정이성공했는지여부에대한정보및 UE의위치 추정치가포함될수있다.그후,단계 la에의해도 24의절차가개시되었다면, AMF는 GMLC와같은 5GC엔티티에위치서비스응답을전달할수있으며 ,단계 lb에의해도 24의절차가개시되었다면, AMF는긴급호출등에관련된위치 서비스제공을위하여 ,위치서비스응답을이용할수있다. [293] In step 4, the LMF may provide a location service response to the AMF. In addition, the location service response may include information on whether or not the location estimation of the UE is successful and an estimate of the location of the UE. Then, to step la If chart 24 procedure is initiated, AMF can deliver location service response to 5GC entities such as GMLC, and if 24 procedure is initiated by step lb, AMF uses location service response to provide location services related to emergency calls, etc. can do.
[294] 도 25은본개시의일실시예에따라 LMF와 UE간의 LPP(LTE Positioning Protocol)메시지전송을지원하기위해사용되는프로토콜레이어의일예를 나타낸다. [294] FIG. 25 shows an example of a protocol layer used to support LPP (LTE Positioning Protocol) message transmission between an LMF and a UE according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[295] LPP PDU는 AMF와 UE간의 NAS PDU를통해전송될수있다.도 25을 [295] The LPP PDU may be transmitted through the NAS PDU between the AMF and the UE.
참조하면, LPP는타겟장치 (예들들어,제어평면에서의 UE또는사용자 평면에서의 SET(SUPL Enabled Terminal))와위치서버 (예를들어 ,제어 평면에서의 LMF또는사용자평면에서의 SLP)사이를연결 (terminated)할수 있다. LPP메시지는 NG-C(NG-Control Plane)인터페이스를통한 NGAP(NG Application Protocol), LTE-Uu및 NR-Uu인터페이스를통한 NAS/RRC등의 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 적절한프로토콜을사용하여중간네트워크인터페이스를통해 For reference, the LPP is used between a target device (e.g., a UE in the control plane or a SET (SUPL Enabled Terminal) in the user plane) and a location server (e.g., LMF in the control plane or SLP in the user plane). Can be terminated. The LPP messages are NGAP (NG Application Protocol) through NG-C (NG-Control Plane) interface, LTE-Uu and NAS/RRC through NR-Uu interface. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Through the middle network interface using the appropriate protocol
트랜스패런트 (Transparent) PDU형태로전달될수있다. LPP프로토콜은다양항 측위방법을사용하여 NR및 LTE를위한측위가가능하도록한다. It can be delivered in the form of a transparent PDU. The LPP protocol enables positioning for NR and LTE using a variety of positioning methods.
[296] 예를들어 , LPP프로토콜을통하여타겟장치및위치서버는상호간의 [296] For example, through the LPP protocol, the target device and the location server
성능 (capability)정보교환,측위를위한보조데이터교환및/또는위치정보를 교환할수있다.또한, LPP메시지를통해에러정보교환및/또는 LPP절차의 중단지시등을수행할수도있다. It is possible to exchange capability information, exchange auxiliary data for positioning, and/or exchange location information. Also, it is possible to exchange error information and/or to stop the LPP procedure through an LPP message.
[297] 도 26는본개시의일실시예에따라 LMF와 NG-RAN노드간의 NRPPa(NR Positioning Protocol A) PDU전송을지원하는데사용되는프로토콜레이어의일 예를나타낸다. 26 shows an example of a protocol layer used to support NRPPa (NR Positioning Protocol A) PDU transmission between LMF and NG-RAN nodes according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[298] NRPPa는 NG-RAN노드와 LMF간의정보교환에사용될수있다.구체적으로 NRPPa는 ng-eNB에서 LMF로전송되는측정을위한 E-CID(Enhanced-Cell ID), OTDOA측위방법을지원하기위한데이터 , NR Cell ID측위방법을위한 Cell-ID 및 Cell위치 ID등을교환할수있다. AMF는연관된 NRPPa [298] NRPPa can be used for information exchange between NG-RAN node and LMF. Specifically, NRPPa supports E-CID (Enhanced-Cell ID) and OTDOA positioning method for measurement transmitted from ng-eNB to LMF. It is possible to exchange data for, Cell-ID and Cell location ID for NR Cell ID positioning method. AMF is the associated NRPPa
트랜잭션 (transaction)에대한정보가없더라도, NG-C인터페이스를통해연관된 LMF의라우팅 ID를기반으로 NRPPa PDU들을라우팅할수있다. Even if there is no information about the transaction, NRPPa PDUs can be routed based on the LMF's routing ID associated with the NG-C interface.
[299] 위치및데이터수집을위한 NRPPa프로토콜의절차는 2가지유형으로구분될 수있다.첫번째유형은,특정 UE에대한정보 (예를들어,위치측정정보등)를 전달하기위한 UE관련절차 (UE associated procedure)이고,두번째유형은, NG-RAN노드및관련된 TP#i적용가능한정보 (예를들어, gNB/ng-eNB/TP 타이밍정보등)을전달하기위한비 UE관련절차 (non UE associated [299] The procedure of the NRPPa protocol for location and data collection can be divided into two types. The first type is a UE-related procedure for delivering information about a specific UE (for example, location measurement information, etc.). UE associated procedure), and the second type is a non-UE associated procedure for delivering the NG-RAN node and related TP#i applicable information (eg, gNB/ng-eNB/TP timing information, etc.).
procedure)이다.상기 2가지유형의절차는독립적으로지원될수도있고,동시에 지원될수도있다. procedure). The above two types of procedures can be supported independently or at the same time.
[300] 한편, NG-RAN에서지원하는측위방법들에는 GNSS, OTDOA, E-CID(enhanced cell ID),기압센서측위 , WLAN측위 ,블루투스측위및 TBS (terrestrial beacon system), UTDOA(Uplink Time Difference of Arrival)등이있을수있다.상기즉위 방법들중,어느하나의측위방법을이용하여 UE의위치를측정할수도있지만, 둘이상의측위방법을이용하여 UE의위치를측정할수도있다. [300] On the other hand, positioning methods supported by NG-RAN include GNSS, OTDOA, E-CID (enhanced cell ID), barometric pressure sensor positioning, WLAN positioning, Bluetooth positioning and terrestrial beacon system (TBS), and UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference). of Arrival). Among the above-described methods, one of the positioning methods may be used to measure the location of the UE, but more than one positioning method may be used to measure the location of the UE.
[301] (1) OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival) [301] (1) OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival)
[302] 도 27는본개시의일실시예에따른 OTDOA(Observed Time Difference Of Arrival)측위방법을설명하기위한도면이다 27 is a diagram for explaining an OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival) positioning method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
[303] OTDOA측위방법은 UE가 eNB, ng-eNB및 PRS전용 모를포함하는다수의 TP들로부터수신된하향링크신호들의측정타이밍을이용한다. UE는위치 서버로부터수신된위치보조데이터를이용하여수신된하향링크신호들의 타이밍을측정한다.그리고이러한측정결과및이웃 모들의지리적좌표들을 기반으로 UE의위치를결정할수있다. In the OTDOA positioning method, the UE uses the timing of measurement of downlink signals received from a plurality of TPs including eNB, ng-eNB and PRS-only modules. The UE measures the timing of the received downlink signals using the location assistance data received from the location server, and can determine the location of the UE based on these measurement results and the geographic coordinates of neighbors.
[304] gNB에연결된 UE는 모로부터 OTDOA측정을위한측정갭 (gap)을요청할수 있다.만약,애가 OTDOA보조데이터내의적어도하나의 TP를위한 SFN(Single 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 [304] The UE connected to the gNB can request a measurement gap for OTDOA measurement from the parent. If the OTDOA auxiliary data is at least one SFN (Single 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
Frequency Network)을인지하지못하면, UE는 RSTD(Reference Signal Time Difference)즉정 (Measurement)을수행하기위한즉정랩을요청하기전에 Frequency Network), before requesting an immediate wrap to perform RSTD (Reference Signal Time Difference) measurement
OTDOA참조셀 (reference cell)의 SFN을획득하기위해자율적인 ¾ (autonomous gap)을사용할수있다. In order to acquire the SFN of an OTDOA reference cell, an autonomous ¾ (autonomous gap) can be used.
[305] 여기서 , RSTD는참조셀과측정셀로부터각각수신된 2개의서브프레임들의 경계간의가장작은상대적인시간차를기반으로정의될수있다.즉, RSTD는 측정셀로부터수신된서브프레임의시작시간에가장가까운참조셀의 서브프레임의시작시간및측정셀로부터수신된서브프레임의시작시간에 가장가까운참조셀의서브프레임의시작시간사이의상대적인시간차이를 기반으로계산될수있다.한편,참조셀은 UE에의해선택될수있다. [305] Here, the RSTD can be defined based on the smallest relative time difference between the boundaries of the two subframes each received from the reference cell and the measurement cell. That is, the RSTD is the lowest at the start time of the subframe received from the measurement cell. It can be calculated based on the relative time difference between the start time of the subframe of the nearest reference cell and the start time of the subframe of the closest reference cell to the start time of the subframe received from the measurement cell. Meanwhile, the reference cell is to the UE. Can be selected by
[306] 정확한 OTDOA측정을위해서는지리적으로분산된 3개이상의 모들또는 [306] For accurate OTDOA measurements, three or more geographically dispersed modules or
기지국들로부터수신된신호의 TOA(time of arrival)을측정하는것이필요하다. 예를들어 , TP 1, TP 2및 TP 3각각에대한 TOA를측정하고, 3개의 TOA를 기반으로 TP 1-TP 2에대한 RSTD, TP 2-TP 3에대한 RSTD및 TP 3-TP 1에대한 RSTD를계산하여,이를기반으로기하학적쌍곡선을결정하고,이러한 It is necessary to measure the time of arrival (TOA) of the signals received from base stations. For example, measure the TOA for each of TP 1, TP 2, and TP 3, and based on the 3 TOAs, RSTD for TP 1-TP 2, RSTD for TP 2-TP 3, and TP 3-TP 1. Calculate the RSTD for, based on it, determine a geometric hyperbola,
쌍곡선이교차하는지점을애의위치로추정할수있다.이때 ,각 TOA측정에 대한정확도및/또는불확실성이생길수있는바,추정된 UE의위치는측정 불확실성에따른특정범위로알려질수도있다. The point at which the hyperbola intersect can be estimated as the position of the child, where accuracy and/or uncertainty may arise for each TOA measurement, and the estimated UE position may be known in a specific range depending on the measurement uncertainty.
[307] 예를들어,두 TP에대한 RSTD는수학식 1을기반으로산출될수있다. [307] For example, the RSTD for two TPs can be calculated based on Equation 1.
[308] [수식 1]
Figure imgf000042_0001
[308] [Equation 1]
Figure imgf000042_0001
[309] 여기서, c는빛의속도이고, {xt, yt}는타겟 UE의 (알려지지않은)좌표이고, {xi, yi}는 (알려진) TP의좌표이며, {xl, yl }은참조 TP (또는다른 TP)의좌표일수 있다.여기서 , (Ti-Tl)은두 TP간의전송시간오프셋으로서 ,“Real Time [309] Here, c is the speed of light, {xt, yt} is the (unknown) coordinate of the target UE, {xi, yi} is the coordinate of the (known) TP, and {xl, yl} is the reference TP ( Or it may be the coordinates of another TP), where, (Ti-Tl) is the transmission time offset between the two TPs, “Real Time
Differences” (RTDs)로명칭될수있으며 , ni, 은 UE TOA측정에러에관한값을 나타낼수있다. Differences” (RTDs), where ni, can represent the value for the UE TOA measurement error.
[310] (2) E-CID (Enhanced Cell ID) [310] (2) E-CID (Enhanced Cell ID)
[311] 셀 ID (CID)측위방법에서 , UE의위치는 UE의서빙 ng-eNB,서빙 gNB및/또는 서빙셀의지리적정보를통해측정될수있다.예를들어 ,서빙 ng-eNB,서빙 gNB및/또는서빙셀의지리적정보는페이징 (paging),등록 (registration)등을 통해획득될수있다. [311] In the cell ID (CID) positioning method, the location of the UE can be measured through the serving ng-eNB of the UE, the serving gNB, and/or the geographic information of the serving cell. For example, serving ng-eNB, serving gNB And/or geographic information of the serving cell may be obtained through paging, registration, and the like.
[312] 한편, E-CID측위방법은 CID측위방법에더하여 UE위치추정치를향상 [312] On the other hand, the E-CID positioning method improves the UE location estimate in addition to the CID positioning method.
시키기위한추가적인 UE측정및/또는 NG-RAN무선자원등을이용할수있다. E-CID측위방법에서, RRC프로토콜의측정제어시스템과동일한측정방법들 중일부를사용할수있지만,일반적으로 UE의위치측정만을위하여추가적인 측정을하지않는다.다시말해, UE의위치를측정하기위하여별도의측정설정 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Additional UE measurements and/or NG-RAN radio resources can be used. In the E-CID positioning method, some of the same measurement methods as the measurement control system of the RRC protocol can be used, but in general, additional measurements are not made only for the location measurement of the UE. In other words, a separate measurement is made to measure the location of the UE. Measurement setup 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
(measurement configuration)또는즉정제어메시지 (measurement control message)는제공되지않을수있으며 , UE또한위치측정만을위한추가적인 측정동작이요청될것을기대하지않고, UE가일반적으로측정가능한측정 방법들을통해획득된측정값을보고할수있다. (measurement configuration) or immediate control message (measurement control message) may not be provided, and the UE also does not expect to request additional measurement operations for location measurement only, and the measurement values obtained through measurement methods that the UE can measure generally Can report
[313] 예를들어 ,서빙 gNB는 UE로부터제공되는 E-UTRA측정치를사용하여 E-CID 측위방법을구현할수있다. [313] For example, the serving gNB can implement the E-CID positioning method using E-UTRA measurements provided from the UE.
[314] E-CID측위를위해사용할수있는측정요소의예를들면다음과같을수있다. [314] Examples of measurement elements that can be used for E-CID positioning may be:
[315] - UE측정 : E-UTRA RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), E-UTRA RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality), UE E-UTRA수신-송신시간차 (Rx-Tx Time difference), GERAN(GSM EDGE Random Access Network)/WLAN RSSI (Reference Signal Strength Indication), UTRAN CPICH (Common Pilot Channel) RSCP [315]-UE measurement: E-UTRA RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), E-UTRA RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality), UE E-UTRA Rx-Tx Time difference, GERAN (GSM EDGE Random) Access Network)/WLAN RSSI (Reference Signal Strength Indication), UTRAN CPICH (Common Pilot Channel) RSCP
(Received Signal Code Power), UTRAN CPICH Ec/Io (Received Signal Code Power), UTRAN CPICH Ec/Io
[316] - E-UTRAN즉정 : ng-eNB수신-송신시간차 (Rx-Tx Time difference),타이밍 [316]-E-UTRAN immediate: ng-eNB receive-transmit time difference (Rx-Tx Time difference), timing
어드밴스 (Timing Advance, TADV), Angle of Arrival (AoA) Advance (Timing Advance, TADV), Angle of Arrival (AoA)
[317] 여기서, TADV는아래와같이 Type 1과 Type 2로구분될수있다. [317] Here, TADV can be divided into Type 1 and Type 2 as follows.
[318] TADV Type 1 = (ng-eNB수신-송신시간차) +(UE E-UTRA수신-송신시간차) [318] TADV Type 1 = (ng-eNB reception-transmission time difference) +(UE E-UTRA reception-transmission time difference)
[319] TADV Type 2 = ng-eNB수신-송신시간차 [319] TADV Type 2 = ng-eNB receive-transmit time difference
[32이 한편, AoA는 UE의방향을측정하는데사용될수있다. AoA는 [32] Meanwhile, AoA can be used to measure the direction of the UE. AoA
기지국/ 모로부터반시계방향으로 UE의위치에대한추정각도로정의될수 있다.이때,지리적기준방향은북쪽일수있다.기지국/ TP는 AoA측정을위해 SRS (Sounding Reference Signal)및/또는 DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal)과 같은상향링크신호를이용할수있다.또한,안테나어레이의배열이클수록 AoA의측정정확도가높아지며 ,동일한간격으로안테나어레이들이배열된 경우,인접한안테나소자들에서수신된신호들은일정한위상 It can be defined as an estimated angle for the location of the UE in a counterclockwise direction from the base station/mother. In this case, the geographical reference direction may be north. The base station/TP is SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) and/or DMRS (Demodulation) for AoA measurement. In addition, the larger the array of antenna arrays, the higher the measurement accuracy of AoA, and if the antenna arrays are arranged at the same interval, signals received from adjacent antenna elements are in a constant phase.
변화 (Phase-Rotate)를가질수있다. It can have a change (Phase-Rotate).
[321] (3) UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference of Arrival) [321] (3) UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference of Arrival)
[322] UTDOA는 SRS의도달시간을추정하여 UE의위치를결정하는방법이다. 추정된 SRS도달시간을산출할때 ,서빙셀이참조셀로사용하여,다른셀 (혹은 기지국/ 와의도달시간차이를통해 UE의위치를추정할수있다. UTDOA를 구현하기위해 E-SMLC는타겟 UE에게 SRS전송을지시하기위해,타겟 UE의 서빙셀을지시할수있다.또한, E-SMLC는 SRS의주기적/비주기적여부, 대역폭및주파수/그룹/시퀀스호핑등과같은설정 (configuration)을제공할수 있다. [322] UTDOA is a method of determining the location of the UE by estimating the arrival time of the SRS. When calculating the estimated SRS arrival time, the serving cell is used as a reference cell, and the location of the UE can be estimated through the arrival time difference with another cell (or base station/). To implement UTDOA, the E-SMLC is a target UE. In order to instruct SRS transmission to the user, the serving cell of the target UE can be indicated. In addition, E-SMLC can provide configurations such as periodic/aperiodic SRS, bandwidth and frequency/group/sequence hopping. .
[323] 이하, SL단말의동기획득에대하여설명한다. [323] Hereinafter, the synchronic acquisition of the SL terminal will be described.
[324] TDMA(time division multiple access)및 FDMA(frequency division multiples [324] Time division multiple access (TDMA) and frequency division multiples (FDMA)
access)시스템에서,정확한시간및주파수동기화는필수적이다.시간및주파수 동기화가정확하게되지않으면,심볼간간섭 (Inter Symbol Interference, ISI)및 반송파간간섭 (Inter Carrier Interference, ICI)으로인해시스템성능이저하될수 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 있다.이는, V2X에서도마찬가지이다. V2X에서는시간/주파수동기화를위해 , 물리 계증에서는 SL동기신호 (sidelink synchronization signal, SLSS)를사용할수 있고, RLC(radio link control)계증에서는 MIB-SL-V2X(master information block-sidelink-V2X)를사용할수있다. In a system, accurate time and frequency synchronization is essential. If time and frequency synchronization is not accurate, system performance is degraded due to Inter Symbol Interference (ISI) and Inter Carrier Interference (ICI). Can be 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Yes. This is the same for V2X. In V2X, for time/frequency synchronization, a sidelink synchronization signal (SLSS) can be used in the physical system, and MIB-SL-V2X (master information block-sidelink-V2X) can be used in the RLC (radio link control) system. Can be used.
[325] 도 28은본개시의 일실시 예에따른, V2X의동기화소스 (synchronization 28 is a V2X synchronization source (synchronization) according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
source)또는동기화기준 (synchronization reference)을나타낸다. source) or synchronization reference.
[326] 도 28을참조하면, V2X에서 ,단말은 GNSS(global navigation satellite systems)에 직접적으로동기화되거나,또는 GNSS에직접적으로동기화된 (네트워크 커버리지 내의또는네트워크커버리지밖의)단말을통해비간접적으로 [326] Referring to FIG. 28, in V2X, the terminal is directly synchronized with GNSS (global navigation satellite systems) or directly synchronized with GNSS (in network coverage or out of network coverage) through a terminal non-indirectly.
GNSS에동기화될수있다. GNSS가동기화소스로설정된경우,단말은 Can be synchronized to GNSS. When GNSS is set as the synchronization source, the terminal
UTC(Coordinated Universal Time)및 (미리 )설정된 DFN(Direct Frame Number) 오프셋을사용하여 DFN및서브프레임 번호를계산할수있다. DFN and subframe numbers can be calculated using Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) and (pre-)set Direct Frame Number (DFN) offsets.
[327] 또는,단말은기지국에 직접동기화되거나,기지국에시간/주파수동기화된 다른단말에게동기화될수있다.예를들어,상기기지국은 eNB또는 gNB일수 있다.예를들어,단말이 네트워크커버리지내에 있는경우,상기 단말은 기지국이 제공하는동기화정보를수신하고,상기 기지국에직접동기화될수 있다.그후,상기단말은동기화정보를인접한다른단말에게제공할수있다. 기지국타이밍이동기화기준으로설정된경우,단말은동기화및하향링크 측정을위해해당주파수에 연관된셀 (상기주파수에서 셀커버리지 내에 있는 경우),프라이머리 셀또는서빙 셀 (상기주파수에서 셀커버리지 바깥에 있는 경우)을따를수있다. [327] Alternatively, the terminal may be directly synchronized with the base station, or may be synchronized with another terminal that is time/frequency synchronized with the base station. For example, the base station may be an eNB or gNB. For example, the terminal may be within network coverage. In this case, the terminal may receive synchronization information provided by the base station, and may be directly synchronized with the base station. Thereafter, the terminal may provide the synchronization information to another adjacent terminal. When the base station timing is set as a synchronization criterion, the terminal is a cell associated with the frequency (if it is within cell coverage at the frequency), a primary cell or a serving cell (if it is outside the cell coverage at the frequency) for synchronization and downlink measurement. ) Can be followed.
[328] 기지국 (예를들어,서빙 셀)은 V2X또는 SL통신에사용되는반송파에 대한 동기화설정을제공할수있다.이 경우,단말은상기 기지국으로부터수신한 동기화설정을따를수있다.만약,단말이상기 V2X또는 SL통신에사용되는 반송파에서 어떤셀도검출하지못했고,서빙 셀로부터동기화설정도수신하지 못했다면,상기 단말은미리 설정된동기화설정을따를수있다. [328] The base station (e.g., serving cell) can provide synchronization settings for carriers used for V2X or SL communication. In this case, the terminal can follow the synchronization settings received from the base station. If no cell is detected in the carrier wave used for V2X or SL communication, and the synchronization setting is not received from the serving cell, the terminal may follow the preset synchronization setting.
[329] 또는,단말은기지국이나 GNSS로부터 직접또는간접적으로동기화정보를 획득하지못한다른단말에게동기화될수도있다.동기화소스및선호도는 단말에게미리설정될수있다.또는,동기화소스및선호도는기지국에 의하여 제공되는제어 메시지를통해설정될수있다. [329] Alternatively, the terminal may be synchronized to another terminal that does not directly or indirectly obtain synchronization information from the base station or GNSS. The synchronization source and preference may be preset to the terminal. Or, the synchronization source and preference may be determined by the base station. It can be set via the control message provided.
[33이 SL동기화소스는동기화우선순위와연관될수있다.예를들어,동기화 [33 This SL synchronization source can be associated with synchronization priority. For example, synchronization
소스와동기화우선순위사이의 관계는표 14또는표 15와같이정의될수있다. 표 14또는표 15는일예에불과하며 ,동기화소스와동기화우선순위사이의 관계는다양한형태로정의될수있다. The relationship between source and synchronization priority can be defined as shown in Table 14 or Table 15. Table 14 or Table 15 is just an example, and the relationship between synchronization source and synchronization priority can be defined in various forms.
[331] 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 [331] 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[표 14] [Table 14]
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000045_0001
[332] [표 15] [332] [Table 15]
Figure imgf000045_0002
Figure imgf000045_0002
[333] 표 14또는표 15에서, P0가가장높은우선순위를의미할수있고, P6이가장 낮은우선순위를의미할수있다.표 14또는표 15에서,기지국은 gNB또는 eNB 중적어도어느하나를포함할수있다. [333] In Table 14 or Table 15, P0 may mean the highest priority, and P6 may mean the lowest priority. In Table 14 or Table 15, the base station includes at least one of the gNB or the eNB. can do.
[334] GNSS기반의동기화또는기지국기반의동기화를사용할지여부는(미리) 설정될수있다.싱글-캐리어동작에서,단말은가장높은우선순위를가지는 이용가능한동기화기준으로부터상기단말의전송타이밍을유도할수있다. [334] Whether to use GNSS-based synchronization or base station-based synchronization can be set (in advance). In single-carrier operation, the terminal derives the transmission timing of the terminal from the available synchronization criteria with the highest priority. can do.
[335] 이하, BWP(Bandwidth Part)및자원풀에대하여설명한다. [335] Hereinafter, the BWP (Bandwidth Part) and resource pool will be described.
[336] BA(Bandwidth Adaptation)을사용하면,단말의수신대역폭및전송대역폭은 셀의대역폭만큼클필요가없으며,단말의수신대역폭및전송대역폭은 조정될수있다.예를들어 ,네트워크/기지국은대역폭조정을단말에게알릴수 있다.예를들어,단말은대역폭조정을위한정보/설정을 [336] With BA (Bandwidth Adaptation), the reception bandwidth and transmission bandwidth of a terminal need not be as large as that of the cell, and the reception bandwidth and transmission bandwidth of the terminal can be adjusted. For example, the network/base station has bandwidth. The terminal can be informed of adjustments, e.g. the terminal has information/settings for bandwidth adjustment.
네트워크/기지국으로부터수신할수있다.이경우,단말은상기수신된 정보/설정을기반으로대역폭조정을수행할수있다.예를들어,상기대역폭 조정은대역폭의축소/확대,대역폭의위치변경또는대역폭의서브캐리어 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 스페이싱의변경을포함할수있다. In this case, the terminal can perform bandwidth adjustment based on the received information/settings. For example, the bandwidth adjustment can reduce/enlarge the bandwidth, change the position of the bandwidth, or the subcarrier of the bandwidth. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 May include changes in spacing.
[337] 예를들어,대역폭은파워를세이브하기위해활동이적은기간동안축소될수 있다.예를들어,대역폭의위치는주파수도메인에서이동할수있다.예를들어, 대역폭의위치는스케줄링유연성 (scheduling flexibility)을증가시키기위해 주파수도메인에서이동할수있다.예를들어,대역폭의서브캐리어 [337] For example, the bandwidth can be reduced for a period of less activity to save power. For example, the location of the bandwidth can be moved in the frequency domain. For example, the location of the bandwidth can be adjusted for scheduling flexibility (scheduling). flexibility) can be moved in the frequency domain, e.g. subcarrier of bandwidth
스페이싱 (subcarrier spacing)은변경될수있다.예를들어 ,대역폭의서브캐리어 스페이싱은상이한서비스를허용하기위해변경될수있다.셀의총셀 대역폭의서브셋은 BWP(Bandwidth Part)라고칭할수있다. BA는 Subcarrier spacing can be changed; for example, subcarrier spacing of bandwidth can be changed to allow different services. A subset of the total cell bandwidth of a cell can be referred to as a BWP (Bandwidth Part). BA is
기지국/네트워크가단말에게 BWP를설정하고,기지국/네트워크가설정된 BWP 중에서현재활성상태인 BWP를단말에게알림으로써수행될수있다. This can be done by the base station/network setting the BWP to the terminal and notifying the terminal of the currently active BWP among the BWPs in which the base station/network has been set.
[338] 도 29은본개시의일실시예에따른,복수의 BWP를나타낸다. 29 shows a plurality of BWPs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[339] 도 29을참조하면, 40MPiz의대역폭및 15kHz의서브캐리어스페이싱을가지는 BWP1, WNfflz의대역폭및 15kHz의서브캐리어스페이싱을가지는 BWP2,및 20Nfflz의대역폭및 60kHz의서브캐리어스페이싱을가지는 BWP3가설정될수 있다. [339] Referring to FIG. 29, BWP1 with a bandwidth of 40 MPiz and subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz, BWP2 with a bandwidth of WNfflz and subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz, and BWP3 with a bandwidth of 20 Nfflz and subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz are set. Can be.
[34이 도 30는본개시의일실시예에따른, BWP를나타낸다.도 30의실시예에서 , [34] Fig. 30 shows a BWP, according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In the embodiment of Fig. 30,
BWP는세개라고가정한다. Assume that there are three BWPs.
[341] 도 30를참조하면, CRB (common resource block)는캐리어밴드의한쪽 [341] Referring to Figure 30, CRB (common resource block) is one side of the carrier band
끝에서부터다른쪽끝까지번호가매겨진캐리어자원블록일수있다.그리고, PRB는각 BWP내에서번호가매겨진자원블록일수있다.포인트 A는자원 블록그리드 (resource block grid)에대한공통참조포인트 (common reference point)를지시할수있다. It can be a numbered carrier resource block from end to end, and a PRB can be a numbered resource block within each BWP, point A is the common reference point for the resource block grid. Can be indicated.
[342] BWP는포인트 A,포인트 A로부터의오프셋 (NstartBWP)및 [342] BWP is point A, offset from point A (NstartBWP) and
대역폭 (NsizeBWP)에의해설정될수있다.예를들어,포인트 A는모든 Can be set by bandwidth (NsizeBWP) e.g. point A is
뉴머놀로지 (예를들어,해당캐리어에서네트워크에의해지원되는모든 뉴머놀로지)의서브캐리어 0이정렬되는캐리어의 PRB의외부참조포인트일 수있다.예를들어,오프셋은주어진뉴머놀로지에서가장낮은서브캐리어와 포인트 A사이의 PRB간격일수있다.예를들어,대역폭은주어진 The subcarrier 0 of the numanology (e.g., all numanology supported by the network on that carrier) can be the external reference point of the carrier's PRB to be aligned; for example, the offset is the lowest subcarrier for a given numanology. It can be the PRB interval between point A and point A. For example, the bandwidth is a given
뉴머놀로지에서 PRB의개수일수있다. It may be the number of PRBs in New Manology.
[343] BWP는 SL에대하여정의될수있다.동일한 SL BWP는전송및수신에사용될 수있다.예를들어 ,전송단말은특정 BWP상에서 SL채널또는 SL신호를 전송할수있고,수신단말은상기특정 BWP상에서 SL채널또는 SL신호를 수신할수있다.면허캐리어 (licensed carrier)에서 , SL BWP는 Uu BWP와별도로 정의될수있으며, SL BWP는 Uu BWP와별도의설정시그널링 (separate configuration signalling)을가질수있다.예를들어 ,단말은 SL BWP를위한 설정을기지국/네트워크로부터수신할수있다. SL BWP는반송파내에서 out-of-coverage NR V2X단말및 RRC_IDLE단말에대하여 (미리)설정될수 있다. RRC_CONNECTED모드의단말에대하여,적어도하나의 SL BWP가 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 반송파내에서활성화될수있다. [343] BWP can be defined for SL. The same SL BWP can be used for transmission and reception. For example, a transmitting terminal can transmit an SL channel or SL signal on a specific BWP, and a receiving terminal can transmit the specific BWP above. On a licensed carrier, the SL BWP can be defined separately from the Uu BWP, and the SL BWP can have separate configuration signaling from the Uu BWP. For example, the terminal can receive the settings for SL BWP from the base station/network. SL BWP can be set (in advance) for out-of-coverage NR V2X terminal and RRC_IDLE terminal in the carrier. For a terminal in RRC_CONNECTED mode, at least one SL BWP is 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Can be activated within the carrier.
[344] 자원풀은 SL전송및/또는 SL수신을위해사용될수있는시간-주파수자원의 집합일수있다.단말의관점에서볼때,자원풀내의시간도메인자원은 연속하지않을수있다.복수의자원풀은하나의캐리어내에서단말에게 (미리) 설정될수있다.물리계층관점에서,단말은설정된또는사전에설정된자원 풀을이용하여유니캐스트,그룹캐스트및브로드캐스트통신을수행할수있다. [344] The resource pool may be a set of time-frequency resources that can be used for SL transmission and/or SL reception. From the terminal's point of view, the time domain resources in the resource pool may not be contiguous. It can be set (in advance) to a terminal within one carrier. From a physical layer point of view, the terminal can perform unicast, groupcast and broadcast communication using a set or preset resource pool.
[345] 이하,전력제어 (power control)에대하여설명한다. [345] Hereinafter, power control will be described.
[346] 단말이자신의상향링크전송파워를컨트롤하는방법은개루프전력 [346] The method of controlling the uplink transmission power of the terminal itself is open loop power.
제어 (Open Loop Power Control, OLPC)및폐루프전력제어 (Closed Loop Power Control, CLPC)를포함할수있다.개루프전력제어에따르면,단말은상기 단말이속하는셀의기지국으로부터의하향링크경로손실 (pathloss)를추정할수 있고,단말은상기경로손실을보상하는형태로전력제어를수행할수있다. 예를들어,개루프전력제어에따르면,단말과기지국사이의거리가더 멀어져서하향링크경로손실이커지는경우,단말은상향링크의전송파워를더 증가시키는방식으로상향링크파워를컨트롤할수있다.폐루프전력제어에 따르면,단말은상향링크전송파워를조절하는데필요한정보 (예를들어,제어 신호)를기지국으로부터수신할수있고,단말은기지국으로부터수신된정보를 기반으로상향링크파워를컨트롤할수있다.즉,폐루프전력제어에따르면, 단말은기지국으로부터수신한직접적인전력제어명령에따라상향링크 파워를컨트롤할수있다. Control (Open Loop Power Control, OLPC) and Closed Loop Power Control (CLPC) can be included. According to the open loop power control, the terminal has downlink path loss from the base station of the cell to which the terminal belongs. ) Can be estimated, and the terminal can perform power control in the form of compensating for the above path loss. For example, according to the open-loop power control, if the distance between the terminal and the base station becomes further and the downlink path loss increases, the terminal can control the uplink power by increasing the transmission power of the uplink. According to the closed loop power control, the terminal can receive the information necessary to control the uplink transmission power (for example, a control signal) from the base station, and the terminal can control the uplink power based on the information received from the base station. In other words, according to the closed loop power control, the terminal can control the uplink power according to the direct power control command received from the base station.
[347] 개루프전력제어는 SL에서지원될수있다.구체적으로,전송단말이기지국의 커버리지내에있을때,기지국은전송단말과상기전송단말의서빙기지국 사이의경로손실을기반으로유니캐스트,그룹캐스트,브로드캐스트전송을 위해개루프전력제어를인에이블할수있다.전송단말이개루프전력제어를 인에이블하기위한정보/설정을기지국으로부터수신하면,전송단말은 유니캐스트,그룹캐스트또는브로드캐스트전송을위해개루프전력제어를 인에이블할수있다.이것은기지국의상향링크수신에대한간섭을완화하기 위함일수있다. [347] Open-loop power control can be supported in SL. Specifically, when the transmitting terminal is within the coverage of the base station, the base station is unicast, groupcast, or unicast based on the path loss between the transmitting terminal and the serving base station of the transmitting terminal. Open-loop power control can be enabled for broadcast transmission When the transmitting terminal receives information/settings from the base station to enable open-loop power control, the transmitting terminal can be used for unicast, groupcast or broadcast transmission. Open loop power control can be enabled, this can be to mitigate interference to the base station's uplink reception.
[348] 부가적으로,적어도유니캐스트의경우,설정 (configuration)은전송단말과 [348] Additionally, in the case of at least unicast, the configuration is
수신단말사이의경로손실을사용하도록인에이블될수있다.예를들어,상기 설정은단말에대하여미리설정될수있다.수신단말은전송단말에게 SL채널 측정결과 (예를들어, SL RSRP)를보고할수있고,전송단말은수신단말에의해 보고된 SL채널측정결과로부터경로손실추정 (pathloss estimation)을도출할수 있다.예를들어, SL에서,전송단말이수신단말에게참조신호를전송하면,수신 단말은전송단말에의해전송된참조신호를기반으로전송단말과수신단말 사이의채널을측정할수있다.그리고,수신단말은 SL채널측정결과를전송 단말에게전송할수있다.그리고,전송단말은 SL채널측정결과를기반으로 수신단말로부터의 SL경로손실을추정할수있다.그리고,전송단말은상기 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 추정된경로손실을보상하여 SL전력제어를수행할수있고,수신단말에 대하여 SL전송을수행할수있다. SL에서의개루프전력제어에따르면,예를 들어,전송단말과수신단말사이의거리가더멀어져서 SL경로손실이커지는 경우,전송단말은 SL의전송파워를더증가시키는방식으로 SL전송파워를 컨트롤할수있다.상기전력제어는 SL물리채널 (예를들어, PSCCH, PSSCH, PSFCH(Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel))및/또는 SL신호전송시적용될수 있다. It can be enabled to use the path loss between the receiving terminals. For example, the above setting can be pre-set for the terminal. The receiving terminal can report the SL channel measurement result (e.g. SL RSRP) to the transmitting terminal. In addition, the transmitting terminal can derive pathloss estimation from the SL channel measurement result reported by the receiving terminal. For example, in SL, when the transmitting terminal transmits a reference signal to the receiving terminal, the receiving terminal The channel between the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal can be measured based on the reference signal transmitted by the transmitting terminal, and the receiving terminal can transmit the SL channel measurement result to the transmitting terminal, and the transmitting terminal can transmit the SL channel measurement result. The SL path loss from the receiving terminal can be estimated based on. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 SL power control can be performed by compensating for the estimated path loss, and SL transmission can be performed to the receiving terminal. According to the open-loop power control in SL, for example, when the distance between the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal becomes farther and the SL path loss increases, the transmitting terminal controls the SL transmission power by further increasing the transmission power of the SL. The power control may be applied when transmitting an SL physical channel (eg, PSCCH, PSSCH, PSFCH (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel)) and/or SL signal.
[349] 개루프전력제어를지원하기위해 ,적어도유니캐스트의경우, SL상에서장기 즉정 (long-term measurements) (즉, L3필터링)이지원될수있다. [349] To support open-loop power control, long-term measurements (ie, L3 filtering) can be supported on the SL, at least in the case of unicast.
[35이 예를들어,총 SL전송전력은슬롯에서 PSCCH및/또는 PSSCH전송을위해 사용되는심볼에서동일할수있다.예를들어,최대 SL전송전력은전송단말에 대하여설정되거나사전에설정될수있다. [35 For this example, the total SL transmission power can be the same in the symbol used for PSCCH and/or PSSCH transmission in the slot. For example, the maximum SL transmission power can be set for the transmitting terminal or set in advance. .
[351] 예를들어, SL개루프전력제어의경우,전송단말은하향링크경로손실 (예를 들어,전송단말과기지국사이의경로손실)만을사용하도록설정될수있다. 예를들어, SL개루프전력제어의경우,전송단말은 SL경로손실 (예를들어, 전송단말과수신단말사이의경로손실)만을사용하도록설정될수있다.예를 들어, SL개루프전력제어의경우,전송단말은하향링크경로손실및 SL경로 손실을사용하도록설정될수있다. [351] For example, in the case of SL open-loop power control, the transmitting terminal can be set to use only the downlink path loss (eg, the path loss between the transmitting terminal and the base station). For example, in the case of SL open loop power control, the transmitting terminal can be set to use only the SL path loss (e.g., the path loss between the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal). For example, in SL open loop power control In this case, the transmitting terminal can be configured to use the downlink path loss and the SL path loss.
[352] 예를들어, SL개루프전력제어가하향링크경로손실과및 SL경로손실을 모두사용하도록설정된경우,전송단말은하향링크경로손실기반으로획득된 전력및 SL경로손실을기반으로획득된전력중에서,최소값을전송전력으로 결정할수있다.예를들어, P0및알파값은하향링크경로손실및 SL경로 손실에대해별도로설정되거나사전에설정될수있다.예를들어, P0는 평균적으로수신된 SINR과관련된사용자특정파라미터일수있다.예를들어, 알파값은경로손실에대한가중치값일수있다. [352] For example, if the SL open-loop power control is set to use both the downlink path loss and the SL path loss, the transmitting terminal will have the power acquired based on the downlink path loss and the SL path loss. Among the power, the minimum value can be determined as the transmit power. For example, the values of P0 and alpha can be set separately or pre-set for the downlink path loss and SL path loss. For example, P0 is received on average. It can be a user-specific parameter related to the SINR, for example the alpha value can be a weighted value for path loss.
[353] 이하, SL혼잡제어 (sidelink congestion control)에대하여설명한다. [353] Hereinafter, sidelink congestion control will be described.
[354] 단말이 SL전송자원을스스로결정하는경우,단말은자신이사용하는자원의 크기및빈도역시스스로결정하게된다.물론,네트워크등으로부터의제약 조건으로인하여,일정수준이상의자원크기나빈도를사용하는것은제한될 수있다.그러나,특정시점에특정지역에많은단말이몰려있는상황에서모든 단말들이상대적으로많은자원을사용하는경우라면,상호간에간섭으로 인하여전체적인성능이크게저하될수있다. [354] When the terminal determines the SL transmission resource by itself, the terminal determines the size and frequency of the resource used by itself. Of course, due to constraints from the network, the resource size or frequency above a certain level is determined by itself. Use may be limited; however, if all the terminals use relatively large resources in a situation where many terminals are concentrated in a specific area at a specific time, the overall performance may be significantly degraded due to mutual interference.
[355] 따라서,단말은채널상황을관찰할필요가있다.만약과도하게많은자원이 소모되고있다고판단되면,단말은스스로의자원사용을줄이는형태의동작을 취하는것이바람직하다.본명세서에서 ,이를혼잡제어 (Congestion Control, [355] Therefore, the terminal needs to observe the channel situation. If it is judged that excessively large resources are being consumed, it is desirable for the terminal to take a form of action to reduce its own resource usage. In this specification, Congestion Control,
CR)라고정의할수있다.예를들어,단말은단위시간/주파수자원에서측정된 에너지가일정수준이상인지여부를판단하고,일정수준이상의에너지가 관찰된단위시간/주파수자원의비율에따라서자신의전송자원의양및 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 빈도를조절할수있다.본명세서에서,일정수준이상의에너지가관찰된 시간/주파수자원의비율을채널혼잡비율 (Channel Busy Ratio, CBR)이라고 정의할수있다.단말은채널/주파수에대하여 CBR을측정할수있다. CR). For example, the terminal judges whether the energy measured in the unit time/frequency resource is above a certain level, and the energy above a certain level is determined by the ratio of the observed unit time/frequency resource. The amount of transmission resources and 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 The frequency can be adjusted. In this specification, the ratio of time/frequency resources at which energy above a certain level is observed is defined as the Channel Busy Ratio (CBR). The terminal can measure the CBR for the channel/frequency.
부가적으로,단말은측정된 CBR을네트워크/기지국에게전송할수있다. Additionally, the terminal can transmit the measured CBR to the network/base station.
[356] 도 31은본개시의일실시 예에따른, CBR측정을위한자원단위를나타낸다. 31 shows a resource unit for CBR measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[357] 도 31을참조하면, CBR은단말이특정구간 (예를들어 , 100ms)동안서브채널 단위로 RSSI(Received Signal Strength Indicator)를즉정한결과, RSSI의즉정결과 값이미리설정된임계치이상의값을가지는서브채널의개수를의미할수 있다.또는, CBR은특정구간동안의서브채널중미리설정된임계치이상의 값을가지는서브채널의비율을의미할수있다.예를들어,도 31의실시예에서, 빗금쳐진서브채널이미리설정된임계치이상의값을가지는서브채널이라고 가정하는경우, CBR은 100ms구간동안빗금쳐진서브채널의비율을의미할수 있다.부가적으로,단말은 CBR을기지국에게보고할수있다. [357] Referring to FIG. 31, the CBR indicates that the terminal immediately determines the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) in sub-channel units for a specific period (for example, 100 ms), and the immediate result value of the RSSI has a value equal to or greater than a preset threshold. The number of sub-channels can mean the number of sub-channels. Alternatively, CBR can mean the percentage of sub-channels having a value greater than or equal to a preset threshold among the sub-channels for a specific period. For example, in the embodiment of FIG. Assuming that the channel is a sub-channel with a value above a preset threshold, CBR can mean the percentage of sub-channels that are shaded for a 100 ms interval. Additionally, the terminal can report the CBR to the base station.
[358] 예를들어,도 32의실시 예와같이, PSCCH와 PSSCH가멀티플렉싱되는경우, 단말은하나의자원풀에대하여하나의 CBR측정을수행할수있다.여기서, 만약 PSFCH자원이설정되거나사전에설정된다면,상기 PSFCH자원은상기 CBR측정에서제외될수있다. For example, as in the embodiment of FIG. 32, when PSCCH and PSSCH are multiplexed, the UE can perform one CBR measurement for one resource pool. Here, if the PSFCH resource is set or in advance If set, the PSFCH resource may be excluded from the CBR measurement.
[359] 나아가,트래픽 (예를들어,패킷)의우선순위를고려한혼잡제어가필요할수 있다.이를위해 ,예를들어 ,단말은채널점유율 (Channel occupancy Ratio, CR)을 측정할수있다.구체적으로,단말은 CBR을측정하고,단말은상기 CBR에 따라서각각의우선순위 (예를들어, k)에해당하는트래픽이점유할수있는 채널점유율 (Channel occupancy Ratio k, CRk)의최댓값 (CRlimkk)을결정할수 있다.예를들어 ,단말은 CBR측정값미리정해진표를기반으로,각각의 트래픽의우선순위에대한채널점유율의최댓값 (CRlimitk)을도출할수있다. 예를들어,상대적으로우선순위가높은트래픽의경우,단말은상대적으로큰 채널점유율의최댓값을도출할수있다.그후,단말은트래픽의우선순위노가 i보다낮은트래픽들의채널점유율의총합을일정값이하로제한함으로써, 혼잡제어를수행할수있다.이러한방법에의하면,상대적으로우선순위가 낮은트래픽들에더강한채널점유율제한이걸릴수있다. [359] Furthermore, congestion control may be necessary taking into account the priority of the traffic (eg, packets). For this, for example, the terminal can measure the channel occupancy ratio (CR). Specifically ,The terminal measures the CBR, and the terminal can determine the maximum value (CRlimkk) of the channel occupancy Ratio k, CRk that can be occupied by the traffic corresponding to each priority (for example, k) according to the CBR. For example, the terminal can derive the maximum value of the channel share (CRlimitk) for the priority of each traffic, based on a predefined table of CBR measurements. For example, in the case of traffic with a relatively high priority, the terminal can derive the maximum value of the relatively large channel share. After that, the terminal can make the sum of the channel share of the traffic with the priority level of the traffic lower than i a certain value or less. By limiting to, congestion control can be performed. With this method, stronger channel occupancy limits can be placed on traffic with relatively low priority.
[36이 그이외에,단말은전송전력의크기조절,패킷의드롭 (drop),재전송여부의 결정,전송 RB크기조절 (MCS조정)등의방법을이용하여, SL혼잡제어를 수행할수있다. [In addition to 36, the terminal can perform SL congestion control using methods such as size control of transmission power, drop of packets, determination of retransmission, and transmission RB size adjustment (MCS adjustment).
[361] 이하, SL에대한물리계증프로세싱 (physical-layer processing)에대하여 [361] Hereinafter, about physical-layer processing for SL
설명한다. Explain.
[362] 도 33은본개시의일실시 예에따른, SL에대한물리계층프로세싱을 [362] Figure 33 shows the physical layer processing of the SL according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
나타낸다. Show.
[363] 단말은긴길이의전송블록 (Transport Block, TB)을짧은길이의코드 [363] The terminal uses a long-length transport block (TB) with a short-length code.
블록 (Code Block, CB)여러개로분할할수있다.그리고,단말은상기짧은 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 길이의복수의코드블록각각에부호화과정을수행한후에,단말은상기짧은 길이의복수의코드블록을다시하나로합칠수있다.그리고,단말은하나로 합쳐진코드블록을다른단말에게 전송할수있다. It can be divided into multiple blocks (Code Block, CB), and the terminal 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 After performing the encoding process on each of the plurality of code blocks of length, the terminal can combine the aforementioned short length of code blocks into one again. And, the terminal is one by one. The combined code block can be transmitted to another terminal.
[364] 구체적으로,도 33을참조하면,먼저,단말은긴길이의 전송블록에 대하여 CRC(cyclic redundancy check)부호화과정을수행할수있다.단말은상기 CRC를 전송블록에부착할수있다.이후,단말은 CRC가부착된전체길이의 전송 블록을복수의짧은길이를가지는코드블록으로분할할수있다.그리고, 단말은짧은길이를가지는복수의코드블록각각에 대하여다시 CRC부호화 과정을수행할수있다.단말은 CRC를코드블록에부착할수있다.따라서 , 각각의코드블록은 CRC를포함하게될수있다.그리고, CRC가부착된각각의 코드블록은채널인코더에 입력되어 채널코딩 (channel coding)과정을거칠수 있다.이후,단말은각각의코드블록에 대하여 레이트매칭과정,비트단위 스크램블링 ,변조,레이어 맵핑 ,프리코딩 및안테나맵핑을수행할수있고, 단말은이를수신단에게 전송할수있다. Specifically, referring to FIG. 33, first, the terminal may perform a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding process on a long-length transport block. The terminal may attach the CRC to the transport block. The terminal can divide the full length transport block to which the CRC is attached into a plurality of short-length code blocks, and the terminal can perform the CRC encoding process again for each of the plurality of short-length code blocks. A CRC can be attached to a code block. Therefore, each code block can contain a CRC. And, each code block with a CRC is input to a channel encoder and can undergo a channel coding process. Thereafter, the terminal can perform the rate matching process, bit-wise scrambling, modulation, layer mapping, precoding, and antenna mapping for each code block, and the terminal can transmit it to the receiver.
[365] 부가적으로,도 21및도 22를통해설명된채널코딩방식은 SL에 적용될수 있다.예를들어 ,도 21및도 22를통해설명된상향링크/하향링크물리채널및 신호는 SL물리채널및신호로치환될수있다.예를들어 , NR Uu에서 데이터 채널및제어 채널에 대하여 정의된채널코딩은각각 NR SL상에서 데이터 채널 및제어채널에 대한채널코딩과유사하게정의될수있다. Additionally, the channel coding method described through FIGS. 21 and 22 can be applied to the SL. For example, the uplink/downlink physical channels and signals described through FIGS. 21 and 22 are SL It can be replaced by physical channels and signals. For example, the channel coding defined for the data channel and the control channel in NR Uu can be defined similarly to the channel coding for the data channel and the control channel on the NR SL, respectively.
[366] [366]
[367] 심시예 [367] Sims
[368] 종래의 LTE-V2X는 HARQ피드백동작을지원하지 않았다.반면, NR-V2X는 V2X신호의신뢰도를향상시키기 위하여 HARQ피드백동작을지원한다.뿐만 아니라, NR-V2X는 RLC(radio link control)계층의 RLC ARQ동작을지원한다. 그러나사이드링크단말이 HARQ와 RLC ARQ동작을아무런조건없이동시에 수행하는경우,프로토콜오버헤드및복잡도를증가시키는문제가있을수 있다.따라서,본명세서에서는이러한문제를해결하기 위한방법을제시한다. [368] The conventional LTE-V2X did not support the HARQ feedback operation. On the other hand, the NR-V2X supports the HARQ feedback operation to improve the reliability of the V2X signal. In addition, the NR-V2X radio link control (RLC) ) Layer RLC ARQ operation is supported. However, if the sidelink terminal performs HARQ and RLC ARQ operations at the same time without any conditions, there may be a problem of increasing the protocol overhead and complexity. Therefore, this specification proposes a method to solve this problem.
[369] 이하본명세서에서는 Next Radio(NR) Sidelink (SL) V2X에서물리 계층의 채널 상태측정결과에 따라 RLC ARQ동작을인에이블링 (enabling)또는 [369] In the following specification, in the Next Radio (NR) Sidelink (SL) V2X, enabling the RLC ARQ operation according to the channel state measurement result of the physical layer (enabling) or
디스에이블링 (disabling)하는방법을제안한다.즉,단말은물리 계층의 링크 또는채널환경이좋지 않은경우에만 RLC ARQ동작을수행하여프로토콜 오버헤드를감소시킬수있다.또한,단말은물리 계층의 링크또는채널환경이 좋지 않은경우 RLC ARQ동작을수행하여패킷송수신의신뢰도를향상시킬수 있다. A method of disabling is proposed. That is, the terminal can reduce the protocol overhead by performing RLC ARQ operation only when the link or channel environment of the physical layer is not good. In addition, the terminal can reduce the protocol overhead. Alternatively, if the channel environment is not good, the reliability of packet transmission and reception can be improved by performing RLC ARQ operation.
[37이 본명세서에서사이드링크단말은 HARQ동작만을수행하고, RLC ARQ [37] In this specification, the sidelink terminal performs only HARQ operation, and RLC ARQ
동작은수행하지 않는것을기본동작으로할수있다.그리고본명세서에 따른 단말은물리 계층의 채널상태측정결과에 따라 RLC ARQ동작을트리거링 할 수있다.따라서,본명세서에 따른단말은물리 계층의 채널상태가좋지 않은 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 경우에만 HARQ와 RLC ARQ동작을함께수행할수있다. No operation can be performed as a basic operation. And the terminal according to this specification can trigger the RLC ARQ operation according to the channel state measurement result of the physical layer. Therefore, the terminal according to this specification can trigger the channel state of the physical layer. Unfavorable 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Only HARQ and RLC ARQ operations can be performed together.
[371] 도 34내지도 37은실시예 (들)을설명하기위한도면이다. 34 to 37 are views for explaining the embodiment(s).
[372] 도 34는본명세서의실시예 (들)에따른단말의동작을나타낸순서도이다. 34 is a flowchart showing the operation of the terminal according to the embodiment(s) of the present specification.
[373] 도 34를참조하면,단말은다른단말로부터 SCI(Sidelink Control Information)를 포함하는 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)를수신할수있다 (S3401). 또한,단말은수신한 SCI에기반하여참조신호를포함하는포함하는 Referring to FIG. 34, a terminal may receive a PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel) including Sidelink Control Information (SCI) from another terminal (S3401). In addition, the terminal includes a reference signal based on the received SCI.
PSSCH((Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)를수신할수있다 (S3402).그리고 단말은수신한 PSSCH에대한 HARQ피드백동작을수행할수있으며 (S3403), 이러한 HARQ피드백동작은후술하는채널상태측정의결과에상관없이 수행될수있다.그리고단말은수신한참조신호를이용하여물리계층의채널 상태를측정할수있다 (S3404).여기서,물리계층의채널상태측정은 PSSCH ((Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) can be received (S3402), and the terminal can perform HARQ feedback operation for the received PSSCH (S3403), and this HARQ feedback operation is performed regardless of the result of the channel state measurement described later. And the terminal can measure the channel state of the physical layer using the received reference signal (S3404) Here, the measurement of the channel state of the physical layer
RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power), RSRQ(Reference Signal Received Quality), RSSI(Sidelink-Received Signal Strength Indicator,또는 CBR(Channel Busy Ratio) 등의즉정을포함할수있다. It may include an instantiation such as Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP), Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Sidelink-Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), or Channel Busy Ratio (CBR).
[374] 그리고단말은채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인지여부를판단할수 있다 (S3405).채널상태측정의결과가임계값을초과하는경우,단말은다른 단말과의링크또는채널의환경이좋다고판단하고 RLC ARQ동작을 [374] And the terminal can determine whether the result of the channel status measurement is less than the threshold value (S3405). If the result of the channel status measurement exceeds the threshold value, the terminal can determine whether the link with another terminal or the channel environment is Judging that it is good, and the RLC ARQ operation
트리거링하지않는다.왜냐하면,단말이 RLC ARQ동작을수행하지않더라도, 채널상태가양호하여 HARQ동작만으로사이드링크신호의신뢰도를보장할 수있기때문이다.반면,채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인경우,단말은 RLC ARQ동작을트리거링하는정보를포함하는 RLC계층의정보를 This is because even if the terminal does not perform the RLC ARQ operation, the channel state is good and the reliability of the sidelink signal can be guaranteed only by the HARQ operation. On the other hand, when the result of the channel state measurement is below the threshold value, The terminal provides information of the RLC layer, including information for triggering the RLC ARQ operation.
전송한다 (S3406).단말은채널또는링크의환경이좋지않은경우 RCL ARQ 동작을수행함으로써사이드링크신호의신뢰도를보장할수있다.또한, 단말은다른단말에 RLC PDU를전송할수있으며 , RLC PDU는 RLC PDU 헤더에 lbit의폴링비트를포함할수있다.그리고채널상태측정의결과가 임계값이하인것에기반하여,폴링비트는 1로설정될수있다.또한,채널상태 측정의결과가임계값초과인것에기반하여,폴링비트는 0으로설정될수있다. 여기서, 0또는 1의값은임의의설정값이며,이에제한되지않는다.예를들면, 채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인것에기반하여폴링비트는 0으로 설정될수있다.또한,채널상태측정의결과가임계값초과인것에기반하여, 폴링비트는 1로설정될수있다.폴링비트를수신한다른단말은이를 When the channel or link environment is not good, the terminal can guarantee the reliability of the sidelink signal by performing the RCL ARQ operation. In addition, the terminal can transmit the RLC PDU to the other terminal, and the RLC PDU is The RLC PDU header may contain lbit polling bits. And based on the result of the channel state measurement being less than the threshold value, the polling bit may be set to 1. Also, based on the result of the channel state measurement being exceeding the threshold value. Thus, the polling bit can be set to zero. Here, the value of 0 or 1 is an arbitrary setting value, and is not limited thereto. For example, the polling bit may be set to 0 based on the result of the channel state measurement being less than or equal to the threshold value. In addition, the result of the channel state measurement Based on being above the threshold, the polling bit can be set to 1. The other terminal receiving the polling bit
디코딩하여 RLC ARQ동작의인에이블또는디스에이블여부를알수있다. 또한,단말은 RLC ARQ동작의트리거링에의하여 RLC PDU에대한 ACK/NACK 피드백정보를수신할수있다. By decoding, it is possible to determine whether the RLC ARQ operation is enabled or disabled. In addition, the terminal can receive ACK/NACK feedback information for the RLC PDU by triggering the RLC ARQ operation.
[375] 상술한동작에의하여단말은물리계층의채널상태를기반으로 RLC계층의 ARQ동작여부를결정할수있다.또한,단말은 RCL ARQ동작이채널상태가 좋지않은경우에만수행되도록함으로써,시그널링오버헤드를줄이면서 신호의신뢰도를유지할수있다. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 [375] According to the above-described operation, the terminal can determine whether or not the ARQ operation of the RLC layer is performed based on the channel state of the physical layer. In addition, the terminal allows the RCL ARQ operation to be performed only when the channel state is poor, thereby signaling over. The reliability of the signal can be maintained while reducing the head. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[376] 도 35는본명세서의실시예(들)에따른전송단말과수신단말의동작을 [376] Fig. 35 shows the operation of the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal according to the embodiment(s) of this specification.
설명하기위한도면이다. This is a drawing for explanation.
[377] 도 35를참조하면,전송단말과수신단말은
Figure imgf000052_0001
동작을조건없이디폴트로 수행한다.전송단말은물리계층의채널상태를측정하여결과가임계값이하인 경우 111乂:쇼11(3동작을시작할수있다.전송단말은 111乂:모1)11에포함된폴링 비트를 1로설정하고,수신단말에 111 모1)11를전송할수있다.수신단말은 111 모1)11를수신하고, 111乂:쇼11(3동작을시작할수있다.또한,수신단말은 111乂: 모1)11를성공적으로디코딩한경우쇼(: 을전송하고,디코딩에실패한경우 NACK을전송할수있다.물리계층의채널상태결과가임계값이하를유지하는 경우,전송단말과수신단말은 동작및 111乂:쇼11(3동작을계속하여 수행할수있다.본명세서에서전송단말과수신단말은상대적인개념이며 신호의전송또는수신에제한되지않는다.
[377] Referring to Figure 35, the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal
Figure imgf000052_0001
The operation is performed by default without any conditions. The transmitting terminal measures the channel status of the physical layer and, if the result is less than the threshold value, 111 乂: Show 11 (3 operations can be started. The transmission terminal is 111 乂: All 1) 11 The included polling bit is set to 1, 111 modules 1) 11 can be transmitted to the receiving terminal. The receiving terminal can receive 111 modules 1) 11, and 111: Show 11 (3 operations can be started. If the terminal successfully decodes 111 乂: all 1) 11, it can transmit a show (:), and if the decoding fails, it can transmit NACK. If the channel state result of the physical layer remains below the threshold, the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal The terminal can continue to perform operations and 111: show 11 (3 operations. In this specification, the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal are a relative concept and are not limited to the transmission or reception of signals.
[378] 또한,전송단말이 ^0쇼11(3트리거하는조건은하기와같을수있다. [378] Also, the conditions under which the transmitting terminal triggers ^0 show 11 (3) may be as follows.
[379] 본명세서에서는묘쇼 동작중,물리계층측정값이특정임계값이하로 떨어지는경우, ^0쇼11(3동작을트리거하도록하는것을제안한다.물리계층 수있다.물리계층측정값이임계값
Figure imgf000052_0002
층으로물리계층측정값이임계값 이하로떨어졌음을지시하거나,링크또는채널의상태가임계값이하로 떨어졌음을지시할수있다. MAC계층은물리계층으로부터링크의상태가 좋지않음을지시받는경우, 111乂:계층으로 111乂:쇼11(3를트리거하는
[379] In this specification, it is suggested to trigger ^0show11(3 actions when the physical layer measurement value falls below a certain threshold value during Myosho operation. The physical layer can be. The physical layer measurement value is a threshold value.
Figure imgf000052_0002
Layers can indicate that a physical layer measurement has fallen below a threshold, or that the state of a link or channel has fallen below a threshold. When the MAC layer receives an indication from the physical layer that the link is in poor condition, 111 乂: to the layer 111 乂: Show 11 (triggers 3).
프리미티브( 血切句를전달할수있다.요1乂:계층은 MAC계층으로부터요1乂: 쇼요 를동작시키는프리미티브를수신하고,아래와같은절차를통하여 111乂: 쇼11(3를동작시킬수있다.다시말하자면,물리계층의채널상태측정값에 기반하여측정값이임계값이하인경우,물리계층은 MAC계층에이를 보고하고, MAC계층은요1乂:계층에이를보고할수있다.그후,요1乂:계층은 111乂:쇼11(3동작을인에이블링할수있다. The primitive can be transmitted. Yo1: The layer receives the primitive that activates the Yo1: Shoyo from the MAC layer, and through the following procedure, 111: Show11 (3) can be operated again. That is to say, based on the channel state measurement value of the physical layer, if the measurement value is less than the threshold value, the physical layer reports it to the MAC layer, and the MAC layer can report it to the Yo 1: layer. 111乂:Show 11(can enable 3 actions.
[38이 111乂:쇼11(3동작인에이블방법은하기와같을수있다. [38 is 111乂: Show 11 (3 action enable method can be as follows.
[381] 사이드링크전송단말은
Figure imgf000052_0003
[381] The sidelink transmission terminal
Figure imgf000052_0003
비트여0 1¾ 0를 1로설정하고요1乂:쇼요 를동작시킬수있다.그리고 1로 설정된폴링비트를수신한수신단말은 111乂:모011를성공적으로수신한경우 쇼(: 을전송하고,성공적으로수신하지않은경우 NACK을전송할수있다.수신 단말은전송단말이전송한패킷을수신하여, 111乂:모011헤더에포함된폴링 비트가 1로설정된경우, 111乂:쇼요 동작을수행할수있다.그리고수신단말은 111 모1)11를시퀀스넘버기반으로성공적으로수신하는경우,전송단말에 쇼(: 을전송하고,수신실패시 NACK을전송할수있다. Bit 0 1 ¾ 0 is set to 1, and Yo1乂: can operate the shoyo. And the receiving terminal that received the polling bit set to 1, 111乂: Mo011 is successfully received. If not received, NACK can be transmitted. The receiving terminal receives the packet transmitted by the transmitting terminal and can perform 111乂:shoyo operation when the polling bit included in the 111乂:all 011 header is set to 1 And, if the receiving terminal successfully receives 111 modules 1) 11 based on the sequence number, it can transmit a show (: to the transmitting terminal) and transmit NACK when the reception fails.
[382] 도 36은본명세서의실시예(들)에따른단말의동작을나타낸순서도이다. [382] Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the operation of the terminal according to the embodiment(s) of the present specification.
[383] 도 36을참조하면,단말은 동작및 111 쇼11(2동작을수행할수 [383] Referring to Fig. 36, the terminal can perform operation and 111 show 11 (two operations).
있다 3601).여기서 , 111 쇼11(3동작은도 34및도 35에서설명한동작에의하여 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 트리거된동작일수있다.그리고단말은참조신호에 기반하여물리 계층의 채널상태를측정할수있다 3602).또한,단말은채널상태측정의결과가 임계값이하인지 여부또는임계값초과인지 여부를판단할수있다 3603). 또한,단말은채널상태측정의결과가임계값을초과하는경우, ^0쇼11(3 동작을중지하는정보를포함하는 111 계층의 정보를전송할수있다 3604). 여기서 ,요]^:쇼1«3동작을중지하는정보는요]^:모1)11에포함된폴링비트에 포함된정보일수있다. There is 3601). Here, 111 show 11 (3 operation is by the operation described in Fig. 34 and Fig. 35). 2020/175955 1» (:1^1{2020/002889 may be triggered action. And the terminal can measure the channel status of the physical layer based on the reference signal 3602). In addition, the terminal has the result of channel status measurement. It can be judged whether it is below the threshold value or whether it is exceeding the threshold value 3603). In addition, when the result of the channel state measurement exceeds the threshold value, the terminal can transmit information of the 111 layer, including information to stop the operation of ^0 show 11 (3604). Here, the information to stop the operation of [Yo]^:Show1«3 may be information included in the polling bit included in Yo]^:All1)11.
[384] 도 37은본명세서의실시예(들)에 따른전송단말과수신단말의동작을 [384] Fig. 37 shows the operation of the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal according to the embodiment(s) of the present specification.
설명하기 위한도면이다. This is a drawing for explanation.
[385] 도 37을참조하면,전송단말과수신단말은
Figure imgf000053_0001
[385] Referring to Figure 37, the transmitting terminal and the receiving terminal
Figure imgf000053_0001
수행할수있다.또한,전송단말은물리 계층의채널상태를측정하여 결과값이 임계값을초과하는경우, 111 쇼11(3동작을중지한다.또한,전송단말은수신 단말에폴링비트가 0으로설정된요1乂:모1)11를전송할수있다.그리고수신 단말은 110^모1)11를수신하여
Figure imgf000053_0003
쇼1«3동작을중지할수있으며,
Figure imgf000053_0002
In addition, the transmitting terminal measures the channel state of the physical layer, and if the result value exceeds the threshold value, 111 shows 11 (3 operation is stopped. In addition, the transmitting terminal has a polling bit set to 0 in the receiving terminal) The set request 1): can transmit all 1) 11, and the receiving terminal receives 110 ^ all 1) 11
Figure imgf000053_0003
Show 1 «3 operation can be stopped,
Figure imgf000053_0002
대한 ACK/NACK을전송하지 않고 동작만을수행할수있다. The operation can only be performed without transmitting the ACK/NACK for.
[386] 111乂:쇼요 동작디스에이블방법은다음과같을수있다. [386] 111乂: How to disable the Shoyo operation can be as follows.
[387] 층측정결과에 따라 111乂:쇼요 동작을다시 [387] According to the floor measurement result, 111乂: Shoyo operation again
Figure imgf000053_0004
동작하도록하는절차도제안한다.
Figure imgf000053_0004
We also propose a procedure to make it work.
[388] 측정값이 임계값이상으로다시돌아온경우,물리 계층은 MAC계층에물리 계층측정결과임계값이상임을을지시하거나링크또는채널의상태가임계값 이상임을지시할수있다.
Figure imgf000053_0005
계층은물리 계층으로부터 링크상태가좋아 졌음을지시받으면, 111 계층으로 111 쇼11(3을중지하도록하는
[388] When the measured value returns above the threshold value, the physical layer may indicate to the MAC layer that the physical layer measurement result is above the threshold value or indicate that the state of the link or channel is above the threshold value.
Figure imgf000053_0005
When the layer receives an instruction from the physical layer that the link status has improved, the layer 111 goes to the layer 111 and stops the show 11 (3
프리미티브( 血切句를전달할수있다.요1乂:계층은 MAC계층으로부터요1乂: 쇼11(3를동작을중지하도록하는프리미티브를수신하는경우,아래와같은 절차를통해 111 쇼11(2동작을중지시킬수있다. The primitive can be transmitted. Yo1: The layer receives a primitive that causes the MAC layer to stop the operation. Can be stopped.
[389] 즉,사이드링크전송단말은
Figure imgf000053_0006
동작시키는폴링 비트여0111!¾ ½)를 0으로설정하고 ^0쇼11(3동작을디스에이블시킬수있다. 그리고수신단말은요1乂:모1)11를성공적으로수신한경우,
Figure imgf000053_0007
[389] That is, the sidelink transmission terminal
Figure imgf000053_0006
You can set the polling bit to be activated 0111!¾ ½) to 0 and disable ^0 show 11 (3 operations). And the receiving terminal has successfully received Yo1乂:Mo1)11,
Figure imgf000053_0007
실패시 NACK을전송할수있다.사이드링크수신단말은사이드링크전송 단말이 전송한패킷을수신하여 111乂:11£&(1 에포함된폴링비트가 0으로설정된 경우, 111乂:쇼11(3동작을중지할수있다.이후,사이드링크전송단말과사이드 링크수신단말은 만동작시킬수있다.여기서,폴링 비트의 0또는 1의 설정 값은예시적인것이며,이에 한정되지 않는다 In case of failure, NACK can be transmitted. The sidelink receiving terminal receives the packet transmitted by the sidelink transmitting terminal, and 111乂:11 £& (If the polling bit included in 1 is set to 0, then 111乂:show 11(3 The operation can be stopped. After that, the sidelink transmitting terminal and the sidelink receiving terminal can only be operated. Here, the setting value of 0 or 1 of the polling bit is illustrative and is not limited thereto.
[39이 본명세서의 일실시예(들)에따르면,사이드링크단말들현재무선링크또는 채널의상태를반영하여 ^0쇼1«3동작을수행하거나중지하거나할수있다. 이를통해 NR V2X SL UE의프로토콜오버헤드또는복잡도를줄일수있다. [39] According to one embodiment(s) of this specification, sidelink terminals can perform or stop ^0show1«3 operation by reflecting the current state of the wireless link or channel. Through this, the protocol overhead or complexity of the NR V2X SL UE can be reduced.
[391] 상기의실시예(들)은 NR사이드링크를중심으로작성되었지만 NR 1111(즉, NR gNB간의통신)또는 NR ¥2 (즉, 1®와자율주행차량에 관련된 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 단말간의통신)등과같은환경에서도적용될수있다.다시말하자면,상기의 실시예(들)에따른단말은다른단말,자율주행차량에관련된단말,기지국또는 네트워크중적어도하나와통신하는단말을의미할수있다. [391] The above embodiment(s) was created around the NR sidelink, but NR 11 11 (ie, communication between NR gNB) or NR ¥2 (ie, 1® and related to autonomous vehicles) It can also be applied in environments such as 2020/175955 1» (:1^1 {2020/002889 communication between terminals). In other words, the terminal according to the above embodiment(s) is another terminal, a terminal related to an autonomous vehicle, It can mean a terminal that communicates with at least one of a base station or network.
[392] [392]
[393] 상술한설명에서제안방식에대한일례들또한본발명의구현방법들중 [393] Examples of the proposed method in the above description and also among the implementation methods of the present invention
하나로포함될수있으므로,일종의제안방식들로간주될수있음은명백한 사실이다.또한,상기설명한제안방식들은독립적으로구현될수도있지만, 일부제안방식들의조합(혹은병합)형태로구현될수도있다.일례로,본 발명에서는설명의편의를위해 3GPP NR시스템을기반으로제안방식을 설명하였지만,제안방식이적용되는시스템의범위는 3GPP NR시스템외에 다른시스템으로도확장가능하다.일례로,본발명의제안방식들은 D2D통신을 위해서도확장적용가능하다.여기서 ,일례로, D2D통신은 UE가다른 UE와 직접무선채널을이용하여통신하는것을의미하며,여기서,일례로 UE는 사용자의단말을의미하지만,기지국과같은네트워크장비가 UE사이의통신 방식에따라서신호를송/수신하는경우에는역시일종의 UE로간주될수있다. 또한,일례로,본발명의제안방식들은 MODE 3 V2X동작(및/또는 MODE 4 V2X동작)에만한정적으로적용될수도있다.또한,일례로,본발명의제안 방식들은사전에설정(/시그널링)된(특정) V2X채널(/시그널)전송(예를들어, PSSCH(및/또는(연동된) PSCCH및/또는 PSBCH))에만한정적으로적용될수도 있다.또한,일례로,본발명의제안방식들은 PSSCH와(연동된) PSCCH가 (주파수영역상에서)인접(ADJACENT)(및/또는이격(NON- ADJACENT))되어 전송될경우(및/또는사전에설정(/시그널링)된 MCS(및/또는코딩레이트 및/또는 RB)(값(/범위))기반의전송이수행될경우)에만한정적으로적용될수 도있다.또한,일례로,본발명의제안방식들은 MODE#3(및/또는 MODE#4) V2X CARRIER(및/또는(MODE#4(/3)) SL(/UL) SPS(및/또는 SL(/UL) DYNAMIC SCHEDULING) CARRIER)간에만한정적으로적용될수도있다.또한,일례로, 본발명의제안방식들은 CARRIER간에동기시그널(송신(및/또는수신))자원 위치및/또는개수(및/또는 V2X자원풀관련서브프레임위치및/또는개수 (및/또는서브채널크기및/또는개수))가동일한(및/또는(일부)상이한) 경우에만(한정적으로)적용될수도있다.일례로,본발명의제안방식들은 기지국과단말간의(V2X)통신에서도확장적용될수도있다.일례로,본 발명의제안방식들은 UNICAST(사이드링크)통신(및/또는 MULTICAST(혹은 GROUPCAST)(사이드링크)통신및/또는 BROADCAST(사이드링크)통신)에만 한정적으로적용될수도있다. It is obvious that they can be included as one, so they can be regarded as some kind of proposal method. In addition, the proposal methods described above may be implemented independently, but may also be implemented in the form of a combination (or merged) of some proposal methods. In the present invention, the proposed method was described based on the 3GPP NR system for convenience of explanation, but the range of the system to which the proposed method is applied can be extended to other systems other than the 3GPP NR system. For example, the proposed methods of the present invention are D2D communication. Here, as an example, D2D communication means that the UE communicates with other UEs using a direct wireless channel, where, as an example, the UE refers to the user's terminal, but network equipment such as a base station In the case of transmitting/receiving signals according to the communication method between the UEs, it can also be regarded as a kind of UE. In addition, as an example, the proposed methods of the present invention may be statically applied to the mode 3 V2X operation (and/or the mode 4 V2X operation). In addition, as an example, the proposed methods of the present invention are previously set (/signaled). It can also be applied statically to (specific) V2X channel (/signal) transmission (for example, PSSCH (and/or (associated) PSCCH and/or PSBCH)). In addition, as an example, the proposed methods of the present invention are PSSCH. And (linked) PSCCH (in the frequency domain) adjacent (ADJACENT) (and/or spaced (NON-ADJACENT)) and transmitted (and/or pre-set (/signaled) MCS (and/or coding rate) And/or RB) (if value (/range))-based transmission is performed), it may be applied statically. In addition, as an example, the proposed methods of the present invention are MODE#3 (and/or MODE#4). V2X CARRIER (and/or (MODE#4 (/3)) SL (/UL) SPS (and/or SL (/UL) DYNAMIC SCHEDULING) CARRIER) can also be applied statically. Also, as an example, the present invention The proposed methods are synchronous signals (sending (and/or receiving)) resource location and/or number (and/or V2X resource pool related subframe location and/or number (and/or subchannel size and/or number) between CARRIERs) )It may be applied (limitedly) only if (and/or (some) different) the same (and/or (some) different). For example, the proposed methods of the present invention may also be extended and applied to (V2X) communication between a base station and a terminal. The proposed methods of the invention may be applied only to UNICAST (sidelink) communications (and/or MULTICAST (or GROUPCAST) (sidelink) communications and/or BROADCAST (sidelink) communications).
[394] [394]
[395] 본밤명이적용되는통스 I시스렘예 [395] Tonks I Sisremye to which Bonbamname is applied
[396] 이로제한되는것은아니지만,본문서에개시된본발명의다양한설명 ,기능, 절차,제안,방법및/또는동작순서도들은기기들간에무선통신/연결(예, 5G)을 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 필요로하는다양한분야에적용될수있다. [396] The various descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts of the present invention disclosed in this document, but are not limited to this, establish wireless communication/connection (eg 5G) between devices. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 It can be applied to various fields of need.
[397] 이하,도면을참조하여보다구체적으로예시한다.이하의도면/설명에서 [397] Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, it is illustrated more specifically. In the following drawings/description
동일한도면부호는다르게기술하지않는한,동일하거나대응되는하드웨어 블블록,소프트웨어블록또는기능블록을예시할수있다. The same or corresponding hardware block, software block, or functional block may be illustrated unless the same drawing number is specified differently.
[398] 도 38은본발명에적용되는통신시스템 (1)을예시한다. [398] Fig. 38 illustrates a communication system 1 applied to the present invention.
[399] 도 38을참조하면,본발명에적용되는통신시스템 (1)은무선기기,기지국및 네트워크를포함한다.여기서 ,무선기기는무선접속기술 (예 , 5G NR(New RAT), LTE(Long Term Evolution))을이용하여통신을수행하는기기를의미하며 , 통신/무선 /5G기기로지칭될수있다.이로제한되는것은아니지만,무선기기는 로봇 (1_,차량 (lOOb-l, 100b-2), XR(eXtended Reality)기 7] (100c),휴대 기기 (Hand-held device)(100d),기·전 (100e), IoT(Internet of Thing)기기 (100f), [399] Referring to Figure 38, the communication system (1) applied to the present invention includes a wireless device, a base station, and a network. Here, the wireless device is a wireless access technology (eg, 5G NR (New RAT), LTE ( Long Term Evolution)) refers to a device that performs communication, and can be referred to as a communication/wireless/5G device. Although not limited to this, wireless devices are robots (1_, vehicles (lOOb-l, 100b-2)). ), XR (eXtended Reality) 7] (100c), Hand-held device (100d), Mechanism and Electricity (100e), IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f),
AI기기/서버 (400)를포함할수있다.예를들어,차량은무선통신기능이구비된 차량,자율주행차량,차량간통신을수행할수있는차량등을포함할수있다. 여기서 ,차량은 UAV(Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) (예 ,드론)를포함할수있다. XR 기기는 AR(Augmented Reality )/VR(Virtual Reality )/MR(Mixed Reality)기기를 포함하며 , HMD(Head-Mounted Device),차량에구비된 HUD(Head-Up Display), 텔레비전,스마트폰,컴퓨터,웨어러블디바이스,가전기기 ,디지털 It may include an AI device/server 400. For example, a vehicle may include a vehicle equipped with a wireless communication function, a self-driving vehicle, a vehicle capable of communicating between vehicles, etc. Here, the vehicle may include UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) (e.g. drone). XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality)/VR (Virtual Reality)/MR (Mixed Reality) devices, HMD (Head-Mounted Device), HUD (Head-Up Display), TV, smartphone, Computer, wearable device, home appliance, digital
사이니지 (signage),차량,로봇등의형태로구현될수있다.휴대기기는 It can be implemented in the form of signage, vehicles, robots, etc.
스마트폰,스마트패드,웨어러블기기 (예,스마트워치,스마트글래스), 컴퓨터 (예,노트북등)등을포함할수있다.가전은 TV,냉장고,세탁기등을 포함할수있다. IoT기기는센서,스마트미터등을포함할수있다.예를들어, 기지국,네트워크는무선기기로도구현될수있으며,특정무선기기 (200a)는 다른무선기기에게기지국/네트워크노드로동작할수도있다. This can include smartphones, smart pads, wearable devices (e.g. smart watches, smart glasses), computers (e.g. laptops, etc.). Home appliances can include TVs, refrigerators, washing machines, etc. IoT devices may include sensors, smart meters, etc. For example, a base station, network can be implemented as a wireless device, and a specific wireless device 200a can act as a base station/network node to other wireless devices.
[400] 무선기기 (100a~100f)는기지국 (200)을통해네트워크 (300)와연결될수있다. 무선기기 (100a~100f)에는 AI(Artificial Intelligence)기술이적용될수있으며, 무선기기 (100a~100f)는네트워크 (300)를통해 AI서버 (400)와연결될수있다. 네트워크 (300)는 3G네트워크, 4G (예, LTE)네트워크또는 5G (예, NR)네트워크 등을이용하여구성될수있다.무선기기 (100a~100f)는 [400] The wireless device (100a~100f) can be connected to the network 300 through the base station 200. AI (Artificial Intelligence) technology can be applied to wireless devices (100a~100f), and wireless devices (100a~100f) can be connected to the AI server 400 through the network 300. The network 300 may be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (e.g., LTE) network, or a 5G (e.g., NR) network. Wireless devices (100a~100f) are
기지국 (200)/네트워크 (300)를통해서로통신할수도있지만,기지국/네트워크를 통하지않고직접통신 (e.g.사이드링크통신 (sidelink communication))할수도 있다.예를들어,차량들 (100b- 1, 100b-2)은직접통신 (e.g. V2V(Vehicle to It is also possible to communicate via the base station 200 / network 300, but can also communicate directly (eg sidelink communication) without going through the base station / network. For example, vehicles (100b-1, 100b-2) is a direct communication (eg V2V(Vehicle to
Vehicle)/V2X( Vehicle to everything) communication)을할수있다.또한, IoT 기기 (예,센서)는다른 IoT기기 (예,센서)또는다른무선기기 (W0a~100f)와직접 통신을할수있다. Vehicle)/V2X (Vehicle to everything) communication) In addition, IoT devices (e.g., sensors) can communicate directly with other IoT devices (e.g., sensors) or other wireless devices (W0a~100f).
[401] 무선기 7l (100a~100f)/7l지국 (200),기지국 (200)/기지국 (200)간에는무선 [401] Radio between 7l (100a~100f)/7l base station (200), base station (200)/base station (200)
통신/연결 (150a, 150b, 150c)이이뤄질수있다.여기서,무선통신/연결은 상향/하향링크통신 (150a)과사이드링크통신 (150b) (또는, D2D통신),기지국간 통신 (150c)(e.g. relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul)과같은다양한무선접속 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 기술 (예, 5G NR)을통해 이뤄질수있다.무선통신/연결 (150a, 150b, 150c)을통해 무선기기와기지국/무선기기 ,기지국과기지국은서로무선신호를 Communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can be achieved Here, wireless communication/connection includes uplink/downlink communication 150a and sidelink communication 150b (or, D2D communication), base station communication 150c ( Various wireless connections such as relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul) 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Can be achieved through technology (eg 5G NR). Wireless devices and base stations/wireless devices, base stations and base stations through wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) The base stations transmit wireless signals to each other.
송신/수신할수있다.예를들어,무선통신/연결 (150a, 150b, 150c)은다양한물리 채널을통해신호를송신/수신할수있다.이를위해,본발명의다양한제안들에 기반하여,무선신호의송신/수신을위한다양한구성정보설정과정,다양한 신호처리과정 (예,채널인코딩/디코딩,변조/복조,자원매핑/디매핑등),자원 할당과정등중적어도일부가수행될수있다. For example, wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can transmit/receive signals through various physical channels. To this end, based on various proposals of the present invention, wireless signals At least some of the process of setting various configuration information for transmission/reception of the device, various signal processing processes (e.g., channel encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, resource mapping/demapping, etc.), resource allocation process, etc. can be performed.
[402] 본밤명이 적용되는무서 기기 예 [402] Example of a device to which Bon Bam name applies
[403] 도 39은본발명에 적용될수있는무선기기를예시한다. [403] Fig. 39 shows a wireless device applicable to the present invention.
[404] 도 39을참조하면,제 1무선기기 (W0)와제 2무선기기 (200)는다양한무선 접속기술 (예, LTE, NR)을통해무선신호를송수신할수있다.여기서,{제 1무선 기기 (100),제 2무선기기 (200)}은도 38의 {무선기기 (lOOx),기지국 (200)} 및/또는{무선기기 (lOOx),무선기기 (lOOx)}에 대응할수있다. [404] Referring to FIG. 39, the first wireless device W0 and the second wireless device 200 can transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (eg, LTE, NR). Here, the first wireless device W0 and the second wireless device 200 can transmit and receive wireless signals. The device 100 and the second wireless device 200 may correspond to the "wireless device (100x), base station (200)" and/or "wireless device (100x), wireless device (100x)" in Fig. 38.
[405] 제 1무선기기 (100)는하나이상의프로세서 (102)및하나이상의 메모리 (104)를 포함하며,추가적으로하나이상의송수신기 ( 106)및/또는하나이상의 안테나 (108)을더포함할수있다.프로세서 (102)는메모리 (104)및/또는 송수신기 (106)를제어하며 ,본문서에 개시된설명,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작순서도들을구현하도록구성될수있다.예를들어 , [405] The first wireless device 100 includes one or more processors 102 and one or more memories 104, and may additionally include one or more transceivers 106 and/or one or more antennas 108. Processor 102 controls memory 104 and/or transceiver 106, and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flow charts disclosed in this document.
프로세서 (102)는메모리 (W4)내의정보를처리하여제 1정보/신호를생성한뒤, 송수신기 (106)을통해제 1정보/신호를포함하는무선신호를전송할수있다. 또한,프로세서 (102)는송수신기 (106)를통해제 2정보/신호를포함하는무선 신호를수신한뒤,제 2정보/신호의신호처리로부터 얻은정보를메모리 (W4)에 저장할수있다.메모리 (104)는프로세서 (102)와연결될수있고, The processor 102 may process the information in the memory W4 to generate the first information/signal, and then transmit a wireless signal including the first information/signal through the transceiver 106. Further, the processor 102 may store the information obtained from the signal processing of the second information/signal in the memory W4 after receiving the wireless signal including the second information/signal through the transmitter/receiver 106. 104 can be connected with the processor 102,
프로세서 (102)의동작과관련한다양한정보를저장할수있다.예를들어 , 메모리 (104)는프로세서 (102)에 의해제어되는프로세스들중일부또는전부를 수행하거나,본문서에 개시된설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작 순서도들을수행하기위한명령들을포함하는소프트웨어코드를저장할수 있다.여기서,프로세서 (102)와메모리 (104)는무선통신기술 (예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록설계된통신모뎀/회로/칩의 일부일수있다.송수신기 (106)는 프로세서 (102)와연결될수있고,하나이상의 안테나 (W8)를통해무선신호를 송신및/또는수신할수있다.송수신기 (106)는송신기 및/또는수신기를포함할 수있다.송수신기 (106)는 RF(Radio Frequency)유닛과혼용될수있다.본 발명에서무선기기는통신모뎀/회로/칩을의미할수도있다. A variety of information related to the operation of the processor 102 can be stored. For example, the memory 104 may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor 102, or the descriptions, functions, and processes disclosed in this document. It is possible to store software code including instructions for performing procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts, where processor 102 and memory 104 are used to implement wireless communication technologies (e.g., LTE, NR). It may be part of a designed communication modem/circuit/chip. The transceiver 106 can be connected to the processor 102, and can transmit and/or receive wireless signals through one or more antennas (W8). It may include a transmitter and/or a receiver. The transmitter/receiver 106 may be used interchangeably with an RF (Radio Frequency) unit. In the present invention, the wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.
[406] 제 2무선기기 (200)는하나이상의프로세서 (202),하나이상의 메모리 (204)를 포함하며,추가적으로하나이상의송수신기 (206)및/또는하나이상의 안테나 (208)를더포함할수있다.프로세서 (202)는메모리 (204)및/또는 송수신기 (206)를제어하며 ,본문서에 개시된설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작순서도들을구현하도록구성될수있다.예를들어 , 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 프로세서 (202)는메모리 (204)내의정보를처리하여제 3정보/신호를생성한뒤, 송수신기 (206)를통해제 3정보/신호를포함하는무선신호를전송할수있다. 또한,프로세서 (202)는송수신기 (206)를통해제 4정보/신호를포함하는무선 신호를수신한뒤,제 4정보/신호의신호처리로부터 얻은정보를메모리 (204)에 저장할수있다.메모리 (204)는프로세서 (202)와연결될수있고, [406] The second wireless device 200 includes one or more processors 202, one or more memories 204, and may additionally include one or more transceivers 206 and/or one or more antennas 208. Processor The 202 controls the memory 204 and/or the transceiver 206 and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flow diagrams disclosed in this document. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 The processor 202 processes the information in the memory 204 to generate the third information/signal, and then transmits the third information/signal through the transceiver 206. It can transmit wireless signals including. Further, the processor 202 may store the information obtained from the signal processing of the fourth information/signal in the memory 204 after receiving the wireless signal including the fourth information/signal through the transmitter/receiver 206. 204 can be connected with the processor 202,
프로세서 (202)의동작과관련한다양한정보를저장할수있다.예를들어 , 메모리 (204)는프로세서 (202)에 의해제어되는프로세스들중일부또는전부를 수행하거나,본문서에 개시된설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작 순서도들을수행하기위한명령들을포함하는소프트웨어코드를저장할수 있다.여기서,프로세서 (202)와메모리 (204)는무선통신기술 (예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록설계된통신모뎀/회로/칩의 일부일수있다.송수신기 (206)는 프로세서 (202)와연결될수있고,하나이상의 안테나 (208)를통해무선신호를 송신및/또는수신할수있다.송수신기 (206)는송신기 및/또는수신기를포함할 수있다송수신기 (206)는 RF유닛과혼용될수있다.본발명에서무선기기는 통신모뎀/회로/칩을의미할수도있다. A variety of information related to the operation of the processor 202 can be stored. For example, the memory 204 may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor 202, or the descriptions, functions, and processes disclosed in this document. It is possible to store software code including instructions for performing procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts, where processor 202 and memory 204 are used to implement wireless communication technologies (e.g., LTE, NR). It may be part of a designed communication modem/circuit/chip. Transceiver 206 may be connected to processor 202, and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals through one or more antennas 208. Transceiver 206 is capable of transmitting and receiving radio signals. It may include a transmitter and/or receiver. Transmitter/receiver 206 may be used interchangeably with an RF unit. In the present invention, a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.
[407] 이하,무선기기 (100, 200)의하드웨어요소에 대해보다구체적으로설명한다. 이로제한되는것은아니지만,하나이상의프로토콜계층이하나이상의 프로세서 (W2, 202)에의해구현될수있다.예를들어,하나이상의 [407] Hereinafter, the hardware elements of the wireless devices 100 and 200 will be described in more detail. Although not limited to this, more than one protocol layer may be implemented by more than one processor (W2, 202); for example, more than one layer of protocol.
프로세서 (102, 202)는하나이상의 계층 (예, PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, Processors 102, 202 are one or more layers (e.g., PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC,
SDAP와같은기능적 계층)을구현할수있다.하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)는 본문서에 개시된설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작순서도들에 따라 하나이상의 PDU(Protocol Data Unit)및/또는하나이상의 SDU(Service Data Unit)를생성할수있다.하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)는본문서에 개시된 설명,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작순서도들에따라메시지,제어정보, 데이터또는정보를생성할수있다.하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)는본문서에 개시된기능,절차,제안및/또는방법에따라 PDU, SDU,메시지,제어정보, 데이터또는정보를포함하는신호 (예,베이스밴드신호)를생성하여,하나 이상의송수신기 (W6, 206)에게제공할수있다.하나이상의프로세서 (102,One or more processors (102, 202) may implement one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and one or more protocol data units (PDUs) and/or operational flow charts according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts disclosed in the text. / Or one or more SDUs (Service Data Units) can be created. One or more processors (102, 202) can be used for messages, control information, and data according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts disclosed in this document. Alternatively, one or more processors (102, 202) may have a signal (e.g., base) containing PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information in accordance with the functions, procedures, proposals and/or methods disclosed in this document. Band signal), which can be provided to one or more transceivers (W6, 206), one or more processors (102,
202)는하나이상의송수신기 (106, 206)로부터신호 (예,베이스밴드신호)를 수신할수있고,본문서에 개시된설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작 순서도들에 따라 PDU, SDU,메시지 ,제어정보,데이터또는정보를획득할수 있다. 202 can receive signals (e.g., baseband signals) from one or more transmitters and receivers 106, 206, and PDUs, SDUs, and PDUs, according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts disclosed in this document. You can acquire messages, control information, data or information.
[408] 하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)는컨트롤러,마이크로컨트롤러,마이크로 [408] One or more processors (102, 202) can be used as a controller, microcontroller, or microcontroller.
프로세서또는마이크로컴퓨터로지칭될수있다.하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)는하드웨어,펌웨어,소프트웨어,또는이들의조합에의해구현될수있다. 일 예로,하나이상의 ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit),하나이상의 DSP(Digital Signal Processor),하나이상의 DSPD(Digital Signal Processing Device), 하나이상의 PLD(Programmable Logic Device)또는하나이상의 FPGA(Field 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 It may be referred to as a processor or microcomputer. One or more processors 102, 202 may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof. For example, one or more ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), one or more DSP (Digital Signal Processor), one or more DSPD (Digital Signal Processing Device), one or more PLD (Programmable Logic Device) or one or more FPGA (Field 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
Programmable Gate Arrays)가하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)에포함될수있다. 본문서에 개시된설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작순서도들은펌웨어 또는소프트웨어를사용하여구현될수있고,펌웨어또는소프트웨어는모듈, 절차,기능등을포함하도록구현될수있다.본문서에 개시된설명,기능,절차, 제안,방법 및/또는동작순서도들은수행하도록설정된펌웨어또는 Programmable Gate Arrays) can be included in one or more processors (102, 202). Descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flow charts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software, and firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, etc. Disclosed in this document. Descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flow charts are the firmware set to perform or
소프트웨어는하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)에포함되거나,하나이상의 메모리 (104, 204)에 저장되어하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)에의해구동될수 있다.본문서에 개시된설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작순서도들은 코드,명령어 및/또는명령어의 집합형태로펌웨어또는소프트웨어를사용하여 구현될수있다. The software may be contained in one or more processors 102, 202, or stored in one or more memories 104, 204 and run by one or more processors 102, 202. Descriptions, functions, procedures, and suggestions disclosed herein. The method and/or operational flow charts may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of a set of codes, instructions and/or instructions.
[409] 하나이상의 메모리 (104, 204)는하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)와연결될수 있고,다양한형태의 데이터,신호,메시지,정보,프로그램,코드,지시 및/또는 명령을저장할수있다.하나이상의 메모리 (104, 204)는 ROM, RAM, EPROM, 플래시 메모리,하드드라이브,레지스터,캐쉬 메모리,컴퓨터판독저장매체 및/또는이들의조합으로구성될수있다.하나이상의 메모리 (104, 204)는하나 이상의프로세서 (102, 202)의 내부및/또는외부에 위치할수있다.또한,하나 이상의 메모리 (104, 204)는유선또는무선연결과같은다양한기술을통해하나 이상의프로세서 (102, 202)와연결될수있다. [409] One or more memories (104, 204) may be connected to one or more processors (102, 202) and may store various types of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions and/or instructions. One or more memories 104, 204 may consist of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drive, register, cache memory, computer readable storage medium, and/or combinations thereof. One or more memories 104, 204 It may be located inside and/or outside of one or more processors 102, 202. In addition, one or more memories 104, 204 can be connected to one or more processors 102, 202 through various technologies such as wired or wireless connection. Can be
[410] 하나이상의송수신기 (106, 206)는하나이상의다른장치에게본문서의 [410] One or more transmitters and receivers (106, 206) may be connected to one or more other devices.
방법들및/또는동작순서도등에서 언급되는사용자데이터 ,제어정보,무선 신호/채널등을전송할수있다.하나이상의송수신기 (W6, 206)는하나이상의 다른장치로부터본문서에 개시된설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작 순서도등에서 언급되는사용자데이터 ,제어 정보,무선신호/채널등을수신할 수있다.예를들어,하나이상의송수신기 (106, 206)는하나이상의 It can transmit user data, control information, radio signals/channels, etc. mentioned in methods and/or operational flow charts, etc. One or more transmitters and receivers (W6, 206) have the descriptions, functions, procedures, and procedures disclosed in this document from one or more other devices. It can receive user data, control information, radio signals/channels, etc. mentioned in the proposal, method and/or operation flow chart, etc. For example, one or more transceivers 106, 206 may have one or more
프로세서 (102, 202)와연결될수있고,무선신호를송수신할수있다.예를들어, 하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)는하나이상의송수신기 (106, 206)가하나 이상의다른장치에게사용자데이터 ,제어 정보또는무선신호를전송하도록 제어할수있다.또한,하나이상의프로세서 (102, 202)는하나이상의 It can be connected with the processors 102, 202, and can transmit and receive wireless signals, e.g., one or more processors 102, 202 have one or more transceivers 106, 206 to transmit user data, control information to one or more other devices. Or it can be controlled to transmit wireless signals. In addition, one or more processors (102, 202) can be
송수신기 (W6, 206)가하나이상의다른장치로부터사용자데이터,제어정보 또는무선신호를수신하도록제어할수있다.또한,하나이상의송수신기 (106, 206)는하나이상의 안테나 (108, 208)와연결될수있고,하나이상의 Transceivers (W6, 206) can be controlled to receive user data, control information or radio signals from one or more other devices. In addition, one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be connected to one or more antennas (108, 208). , One or more
송수신기 (106, 206)는하나이상의 안테나 (108, 208)를통해본문서에 개시된 설명 ,기능,절차,제안,방법 및/또는동작순서도등에서 언급되는사용자 데이터,제어 정보,무선신호/채널등을송수신하도록설정될수있다.본 문서에서,하나이상의 안테나는복수의물리 안테나이거나,복수의논리 안테나 (예,안테나포트)일수있다.하나이상의송수신기 (106, 206)는수신된 사용자데이터,제어정보,무선신호/채널등을하나이상의프로세서 (102, Transceiver (106, 206) through one or more antennas (108, 208), the user data, control information, radio signal / channel, etc. mentioned in the description, function, procedure, proposal, method and/or operation flow chart disclosed in this document. In this document, one or more antennas may be multiple physical antennas or multiple logical antennas (e.g., antenna ports). One or more transceivers 106, 206 may be configured to transmit and receive user data, control information, One or more processors (102,
202)를이용하여처리하기 위해,수신된무선신호/채널등을 RF밴드신호에서 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 베이스밴드신호로변환 (Convert)할수있다.하나이상의송수신기 (106, 206)는 하나이상의프로세서 ( W2, 202)를이용하여 처리된사용자데이터 ,제어정보, 무선신호/채널등을베이스밴드신호에서 RF밴드신호로변환할수있다.이를 위하여,하나이상의송수신기 (106, 206)는 (아날로그)오실례이터 및/또는 필터를포함할수있다. 202) to process the received wireless signal/channel, etc. from the RF band signal. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Can be converted to baseband signals. One or more transceivers (106, 206) have user data processed using one or more processors (W2, 202), Control information, radio signals/channels, etc. can be converted from baseband signals to RF band signals. For this purpose, one or more of the transceivers 106 and 206 may include (analog) oscillators and/or filters.
[411] 본밤명이 적용되는시호처리회로예 [411] Example of a city call processing circuit to which this name is applied
[412] 도 40는전송신호를위한신호처리회로를예시한다. 40 illustrates a signal processing circuit for a transmission signal.
[413] 도 40를참조하면,신호처리 회로 (1000)는스크램블러 (1010),변조기 (1020), 레이어 매퍼 (1030),프리코더 (1040),자원매퍼 (1050),신호생성기 (1060)를 포함할수있다.이로제한되는것은아니지만,도 40의동작/기능은도 39의 프로세서 (102, 202)및/또는송수신기 (106, 206)에서수행될수있다.도 40의 하드웨어요소는도 39의프로세서 (102, 202)및/또는송수신기 (106, 206)에서 구현될수있다.예를들어,블록 1010 1060은도 39의프로세서 (102, 202)에서 구현될수있다.또한,블록 1010 1050은도 39의프로세서 (102, 202)에서 구현되고,블록 1060은도 39의송수신기 (106, 206)에서구현될수있다. Referring to FIG. 40, the signal processing circuit 1000 includes a scrambler 1010, a modulator 1020, a layer mapper 1030, a precoder 1040, a resource mapper 1050, and a signal generator 1060. Although not limited to this, the operations/functions of FIG. 40 may be performed in the processors 102, 202 and/or the transceivers 106, 206 of FIG. 39. The hardware elements of FIG. 40 are the processors of FIG. 39. (102, 202) and/or the transceivers 106, 206. For example, block 1010 1060 may be implemented in the processor 102, 202 of FIG. 39. Also, block 1010 1050 may be implemented in the processor of FIG. 39 ( 102, 202), and block 1060 may be implemented in the transceiver 106, 206 of FIG.
[414] 코드워드는도 40의신호처리회로 (1000)를거쳐무선신호로변환될수있다. 여기서,코드워드는정보블록의부호화된비트시퀀스이다.정보블록은 전송블록 (예, UL-SCH전송블록, DL-SCH전송블록)을포함할수있다.무선 신호는다양한물리 채널 (예, PUSCH, PDSCH)을통해 전송될수있다. [414] The code word may be converted into a wireless signal through the signal processing circuit 1000 of FIG. 40. Here, the codeword is a coded bit sequence of the information block. The information block may include a transport block (e.g., a UL-SCH transport block, a DL-SCH transport block). A radio signal is a variety of physical channels (e.g., PUSCH, etc.) PDSCH) can be transmitted.
[415] 구체적으로,코드워드는스크램블러 (1010)에의해스크램블된비트시퀀스로 변환될수있다.스크램블에사용되는스크램블시퀀스는초기화값에기반하여 생성되며,초기화값은무선기기의 ID정보등이포함될수있다.스크램블된 비트시퀀스는변조기 (1020)에의해 변조심볼시퀀스로변조될수있다.변조 방식은 pi/2-BPSK(pi/2-Binary Phase Shift Keying), m-PSK(m- Phase Shift Keying), m-QAM(m-Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)등을포함할수있다.복소변조 심볼시퀀스는레이어 매퍼 (1030)에 의해하나이상의 전송레이어로매핑될수 있다.각전송레이어의 변조심볼들은프리코더 (1040)에 의해해당안테나 포트 (들)로매핑될수있다 (프리코딩).프리코더 (1040)의출력 z는레이어 매퍼 (1030)의출력 y를 N*M의프리코딩 행렬 W와곱해 얻을수있다.여기서, [415] Specifically, the codeword can be converted into a scrambled bit sequence by the scrambler 1010. The scramble sequence used for scramble is generated based on the initialization value, and the initialization value includes ID information of the wireless device, etc. The scrambled bit sequence can be modulated into a modulation symbol sequence by the modulator 1020. Modulation methods are pi/2-BPSK (pi/2-Binary Phase Shift Keying), m-PSK (m-Phase Shift Keying). ), m-QAM (m-Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), etc. The complex modulated symbol sequence can be mapped to one or more transmission layers by the layer mapper 1030. The modulation symbols of each transmission layer are precoder 1040. ) Can be mapped to the corresponding antenna port(s) (precoding). The output z of the precoder 1040 can be obtained by multiplying the output y of the layer mapper 1030 by the precoding matrix W of N*M. ,
N은안테나포트의 개수, M은전송레이어의 개수이다.여기서 , N is the number of antenna ports, M is the number of transmission layers, where,
프리코더 (1040)는복소변조심볼들에 대한트랜스픔 (transform)프리코딩 (예, DFT변환)을수행한이후에프리코딩을수행할수있다.또한,프리코더 (1040)는 트랜스폼프리코딩을수행하지 않고프리코딩을수행할수있다. The precoder 1040 may perform precoding after performing transform precoding (e.g., DFT conversion) for complex modulation symbols. In addition, the precoder 1040 may perform transform precoding. Precoding can be performed without performing it.
[416] 자원매퍼 (1050)는각안테나포트의 변조심볼들을시간-주파수자원에 매핑할 수있다.시간-주파수자원은시간도메인에서복수의심볼 (예 , CP-OFDMA심볼, DFT-s-OFDMA심볼)을포함하고,주파수도메인에서복수의부반송파를포함할 수있다.신호생성기 (1060)는매핑된변조심볼들로부터무선신호를생성하며, 생성된무선신호는각안테나를통해다른기기로전송될수있다.이를위해, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 신호생성기 (1060)는 IFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)모듈및 CP(Cyclic Prefix)삽입기 , DAC(Digital-to-Analog Converter),주파수상향변환기 (frequency uplink converter)등을포함할수있다. [416] The resource mapper 1050 may map the modulation symbols of each antenna port to a time-frequency resource. The time-frequency resource is a plurality of symbols (eg, CP-OFDMA symbol, DFT-s-OFDMA symbol) in a time domain. ), and may include a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain. The signal generator 1060 generates a radio signal from the mapped modulated symbols, and the generated radio signal can be transmitted to another device through each antenna. .for teeth, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Signal generator 1060 is an IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) module, CP (Cyclic Prefix) inserter, DAC (Digital-to-Analog Converter), frequency up converter (frequency uplink converter), etc.
[417] 무선기기에서수신신호를위한신호처리과정은도 40의신호처리 [417] The signal processing process for the received signal in the wireless device is shown in Figure 40
과정 (1W0~1060)의 역으로구성될수있다.예를들어,무선기기 (예,도 39의 100, 200)는안테나포트/송수신기를통해외부로부터무선신호를수신할수있다. 수신된무선신호는신호복원기를통해베이스밴드신호로변환될수있다. 이를위해,신호복원기는주파수하향변환기 (frequency downlink converter), ADC(analog-to-digital converter), CP제거기 , FFT(Fast Fourier Transform)모듈을 포함할수있다.이후,베이스밴드신호는자원디-매퍼과정, It can be configured in reverse of the process (1W0~1060). For example, a wireless device (e.g., 100, 200 in Fig. 39) can receive a wireless signal from the outside through an antenna port/transmitter/receiver. The received wireless signal can be converted into a baseband signal through a signal restorer. To this end, the signal restorer may include a frequency downlink converter, an analog-to-digital converter (ADC), a CP remover, and a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) module. After that, the baseband signal is a resource de-mapper. process,
포스트코딩 (postcoding)과정,복조과정 및디-스크램블과정을거쳐코드워드로 복원될수있다.코드워드는복호 (decoding)를거쳐원래의 정보블록으로복원될 수있다.따라서,수신신호를위한신호처리회로 (미도시)는신호복원기,자원 디-매퍼,포스트코더,복조기,디-스크램블러 및복호기를포함할수있다. Postcoding, demodulation, and de-scramble can be performed to restore a codeword. The codeword can be decoded and restored to an original information block. Therefore, a signal processing circuit for a received signal. (Not shown) may include a signal restorer, a resource demapper, a post coder, a demodulator, a descrambler, and a decoder.
[418] 본밤명이 적용되는무서 기기활용예 [418] Examples of the use of office equipment to which Bonbamname is applied
[419] 도 41은본발명에 적용되는무선기기의다른예를나타낸다.무선기기는 [419] Fig. 41 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention.
사용-예/서비스에따라다양한형태로구현될수있다 (도 38참조). It can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service (see Fig. 38).
[42이 도 41을참조하면,무선기기 (100, 200)는도 39의무선기기 (100, 200)에 [42] Referring to FIG. 41, the wireless devices 100 and 200 refer to the wireless devices 100 and 200 of FIG.
대응하며,다양한요소 (element),성분 (component),유닛 /부 (unit),및/또는 모듈 (module)로구성될수있다.예를들어,무선기기 (100, 200)는통신부 (110), 제어부 (120),메모리부 (130)및추가요소 (140)를포함할수있다.통신부는통신 회로 (112)및송수신기 (들) (114)을포함할수있다.예를들어,통신회로 (112)는 도 39의하나이상의프로세서 (102,202)및/또는하나이상의 메모리 (104,204)를 포함할수있다.예를들어,송수신기 (들) (114)는도 39의하나이상의 Correspondingly, various elements (element), component (component), unit / unit (unit), and / or may be composed of a module (module). For example, the wireless devices (100, 200) is a communication unit (110), A control unit 120, a memory unit 130, and an additional element 140 may be included. The communication unit may include a communication circuit 112 and a transceiver(s) 114. For example, the communication circuit 112 May include one or more processors 102, 202 and/or one or more memories 104, 204 of FIG. 39. For example, the transceiver(s) 114 may include one or more of the processors 102, 202 of FIG.
송수신기 (106,206)및/또는하나이상의 안테나 (108, 208)을포함할수있다. Transceivers 106,206 and/or one or more antennas 108,208 may be included.
제어부 (120)는통신부 (110),메모리부 (130)및추가요소 (140)와전기적으로 연결되며무선기기의 제반동작을제어한다.예를들어,제어부 (120)는 The control unit 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140 and controls all operations of the wireless device. For example, the control unit 120
메모리부 (130)에 저장된프로그램/코드/명령/정보에 기반하여무선기기의 전기적/기계적동작을제어할수있다.또한,제어부 (120)는메모리부 (130)에 저장된정보를통신부 (1 W)을통해외부 (예 ,다른통신기기 )로무선/유선 인터페이스를통해전송하거나,통신부 (110)를통해외부 (예,다른통신 기기)로부터무선/유선인터페이스를통해수신된정보를메모리부 (130)에 저장할수있다. The electrical/mechanical operation of the wireless device can be controlled based on the program/code/command/information stored in the memory unit 130. In addition, the control unit 120 transmits information stored in the memory unit 130 to the communication unit (1W). The information received through a wireless/wired interface is transmitted to an external (e.g., other communication device) through a wireless/wired interface or from an external (e.g., other communication device) through the communication unit (110). Can be stored in
[421] 추가요소 (140)는무선기기의종류에 따라다양하게구성될수있다.예를 [421] The additional element 140 can be configured in various ways depending on the type of wireless device.
들어,추가요소 (140)는파워유닛 /배터리,입출력부 (I/O unit),구동부및 컴퓨팅부중적어도하나를포함할수있다.이로제한되는것은아니지만,무선 기기는로봇 (도 38, 100a),차량 (도 38, 100b- 1, 100b-2), XR기기 (도 38, 100c),휴대 기기 (도 38, 100d),가전 (도 38, 100e), IoT기기 (도 38, 100f),디지털방송용단말, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 홀로그램장치,공공안전장치, MTC장치,의료장치,핀테크장치 (또는금융 장치 ),보안장치 ,기후/환경장치 , AI서버 /기기 (도 38, 400),기지국 (도 38, 200), 네트워크노드등의 형태로구현될수있다.무선기기는사용-예/서비스에따라 이동가능하거나고정된장소에서사용될수있다. For example, the additional element 140 may include at least one of a power unit/battery, an I/O unit, a driving unit and a computing unit. Although not limited to this, the wireless device may be a robot (Figs. 38, 100A), Vehicles (Figs. 38, 100b-1, 100b-2), XR devices (Figs. 38, 100c), portable devices (Figs. 38, 100d), home appliances (Figs. 38, 100e), IoT devices (Figs. 38, 100f), digital Broadcasting Terminal, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 Hologram device, public safety device, MTC device, medical device, fintech device (or financial device), security device, climate/environment device, AI server/device (Fig. 38, 400), base stations (Figs. 38, 200), network nodes, etc. Wireless devices can be movable or used in fixed places depending on use-example/service.
[422] 도 41에서무선기기 (100, 200)내의다양한요소,성분,유닛 /부,및/또는모듈은 전체가유선인터페이스를통해상호연결되거나,적어도일부가통신부 (1 W)를 통해무선으로연결될수있다.예를들어,무선기기 (100, 200)내에서 [422] In FIG. 41, various elements, components, units/parts, and/or modules in the wireless devices (100, 200) are all connected to each other through a wired interface, or at least some parts are wirelessly connected through a communication unit (1 W). Can be connected, e.g. within a wireless device (100, 200)
제어부 (120)와통신부 (no)는유선으로연결되며,제어부 (120)와제 1유닛 (예, The control unit 120 and the communication unit (no) are connected by wire, and the control unit 120 and the first unit (e.g.,
130, 140)은통신부 (110)를통해무선으로연결될수있다.또한,무선기기 (100, 200)내의각요소,성분,유닛 /부,및/또는모듈은하나이상의요소를더포함할 수있다.예를들어,제어부 (120)는하나이상의프로세서 집합으로구성될수 있다.예를들어,제어부 (120)는통신제어프로세서,어플리케이션 130, 140 may be connected wirelessly through the communication unit 110. In addition, each element, component, unit/part, and/or module in the wireless device 100, 200 may further include one or more elements. For example, the control unit 120 may be composed of a set of one or more processors. For example, the control unit 120 is a communication control processor, an application
프로세서 (Application processor), ECU(Electronic Control Unit),그래픽처리 프로세서,메모리 제어프로세서등의 집합으로구성될수있다.다른예로, 메모리부 (130)는 RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM(Dynamic RAM), ROM(Read Only Memory),늘래시 메모리 (flash memory),휘발성 메모리 (volatile memory),비 -휘발성 메모리 (non-volatile memory)및/또는이들의조합으로 구성될수있다. It can be composed of a set of processor (Application processor), ECU (Electronic Control Unit), graphics processing processor, memory control processor, etc. As another example, the memory unit 130 is a RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (Dynamic RAM) , ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, and/or combinations thereof.
[423] 이하,도 41의구현예에 대해도면을참조하여보다자세히설명한다. [423] Hereinafter, an embodiment of FIG. 41 will be described in more detail with reference to the drawings.
[424] 본밤명이 적용되는휴대기기 예 [424] Examples of mobile devices to which Bonn Bam name applies
[425] 도 42는본발명에 적용되는휴대기기를예시한다.휴대기기는스마트폰, 스마트패드,웨어러블기기 (예,스마트워치,스마트글래스),휴대용컴퓨터 (예, 노트북등)을포함할수있다.휴대기기는 MS (Mobile Station), UT(user terminal), MSS(Mobile Subscriber Station), SS(Subscriber Station), AMS(Advanced Mobile Station)또는 WT(Wireless terminal)로지칭될수있다. [425] Figure 42 illustrates a portable device applied to the present invention. The portable device may include a smart phone, a smart pad, a wearable device (eg, a smart watch, a smart glass), a portable computer (eg, a notebook, etc.). Mobile devices may be referred to as MS (Mobile Station), UT (user terminal), MSS (Mobile Subscriber Station), SS (Subscriber Station), AMS (Advanced Mobile Station), or WT (Wireless terminal).
[426] 도 42를참조하면,휴대기기 (100)는안테나부 (108),통신부 (110),제어부 (120), 메모리부 (130),전원공급부 (140a),인터페이스부 (140b)및입출력부 (140c)를 포함할수있다.안테나부 (108)는통신부 (H0)의 일부로구성될수있다.블록 110~130/140a~140c는각각도 41의블록 110 130/140에 대응한다. [426] Referring to FIG. 42, the portable device 100 includes an antenna unit 108, a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, a power supply unit 140a, an interface unit 140b, and input/output It may include a part 140c. The antenna part 108 may be configured as a part of the communication part H0. Blocks 110 to 130/140a to 140c correspond to blocks 110 and 130/140 of 41, respectively.
[427] 통신부 (110)는다른무선기기,기지국들과신호 (예,데이터,제어신호등)를 송수신할수있다.제어부 (120)는휴대기기 (100)의구성요소들을제어하여 다양한동작을수행할수있다.제어부 (120)는 AP(Application Processor)를포함할 수있다.메모리부 (130)는휴대기기 (100)의구동에필요한 [427] The communication unit 110 can transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other wireless devices and base stations. The control unit 120 controls components of the mobile device 100 to perform various operations. The control unit 120 may include an application processor (AP). The memory unit 130 is required to drive the mobile device 100.
데이터/파라미터/프로그램/코드/명령을저장할수있다.또한,메모리부 (130)는 입/출력되는데이터/정보등을저장할수있다.전원공급부 (140a)는휴대 기기 (100)에게전원을공급하며,유/무선충전회로,배터리등을포함할수있다. 인터페이스부 (140b)는휴대기기 (100)와다른외부기기의 연결을지원할수 있다.인터페이스부 (140b)는외부기기와의 연결을위한다양한포트 (예,오디오 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 입/출력포트,비디오입/출력포트)를포함할수있다.입출력부 (140c)는영상 정보/신호,오디오정보/신호,데이터 ,및/또는사용자로부터입력되는정보를 입력받거나출력할수있다.입출력부 (140c)는카메라,마이크로폰,사용자 입력부,디스플레이부 (140d),스피커및/또는햅틱모듈등을포함할수있다. Data/parameters/programs/codes/commands can be stored. In addition, the memory unit 130 can store input/output data/information, etc. The power supply unit 140a supplies power to the portable device 100. And may include wired/wireless charging circuits, batteries, etc. The interface unit 140b may support connection between the portable device 100 and other external devices. The interface unit 140b provides various ports (e.g., audio) for connection with an external device. 2020/175955 1» (:1^1{2020/002889 input/output port, video input/output port) can be included. Input/output unit 140c includes video information/signal, audio information/signal, data, and/ Alternatively, information input from the user may be input or output. The input/output unit 140c may include a camera, a microphone, a user input unit, a display unit 140d, a speaker, and/or a haptic module.
[428] 일예로,데이터통신의경우,입출력부 (140c)는사용자로부터입력된 [428] For example, in the case of data communication, the input/output unit 140c
정보/신호 (예,터치 ,문자,음성 ,이미지 ,비디오)를획득하며,획득된정보/신호는 메모리부 (130)에저장될수있다.통신부 (H0)는메모리에저장된정보/신호를 무선신호로변환하고,변환된무선신호를다른무선기기에게직접전송하거나 기지국에게전송할수있다.또한,통신부 (H0)는다른무선기기또는 It acquires information/signals (eg, touch, text, voice, image, video), and the acquired information/signal can be stored in the memory unit 130. The communication unit H0 transfers the information/signals stored in the memory to a wireless signal. In addition, the communication unit (H0) can transmit the converted wireless signal to other wireless devices directly or to the base station.
기지국으로부터무선신호를수신한뒤,수신된무선신호를원래의정보/신호로 복원할수있다.복원된정보/신호는메모리부 (130)에저장된뒤, After receiving the wireless signal from the base station, the received wireless signal can be restored to the original information/signal. The restored information/signal is stored in the memory unit 130 and then
입출력부 (140c)를통해다양한형태 (예,문자,음성,이미지,비디오,헵틱)로 줄력될수있다. Through the input/output unit 140c, various forms (eg, text, voice, image, video, and heptic) can be displayed.
[429] 본밤명이적용되는차량또는자읍주해차량예 [429] Examples of vehicles to which Bonn Bam name applies or vehicles to park in Ja-eup
[43이 도 43는본발명에적용되는차량또는자율주행차량을예시한다.차량또는 자율주행차량은이동형로봇,차량,기차,유/무인비행체 (Aerial Vehicle, AV), 선박등으로구현될수있다. [43] Figure 43 illustrates a vehicle or an autonomous vehicle applied to the present invention. A vehicle or an autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, vehicle, train, manned/unmanned vehicle (Aerial Vehicle, AV), or a ship.
[431] 도 43를참조하면,차량또는자율주행차량 (100)은안테나부 (108), [431] Referring to FIG. 43, the vehicle or autonomous vehicle 100 includes an antenna unit 108,
통신부 (110),제어부 (120),구동부 (140a),전원공급부 (140b),센서부 (140c)및자율 주행부 (140d)를포함할수있다.안테나부 (108)는통신부 (H0)의일부로구성될 수있다.블록 110/130/140a~140d는각각도 41의블록 110/130/140에대응한다. A communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a driving unit 140a, a power supply unit 140b, a sensor unit 140c, and an autonomous driving unit 140d may be included. The antenna unit 108 is a part of the communication unit H0. Blocks 110/130/140a-140d correspond to blocks 110/130/140 of 41, respectively.
[432] 통신부 (110)는다른차량,기지국 (e.g.기지국,노변기지국 (Road Side unit)등), 서버등의외부기기들과신호 (예,데이터,제어신호등)를송수신할수있다. 제어부 (120)는차량또는자율주행차량 (100)의요소들을제어하여다양한 동작을수행할수있다.제어부 (120)는 ECU(Electronic Control Unit)를포함할수 있다.구동부 (140a)는차량또는자율주행차량 (100)을지상에서주행하게할수 있다.구동부 (140a)는엔진,모터,파워트레인,바퀴,브레이크,조향장치등을 포함할수있다.전원공급부 (140b)는차량또는자율주행차량 (100)에게전원을 공급하며 ,유/무선중전회로,배터리등을포함할수있다.센서부 (140c)는차량 상태,주변환경정보,사용자정보등을얻을수있다.센서부 (140c)는 [432] The communication unit 110 can transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other vehicles, base stations (e.g. base stations, roadside units, etc.), and external devices such as servers. The control unit 120 may control elements of the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 to perform various operations. The control unit 120 may include an ECU (Electronic Control Unit). The driving unit 140a is a vehicle or autonomously driving vehicle 100. The vehicle 100 can be driven on the ground. The driving unit 140a may include an engine, a motor, a powertrain, a wheel, a brake, a steering device, and the like. The power supply unit 140b is provided to the vehicle or autonomous vehicle 100. It supplies power, and may include wired/wireless heavy electrical circuits, batteries, etc. The sensor unit 140c can obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc. The sensor unit 140c is
IMU(inertial measurement unit)센서 ,중돌센서 ,휠센서 (wheel sensor),속도센서 , 경사센서 ,중량감지센서 ,헤딩센서 (heading sensor),포지션모듈 (position module),차량전진/후진센서,배터리센서 ,연료센서 ,타이어센서,스티어링 센서,온도센서,습도센서,초음파센서,조도센서,페달포지션센서등을 포함할수있다.자율주행부 (140d)는주행중인차선을유지하는기술,어맵티브 크루즈컨트롤과같이속도를자동으로조절하는기술,정해진경로를따라 자동으로주행하는기술,목적지가설정되면자동으로경로를설정하여 주행하는기술등을구현할수있다. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 IMU(inertial measurement unit) sensor, middle stone sensor, wheel sensor, speed sensor, inclination sensor, weight detection sensor, heading sensor, position module, vehicle forward/reverse sensor, battery sensor , Fuel sensor, tire sensor, steering sensor, temperature sensor, humidity sensor, ultrasonic sensor, illuminance sensor, pedal position sensor, etc. The autonomous driving unit 140d is a technology that maintains a driving lane, amaptive cruise control. As such, it is possible to implement a technology that automatically adjusts the speed, a technology that automatically runs along a specified path, and a technology that automatically sets a path when a destination is set and runs. 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889
[433] 일예로,통신부 (110)는외부서버로부터지도데이터 ,교통정보데이터등을 수신할수있다.자율주행부 (140(1)는획득된데이터를기반으로자율주행 경로와드라이빙플랜을생성할수있다.제어부 (120)는드라이빙플랜에따라 차량또는자율주행차량 (100)이자율주행경로를따라이동하도록 [433] As an example, the communication unit 110 may receive map data, traffic information data, etc. from an external server. The autonomous driving unit 140(1) may create an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the acquired data. According to the driving plan, the control unit 120 moves the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 along the interest rate driving path.
구동부 (140幻를제어할수있다 (예,속도/방향조절).자율주행도중에 Driving part (140 幻 can be controlled (e.g. speed/direction control). During autonomous driving
통신부 ( 0)는외부서버로부터최신교통정보데이터를비/주기적으로 획득하며,주변차량으로부터주변교통정보데이터를획득할수있다.또한, 자율주행도중에센서부 (14(切는차량상태,주변환경정보를획득할수있다. 자율주행부 (140(1)는새로획득된데이터/정보에기반하여자율주행경로와 드라이빙플랜을갱신할수있다.통신부 ( 0)는차량위치,자율주행경로, 드라이빙플랜등에관한정보를외부서버로전달할수있다.외부서버는차량 또는자율주행차량들로부터수집된정보에기반하여,시기술등을이용하여 교통정보데이터를미리예측할수있고,예측된교통정보데이터를차량또는 자율주행차량들에게제공할수있다. The communication unit (0) non/periodically obtains the latest traffic information data from an external server, and can obtain surrounding traffic information data from nearby vehicles. In addition, the sensor unit (14) during autonomous driving is the vehicle status and surrounding light information. The autonomous driving unit 140(1) can update the autonomous driving route and driving plan based on the newly acquired data/information. The communication department (0) can obtain the vehicle location, autonomous driving route, driving plan, etc. Information can be transferred to an external server. The external server can predict traffic information data in advance using city technology, etc., based on information collected from vehicles or autonomous vehicles, and can transmit the predicted traffic information data to the vehicle or autonomously. Can be provided to driving vehicles
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000063_0001
[435] 도 44은본발명에적용되는차량을예시한다.차량은운송수단,기차,비행체 , 선박등으로도구현될수있다. [435] Fig. 44 illustrates a vehicle applied to the present invention. The vehicle can be implemented as a means of transport, a train, a vehicle, a ship, and the like.
[436] 도 44을참조하면,차량 (100)은통신부 (110),제어부 (120),메모리부 (130), 입출력부 (140幻및위치측정부 (140비를포함할수있다.여기서,블록 Referring to FIG. 44, the vehicle 100 may include a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, an input/output unit 140 and a position measuring unit 140 ratio. Here, the block
110~130/14(切~14015는각각도 41의블록 110 130/140에대응한다. 110~130/14 (切~14015 corresponds to block 110 130/140 of 41, respectively.
[437] 통신부 ( 0)는다른차량,또는기지국등의외부기기들과신호 (예,데이터, 제어신호등)를송수신할수있다.제어부 (120)는차량 (100)의구성요소들을 제어하여다양한동작을수행할수있다.메모리부 (130)는차량 (100)의다양한 기능을지원하는데이터/파라미터/프로그램/코드/명령을저장할수있다. [437] The communication unit (0) can transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other vehicles or external devices such as base stations. The control unit 120 controls the components of the vehicle 100 to perform various operations. The memory unit 130 can store data/parameters/programs/codes/commands supporting various functions of the vehicle 100.
입출력부 (140幻는메모리부 (130)내의정보에기반하여
Figure imgf000063_0002
오브젝트를 출력할수있다.입출력부 (140幻는 111形를포함할수있다.위치측정부 (140비는 차량 (100)의위치정보를획득할수있다.위치정보는차량 (100)의절대위치 정보,주행선내에서의위치정보,가속도정보,주변차량과의위치정보등을 포함할수있다.위치측정부 (140비는 0?8및다양한센서들을포함할수있다.
Input/output unit (140幻 is based on the information in the memory unit 130)
Figure imgf000063_0002
The object can be output. The input/output unit (140幻 can include 111 type. The position measurement unit (140) can obtain the location information of the vehicle 100. The location information is the absolute location information of the vehicle 100, It can include location information, acceleration information, location information with nearby vehicles, etc. Position measurement unit (140 ratio can include 0-8 and various sensors.
[438] 일예로,차량 (100)의통신부 (110)는외부서버로부터지도정보,교통정보 등을수신하여메모리부 (130)에저장할수있다.위치측정부 (140비는 0?8및 다양한센서를통하여차량위치정보를획득하여메모리부 (130)에저장할수 있다.제어부 (120)는지도정보,교통정보및차량위치정보등에기반하여가상 오브젝트를생성하고,입출력부 (140 는생성된가상오브젝트를차량내 유리창에표시할수있다 (1410, 1420).또한,제어부 (120)는차량위치정보에 기반하여차량 (100)이주행선내에서정상적으로운행되고있는지판단할수 있다.차량 (100)이주행선을비정상적으로벗어나는경우,제어부 (120)는 입출력부 (140幻를통해차량내유리창에경고를표시할수있다.또한, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 제어부 (120)는통신부 (no)를통해주변차량들에게주행이상에관한경고 메세지를방송할수있다.상황에따라,제어부 (120)는통신부 (H0)를통해관계 기관에게차량의위치정보와,주행/차량이상에관한정보를전송할수있다. As an example, the communication unit 110 of the vehicle 100 may receive map information, traffic information, etc. from an external server and store it in the memory unit 130. The location measurement unit (140 ratio is 0 to 8 and various types) The vehicle location information can be acquired through the sensor and stored in the memory unit 130. The control unit 120 creates a virtual object based on map information, traffic information, and vehicle location information, and the input/output unit 140 is the generated virtual object. Objects can be displayed on the window of the vehicle (1410, 1420). In addition, the control unit 120 can determine whether the vehicle 100 is running normally in the driving ship based on the vehicle location information. If it deviates abnormally, the control unit 120 may display a warning on the window of the vehicle through the input/output unit 140. In addition, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 The control unit 120 can broadcast a warning message about driving abnormalities to nearby vehicles through the communication unit (no). Depending on the situation, the control unit 120 is the communication unit) Through (H0), information on the location of the vehicle and information on the driving/vehicle can be transmitted to the relevant agencies.
[439] 본밤명이적용되는 XR기기 예 [439] Examples of XR devices to which Bonbamname is applied
[440] 도 45은본발명에적용되는 XR기기를예시한다. XR기기는 HMD,차량에 구비된 HUD(Head-Up Display),텔레비전,스마트폰,컴퓨터,웨어러블디바이스, 가전기기,디지털사이니지 (signage),차량,로봇등으로구현될수있다. [440] Figure 45 illustrates an XR device applied to the present invention. XR devices can be implemented with HMD, head-up display (HUD) provided in vehicles, televisions, smartphones, computers, wearable devices, home appliances, digital signage, vehicles, and robots.
[441] 도 45을참조하면, XR기기 (100a)는통신부 (110),제어부 (120),메모리부 (130), 입출력부 (140a),센서부 (140b)및전원공급부 (140c)를포함할수있다.여기서, 블록 110~130/140a~140c은각각도 41의블록 110 130/140에대응한다. [441] Referring to Figure 45, the XR device (100a) includes a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a memory unit (130), an input/output unit (140a), a sensor unit (140b) and a power supply unit (140c) Here, blocks 110-130/140a-140c correspond to blocks 110-130/140 of 41, respectively.
[442] 통신부 (110)는다른무선기기 ,휴대기기 ,또는미디어서버등의외부 [442] The communication unit (110) is an external device such as other wireless devices, portable devices, or media servers.
기기들과신호 (예,미디어데이터,제어신호등)를송수신할수있다.미디어 데이터는영상,이미지 ,소리등을포함할수있다.제어부 (120)는 XR It can transmit and receive signals (e.g., media data, control signals, etc.) with devices. The media data may include images, images, sounds, etc. The control unit 120 is XR
기기 (100a)의구성요소들을제어하여다양한동작을수행할수있다.예를들어 , 제어부 (120)는비디오/이미지획득, (비디오/이미지)인코딩,메타데이터생성및 처리등의절차를제어및/또는수행하도록구성될수있다.메모리부 (130)는 XR 기기 (100a)의구동/ XR오브젝트의생성에필요한 Various operations can be performed by controlling the components of the device 100a. For example, the controller 120 controls and/or processes processes such as video/image acquisition, (video/image) encoding, and metadata generation and processing. Or it can be configured to perform. The memory unit 130 is required to drive the XR device 100a / create an XR object.
데이터/파라미터/프로그램/코드/명령을저장할수있다.입출력부 ( 140a)는 외부로부터제어정보,데이터등을획득하며,생성된 XR오브젝트를출력할수 있다.입출력부 (140a)는카메라,마이크로폰,사용자입력부,디스플레이부, 스피커및/또는햅틱모듈등을포함할수있다.센서부 (140b)는 XR기기상태 , 주변환경정보,사용자정보등을얻을수있다.센서부 (140b)는근접센서,조도 센서 ,가속도센서 ,자기센서,자이로센서 ,관성센서 , RGB센서 , IR센서 ,지문 인식센서,초음파센서,광센서,마이크로폰및/또는레이더등을포함할수 있다.전원공급부 (140c)는 XR기기 (100a)에게전원을공급하며,유/무선충전 회로,배터리등을포함할수있다. Data/parameters/programs/codes/commands can be stored. The input/output unit (1 40a) obtains control information and data from the outside, and can output the generated XR object. The input/output unit 140a is a camera and a microphone. , A user input unit, a display unit, a speaker and/or a haptic module, etc. The sensor unit 140b can obtain XR device status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc. The sensor unit 140b is a proximity sensor, illuminance. Sensors, acceleration sensors, magnetic sensors, gyro sensors, inertial sensors, RGB sensors, IR sensors, fingerprint recognition sensors, ultrasonic sensors, optical sensors, microphones and/or radars. Power supply unit 140c is an XR device It supplies power to 100a), and may include wired/wireless charging circuits, batteries, etc.
[443] 일예로, XR기기 (100a)의메모리부 (130)는 XR오브젝트 (예, ARAVR/MR [443] As an example, the memory unit 130 of the XR device 100a is an XR object (eg, ARAVR/MR
오브젝트)의생성에필요한정보 (예,데이터등)를포함할수있다. It can contain information (eg, data, etc.) necessary for the creation of an object).
입출력부 (140a)는사용자로부터 XR기기 (100a)를조작하는명령을회득할수 있으며,제어부 (120)는사용자의구동명령에따라 XR기기 (100a)를구동시킬수 있다.예를들어 ,사용자가 XR기기 (100a)를통해영화,뉴스등을시청하려고 하는경우,제어부 (120)는통신부 (130)를통해컨텐츠요청정보를다른기기 (예, 휴대기기 (100b))또는미디어서버에전송할수있다.통신부 (130)는다른 기기 (예,휴대기기 (WOb))또는미디어서버로부터영화,뉴스등의컨텐츠를 메모리부 (130)로다운로드/스트리밍받을수있다.제어부 (120)는컨텐츠에대해 비디오/이미지획득, (비디오/이미지)인코딩,메타데이터생성/처리등의절차를 제어및/또는수행하며,입출력부 (140a)/센서부 (140b)를통해획득한주변공간 또는현실오브젝트에대한정보에기반하여 XR오브젝트를생성/출력할수 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 있다. The input/output unit 140a can obtain a command for operating the XR device 100a from the user, and the control unit 120 can drive the XR device 100a according to the user's driving command. For example, the user can drive the XR device 100a. When attempting to watch movies, news, etc. through the device 100a, the control unit 120 may transmit the content request information to another device (eg, a mobile device 100b) or a media server through the communication unit 130. The communication unit 130 may download/stream content such as movies and news from another device (e.g., a portable device (WOb)) or a media server to the memory unit 130. The control unit 120 receives video/images for the content. Controls and/or performs procedures such as acquisition, (video/image) encoding, and metadata generation/processing, and is based on information about the surrounding space or real objects acquired through the input/output unit 140a/sensor unit 140b. To create/output XR objects 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 There is.
[444] 또한, XII기기 (100幻는통신부 (110)를통해휴대기기 (100비와무선으로 [444] In addition, XII devices (100 units are mobile devices via the Ministry of Communications (110))
연결되며, XII기기 (100幻의동작은휴대기기 (10아5)에의해제어될수있다.예를 들어,휴대기기 (10015)는 XII기기 (100幻에대한콘트롤러로동작할수있다.이를 위해, XII기기 (100幻는휴대기기 (10아5)의 3차원위치정보를획득한뒤,휴대 기기 (10아5)에대응하는 XII개체를생성하여출력할수있다. It is connected, and the operation of the XII device (100幻) can be controlled by the portable device (10A5). For example, the mobile device (10015) can operate as a controller for the XII device (100幻. For this purpose, XII) After acquiring the 3D location information of the device (100 幻), it is possible to create and output XII objects corresponding to the mobile device (10 yrs5).
[445] 본밤명이적용되는로분예 [445] A road to which the name of Bonbam is applied
[446] 도 46은본발명에적용되는로봇을예시한다.로봇은사용목적이나분야에 따라산업용,의료용,가정용,군사용등으로분류될수있다. [446] Fig. 46 illustrates a robot applied to the present invention. Robots can be classified into industrial, medical, household, military, etc. depending on the purpose or field of use.
[447] 도 46을참조하면,로봇 (100)은통신부 (110),제어부 (120),메모리부 (130), [447] Referring to Figure 46, the robot 100 is a communication unit 110, the control unit 120, the memory unit 130,
입출력부 (140幻,센서부 (140비및구동부 (14(切를포함할수있다.여기서,블록 110~130/14(切~14此은각각도 41의블록 110 130/140에대응한다. The input/output unit 140, the sensor unit 140 and the drive unit 14 may be included. Here, blocks 110 to 130/14 (切 to 14) correspond to blocks 110 and 130/140 of 41, respectively.
[448] 통신부 (110)는다른무선기기 ,다른로봇,또는제어서버등의외부기기들과 신호 (예,구동정보,제어신호등)를송수신할수있다.제어부 (120)는 The communication unit 110 can transmit and receive signals (eg, driving information, control signals, etc.) with other wireless devices, other robots, or external devices such as a control server.
로봇 (100)의구성요소들을제어하여다양한동작을수행할수있다. By controlling the components of the robot 100, it is possible to perform various operations.
메모리부 (130)는로봇 (100)의다양한기능을지원하는 The memory unit 130 supports various functions of the robot 100.
데이터/파라미터/프로그램/코드/명령을저장할수있다.입출력부 ( 140幻는 로봇 (100)의외부로부터정보를획득하며,로봇 (100)의외부로정보를출력할수 있다.입출력부 (140幻는카메라,마이크로폰,사용자입력부,디스플레이부, 스피커및/또는햅틱모듈등을포함할수있다.센서부 (140비는로봇 (100)의내부 정보,주변환경정보,사용자정보등을얻을수있다.센서부 (140비는근접센서, 조도센서,가속도센서,자기센서,자이로센서,관성센서, III센서,지문인식 센서,초음파센서,광센서,마이크로폰,레이더등을포함할수있다. Data/parameters/programs/codes/commands can be stored I/O unit (1 40°) obtains information from the outside of the robot 100 and can output information to the outside of the robot 100. I/O unit (140 units) May include a camera, a microphone, a user input unit, a display unit, a speaker and/or a haptic module, etc. A sensor unit (140 is able to obtain internal information of the robot 100, information about a peripheral environment, user information, etc. Sensor unit) (140 ratio may include proximity sensor, illumination sensor, acceleration sensor, magnetic sensor, gyro sensor, inertial sensor, III sensor, fingerprint recognition sensor, ultrasonic sensor, light sensor, microphone, radar, etc.
구동부 (14(切는로봇관절을움직이는등의다양한물리적동작을수행할수 있다.또한,구동부 (14(切는로봇 (100)을지상에서주행하거나공중에서 비행하게할수있다.구동부 (140 는액츄에이터 ,모터 ,바퀴 ,브레이크, 프로펠러등을포함할수있다. The drive unit 14 can perform various physical movements such as moving the robot joint. In addition, the drive unit 14 can make the robot 100 run on the ground or fly in the air. The drive unit 140 is an actuator, a motor, and so on. , Wheels, brakes, propellers, etc.
[449] 본밤명이적용되는시기기예 [449] Examples of the period when the name of the bosom name is applied
[45이 도 47는본발명에적용되는시기기를예시한다.시기기는 IV,프로젝터 , 스마트폰, 1(,노트북,디지털방송용단말기,태블릿 1(,웨어러블장치, 셋톱박스 16),라디오,세탁기,냉장고,디지털사이니지,로봇,차량등과같은, 고정형기기또는이동가능한기기등으로구현될수있다. [45] Figure 47 illustrates the timing period applied to the present invention. The timing period is IV, projector, smartphone, 1 (, laptop, digital broadcasting terminal, tablet 1 (, wearable device, set-top box 16), radio, washing machine, refrigerator It can be implemented as a fixed device, such as a digital signage, a robot, a vehicle, or a mobile device.
[451] 도 47를참조하면,시기기 (100)는통신부 (110),제어부 (120),메모리부 (130), 입/출력부 (1403/14아5),러닝프로세서부 (14(切및센서부 (140(1)를포함할수있다. 블록 110~130/14(切~140(1는각각도 41의블록 110 130/140에대응한다. [451] Referring to FIG. 47, the timing device 100 includes a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, an input/output unit 1403/14A5, and a running processor unit 14(切And a sensor unit 140(1). Blocks 110 to 130/14 (切 to 140 (1) correspond to blocks 110 and 130/140 of 41, respectively.
[452] 통신부 (110)는유무선통신기술을이용하여다른시기기 (예,도 38, 100 , 200, 400)나시서버 (예,도 38의 400)등의외부기기들과유무선신호 (예,센서정보, 사용자입력,학습모델,제어신호등)를송수신할수있다.이를위해, 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 통신부 ( 0)는메모리부 (130)내의정보를외부기기로전송하거나,외부 기기로부터수신된신호를메모리부 (130)로전달할수있다. [452] The communication unit 110 uses wired/wireless communication technology to communicate with external devices such as other devices (eg, Figs. 38, 100, 200, 400) and wired/wireless signals (eg, 400 in Fig. 38). Sensor information, user input, learning model, control signal, etc.) can be transmitted and received. 2020/175955 1» (: 1^1{2020/002889) The communication unit (0) can transmit information in the memory unit 130 to an external device, or transmit a signal received from the external device to the memory unit 130.
[453] 제어부 (120)는데이터분석알고리즘또는머신러닝알고리즘을사용하여 결정되거나생성된정보에기초하여 ,시기기 ( ^0)의적어도하나의실행가능한 동작을결정할수있다.그리고,제어부 (120)는시기기 (100)의구성요소들을 제어하여결정된동작을수행할수있다.예를들어,제어부 (120)는러닝 프로세서부 (14(切또는메모리부 (130)의데이터를요청,검색,수신또는활용할 수있고,적어도하나의실행가능한동작중예측되는동작이나,바람직한 것으로판단되는동작을실행하도록시기기 (100)의구성요소들을제어할수 있다.또한,제어부 (120)는시장치 (100)의동작내용이나동작에대한사용자의 피드백등을포함하는이력정보를수집하여메모리부 (130)또는러닝 프로세서부 (14(切에저장하거나,시서버 (도 38, 400)등의외부장치에전송할수 있다.수집된이력정보는학습모델을갱신하는데이용될수있다. The control unit 120 may determine at least one executable operation of the timing unit (^0) based on information determined or generated using a data analysis algorithm or a machine learning algorithm. And, the control unit 120 ) Can perform a determined operation by controlling the components of the timing device 100. For example, the control unit 120 may request, search, and receive data from the learning processor unit 14 (or memory unit 130). Alternatively, it is possible to control the components of the timing device 100 to perform an action that is available, and at least one of the possible actions that are predicted or that is judged to be desirable. In addition, the control unit 120 is the viewing device 100. Collects the history information including the user's feedback on the operation content or operation of the memory unit 130 or the learning processor unit 14 (stored, or transmitted to an external device such as a city server (Figs. 38, 400) The collected historical information can be used to update the learning model.
[454] 메모리부 (130)는시기기 (100)의다양한기능을지원하는데이터를저장할수 있다.예를들어,메모리부 (130)는입력부 (140幻로부터얻은데이터, The memory unit 130 may store data supporting various functions of the timing device 100. For example, the memory unit 130 may store data obtained from the input unit 140,
통신부 ( 0)로부터얻은데이터,러닝프로세서부 (14(切의출력데이터,및 센싱부 (140)로부터얻은데이터를저장할수있다.또한,메모리부 (130)는 제어부 (120)의동작/실행에필요한제어정보및/또는소프트웨어코드를저장할 수있다. The data obtained from the communication unit 0, the learning processor unit 14 (output data, and data obtained from the sensing unit 140) can be stored. In addition, the memory unit 130 is used for the operation/execution of the control unit 120. The necessary control information and/or software code can be stored.
[455] 입력부 (140幻는시기기 (100)의외부로부터다양한종류의데이터를획득할수 있다.예를들어,입력부 (140幻는모델학습을위한학습데이터,및학습모델이 적용될입력데이터등을획득할수있다.입력부 (140幻는카메라,마이크로폰 및/또는사용자입력부등을포함할수있다.출력부 (140비는시각,청각또는 촉각등과관련된출력을발생시킬수있다.출력부 (140비는디스플레이부, 스피커및/또는햅틱모듈등을포함할수있다.센싱부 (140)는다양한센서들을 이용하여시기기 (100)의내부정보,시기기 (100)의주변환경정보및사용자 정보중적어도하나를얻을수있다.센싱부 (140)는근접센서,조도센서,가속도 센서 ,자기센서 ,자이로센서 ,관성센서 , 1 36센서 , ^센서,지문인식센서 , 초음파센서,광센서,마이크로폰및/또는레이더등을포함할수있다. [455] The input unit 140 can acquire various types of data from the outside of the timing device 100. For example, the input unit 140 stores learning data for model learning, and input data to which the learning model is applied. The input unit 140 may include a camera, a microphone and/or a user input unit. The output unit 140 may generate an output related to the visual, audible or tactile sense. The output unit 140 is a display unit. , A speaker and/or a haptic module, etc. The sensing unit 140 can obtain at least one of internal information of the device 100, information of the peripheral environment of the device 100, and user information by using various sensors. The sensing unit 140 is a proximity sensor, illuminance sensor, acceleration sensor, magnetic sensor, gyro sensor, inertial sensor, 1 36 sensor, ^ sensor, fingerprint recognition sensor, ultrasonic sensor, optical sensor, microphone and/or radar. Can include
[456] 러닝프로세서부 (14(切는학습데이터를이용하여인공신경망으로구성된 모델을학습시킬수있다.러닝프로세서부 (140 는시서버 (도 38, 400)의러닝 프로세서부와함께시프로세싱을수행할수있다.러닝프로세서부 (14(切는 통신부 ( 0)를통해외부기기로부터수신된정보,및/또는메모리부 (130)에 저장된정보를처리할수있다.또한,러닝프로세서부 (14(切의출력값은 통신부 ( 0)를통해외부기기로전송되거나/되고,메모리부 (130)에저장될수 있다. [456] Learning processor unit (14) can train a model composed of an artificial neural network using the learning data. The running processor unit 140 performs sea processing together with the running processor unit of the city server (Figs. 38 and 400). The running processor unit 14 can process information received from an external device through the communication unit 0 and/or the information stored in the memory unit 130. In addition, the running processor unit 14 can process the information stored in the memory unit 130. The output value may be transmitted to an external device through the communication unit 0 and/or may be stored in the memory unit 130.
산업상이용가능성 2020/175955 1»(:1/10公020/002889 Industrial availability 2020/175955 1»(:1/10公020/002889
[457] 상술한바와같은실시형태들은다양한이동통신시스템에적용될수있다. [457] Embodiments as described above can be applied to various mobile communication systems.

Claims

2020/175955 1»(:1/10公020/002889 청구범위 2020/175955 1»(:1/10公020/002889 Claims
[청구항 1] 무선통신시스템에서제 1단말을위한신호송수신방법에 있어서 , [Claim 1] In the method of transmitting and receiving a signal for a first terminal in a wireless communication system,
제 2단말로부터 SCI(Sidelink Control Information)를포함하는 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)를수신하는단계 ; 상기제 2단말로부터상기 SCI에기반하여참조신호를포함하는 Receiving a PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel) including SCI (Sidelink Control Information) from the second terminal; Including a reference signal based on the SCI from the second terminal
PSSCH((Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)를수신하는단계 ; 상기참조신호를기반으로채널상태측정을수행하는단계;및 Receiving a PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel); performing a channel state measurement based on the reference signal; And
RLC(Radio Link Control)계층의정보를상기제 2단말로전송하는단계 ; 를포함하되 , Transmitting RLC (Radio Link Control) layer information to the second terminal; Including,
상기채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인것에기반하여,상기 RLC 계증의정보는 RLC ARQ( Automatic Repeat reQuest)동작을트리거링하는 정보를포함하는,방법 . Based on that the result of the channel state measurement is less than or equal to a threshold value, the information of the RLC verification includes information for triggering an RLC ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) operation.
[청구항 2] 제 1항에 있어서, [Claim 2] The method of claim 1,
상기채널상태측정의결과가상기임계값이하인것에기반하여,상기 제 2단말로부터상기 RLC계층의정보에대한 ACK(Acknowledgement) 또는 NACK(Negative-ACK)정보를수신하는단계를더포함하는,방법 . The method further comprising the step of receiving ACK (Acknowledgement) or NACK (Negative-ACK) information for the information of the RLC layer from the second terminal based on the result of the channel state measurement being less than the threshold value.
[청구항 3] 제 1항에 있어서, [Claim 3] The method of claim 1,
상기 RLC계층의정보는 RLC PDU(Protocol Data Unit)인,방법 . The information of the RLC layer is an RLC Protocol Data Unit (PDU).
[청구항 4] 제 3항에 있어서, [Claim 4] In paragraph 3,
상기 RLC PDU는 RLC헤더 (Header)를포함하고, The RLC PDU includes an RLC header,
상기 RLC헤더는상기 RLC ARQ동작을트리거링하는정보를포함하는, 방법. The RLC header includes information for triggering the RLC ARQ operation.
[청구항 5] 제 4항에 있어서, [Claim 5] The method of claim 4,
상기 RLC헤더는 1비트의폴링비트를포함하고, The RLC header includes a polling bit of 1 bit,
상기채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인것에기반하여,상기폴링 비트는 1로설정되고, Based on the result of the channel state measurement being less than the threshold value, the polling bit is set to 1,
상기채널상태측정의결과가임계값초과인것에기반하여,상기폴링 비트는 0으로설정되는,방법. Based on that the result of the channel state measurement exceeds a threshold value, the polling bit is set to 0.
[청구항 6] 제 1항에 있어서, [Claim 6] The method of claim 1,
상기채널상태측정의결과가상기임계값을초과한것에기반하여 ,상기 RLC계층의정보는상기 RLC ARQ동작을중지하는정보를포함하는, 방법. Based on the result of the channel state measurement exceeding the threshold value, the information of the RLC layer includes information for stopping the RLC ARQ operation.
[청구항 7] 제 1항에 있어서, [Claim 7] The method of claim 1,
상기 PSSCH에대한 HARQ(Hybrid-ARQ)동작을수행하는단계를더 포함하는,방법 . Further comprising the step of performing a HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ) operation for the PSSCH, the method.
[청구항 8] 제 1항에 있어서, [Claim 8] The method of claim 1,
상기채널상태측정의결과가상기임계값이하인지여부를판단하는 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889 단계를더포함하는,방법 . To determine whether the result of the channel state measurement is below the threshold 2020/175955 1»(:1^1{2020/002889, method.
[청구항 9] 무선통신시스템에서 , [Claim 9] In a wireless communication system,
적어도하나의프로세서;및 At least one processor; and
상기 적어도하나의프로세서에동작가능하게 연결될수있고,실행될때 상기 적어도하나의프로세서로하여금동작들을수행하게하는 명령들을저장하는적어도하나의 컴퓨터 메모리를포함하며 , 상기동작들은,제 2단말로부터 SCI(Sidelk止 Control Information)를 포함하는 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)를수신하는단계 ; 상기 제 2단말로부터상기 SCI에기반하여 참조신호를포함하는 It may be operatively connected to the at least one processor, and includes at least one computer memory storing instructions for causing the at least one processor to perform current operations when executed, the operations being SCI( Receiving a PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel) including Sidelk Control Information); Including a reference signal based on the SCI from the second terminal
PSSCH((Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)를수신하는단계 ; 상기 참조신호를기반으로채널상태측정을수행하는단계;및 Receiving a PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel); performing a channel state measurement based on the reference signal; And
RLC(Radio Link Control)계층의 정보를상기 제 2단말로전송하는단계 ; 를포함하되 , Transmitting information of a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer to the second terminal; Including,
상기 채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인것에기반하여,상기 RLC 계증의 정보는 RLC ARQ( Automatic Repeat reQuest)동작을트리거링하는 정보를포함하는,제 1단말. Based on the result of the channel state measurement being equal to or less than a threshold value, the RLC verification information includes information for triggering an RLC ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) operation.
[청구항 10] 적어도하나의프로세서에 의해실행될때,적어도하나의프로세서가 [Claim 10] When executed by at least one processor, at least one processor
UE를위한동작들을수행하게하는명령을포함하는적어도하나의 컴퓨터프로그램을저장하는컴퓨터판독가능저장매체에 있어서, 상기동작들은,제 2단말로부터 SCI(Sidelk止 Control Information)를 포함하는 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)를수신하는단계 ; 상기 제 2단말로부터상기 SCI에기반하여 참조신호를포함하는 In a computer-readable storage medium that stores at least one computer program including an instruction to perform operations for a UE, the operations are PSCCH (Physical Sidelink) including Sidelk Control Information (SCI) from a second terminal. Control Channel); Including a reference signal based on the SCI from the second terminal
PSSCH((Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)를수신하는단계 ; 상기 참조신호를기반으로채널상태측정을수행하는단계;및 Receiving a PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel); performing a channel state measurement based on the reference signal; And
RLC(Radio Link Control)계층의 정보를상기 제 2단말로전송하는단계 ; 를포함하되 , Transmitting information of a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer to the second terminal; Including,
상기 채널상태측정의결과가임계값이하인것에기반하여,상기 RLC 계증의 정보는 RLC ARQ( Automatic Repeat reQuest)동작을트리거링하는 정보를포함하는,저장매체. Based on the result of the channel state measurement being less than or equal to a threshold value, the RLC verification information includes information for triggering an RLC Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) operation.
[청구항 11] 제 9항에 있어서, [Claim 11] The method of claim 9,
상기 제 1단말은다른단말,자율주행차량에관련된단말또는기지국 또는네트워크중적어도하나와통신하는것인,제 1단말. The first terminal communicates with at least one of another terminal, a terminal related to an autonomous vehicle, or a base station or a network.
PCT/KR2020/002889 2019-02-28 2020-02-28 Method for transmitting or receiving signal in wireless communication system, and device for performing same WO2020175955A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201962812124P 2019-02-28 2019-02-28
US62/812,124 2019-02-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020175955A1 true WO2020175955A1 (en) 2020-09-03

Family

ID=72239647

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2020/002889 WO2020175955A1 (en) 2019-02-28 2020-02-28 Method for transmitting or receiving signal in wireless communication system, and device for performing same

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2020175955A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11177536A (en) * 1997-12-08 1999-07-02 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Error control system for radio data link layer
JP2008022370A (en) * 2006-07-13 2008-01-31 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Retransmission control method, retransmission control device, and communication device
KR20180117132A (en) * 2016-04-01 2018-10-26 엘지전자 주식회사 A method for transmitting downlink control information for side link scheduling in a wireless communication system,
KR20180131411A (en) * 2017-05-31 2018-12-10 한국전자통신연구원 Method for communicating in mobile communication system and apparatus for the same

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11177536A (en) * 1997-12-08 1999-07-02 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Error control system for radio data link layer
JP2008022370A (en) * 2006-07-13 2008-01-31 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Retransmission control method, retransmission control device, and communication device
KR20180117132A (en) * 2016-04-01 2018-10-26 엘지전자 주식회사 A method for transmitting downlink control information for side link scheduling in a wireless communication system,
KR20180131411A (en) * 2017-05-31 2018-12-10 한국전자통신연구원 Method for communicating in mobile communication system and apparatus for the same

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SAMSUNG: "On Physical Layer Procedures for NR V2X . Rl-1901048", 3 GPP TSG RAN WG1 AD-HOC MEETING 1901, 11 January 2019 (2019-01-11), Taipei, Taiwan *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102544446B1 (en) Method related to timing of transmitting feedback information in a wireless communication system
JP7293395B2 (en) Method of UE operation in relation to sidelink communication and feedback in a wireless communication system
JP7278391B2 (en) Method for transmitting sidelink HARQ feedback in a wireless communication system
KR102248078B1 (en) A method of operating a sidelink Tx UE that transmits RRC messages related to RLF after RRC resumes in a wireless communication system
CN113287357B (en) Method for transmitting feedback information in wireless communication system
US20200359375A1 (en) Method for determining slot in which psfch is transmitted in wireless communication system
KR20220027988A (en) Operation method of UE related to sidelink DRX in a wireless communication system
US20220078753A1 (en) Method for allocating sidelink resource in wireless communication system
US20220417854A1 (en) Ue operation method related to sidelink drx in wireless communication system
US20220140956A1 (en) Sidelink signal transmission method in wireless communication system
US20200344574A1 (en) Method of ue operation related to feedback resource determination in sidelink groupcast in communication system
JP7136848B2 (en) Method of operation of RLF-related terminal in wireless communication system
TW202038666A (en) Method of operating transmitting ue in relation to rlf reporting in wireless communication system
KR20210122859A (en) How to transmit a sidelink signal in a wireless communication system
US20210120383A1 (en) Operation method related to ue that transmits signal on unicast link in bandwidth part in wireless communication system
US20220217657A1 (en) Operating method of ue related to sidelink communication and feedback transmission resource in wireless communication system
US20220322324A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving sidelink signal in wireless communication system
US20210120600A1 (en) Operation method of sidelink ue related to unicast link in wireless communication system
US20220240237A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving sidelink signal in wireless communication system
US20220167207A1 (en) Method for operating ue related to bsr in wireless communication system
US20220191831A1 (en) Method and device for allocating resource for sidelink signal in wireless communication system
KR102659986B1 (en) How to transmit feedback information in a wireless communication system
KR102659985B1 (en) How to transmit sidelink HARQ feedback in a wireless communication system
WO2020175955A1 (en) Method for transmitting or receiving signal in wireless communication system, and device for performing same
KR20210096298A (en) How to transmit sidelink HARQ feedback in a wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20763799

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20763799

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1